添加链接
link之家
链接快照平台
  • 输入网页链接,自动生成快照
  • 标签化管理网页链接
相关文章推荐
坏坏的眼镜  ·  Laravel ...·  1 年前    · 
In this article
dropdown icon
Introduction to Webex Contact Center
    Webex Contact Center Overview
      About Sites, Teams, Entry Points, and Queues
        Webex Contact Center Management Portal
          Webex Contact Center Modules
            About Time Zones
              PCI compliance
dropdown icon
Get Started with Webex Contact Center
    dropdown icon
    System Requirements
      Supported Browsers for Management Portal
      Domain Access Required for Desktop
    System Limits in Webex Contact Center
      Sign in to Management Portal
        About Management Portal Components
          dropdown icon
          About Dashboards
            Entry Point - Site Level Dashboard
            Contact Center Overview - Historical
          Change User Interface Colors
            Create a Custom Theme
              View and Regenerate Your API Key
                Access Audit Trail Reports
dropdown icon
Provisioning Webex Contact Center Resources
    dropdown icon
    Tenant Settings
      General Settings
      Desktop settings
      Provisioning
      Settings
    dropdown icon
    Entry Points and Queues
      Create an Entry Point
      View the Details of an Entry Point
      Edit an Entry Point
      Copy an Entry Point
      Create an Outdial Entry Point
      View the Details of an Outdial Entry Point
      Edit an Outdial Entry Point
      Copy an Outdial Entry Point
      Create a Queue and an Outdial Queue
      View the Details of a Queue or an Outdial Queue
      Edit a Queue or an Outdial Queue
      Copy a Queue or an Outdial Queue
      Deactivate an Entry Point or a Queue
      Activate an Entry Point or a Queue
    dropdown icon
    Sites
      Create a Site
      View the Details of a Site
      Edit a Site
      Deactivate a Site
      Activate a Site
    dropdown icon
    Teams
      Create a team
      View a team
      Edit a team
      Deactivate a team
      Activate a Team
    dropdown icon
    Users
      View the Details of a User
      Edit a User
      Export Items Provisioned for a User
      Revoke API Key for a User
      Update and Upload Agent Template
    dropdown icon
    User Profiles
      Manage a User Profile
      View the Details of a User Profile
      Edit a User Profile
      Deactivate a User Profile
      Activate a User Profile
      Copy a User Profile
    dropdown icon
    Work Types
      Create a Work Type
      Edit a Work Type
      Deactivate a Work Type
      Activate a Work Type
    dropdown icon
    Auxiliary Codes
      Create Idle or Wrap-Up Codes
      Edit Idle or Wrap-Up Codes
      Delete Idle or Wrap-up Codes
    dropdown icon
    Desktop Profiles
      Create a Desktop Profile
      View the Details of a Desktop Profile
      Edit a Desktop Profile
      Copy a Desktop Profile
      Deactivate a Desktop Profile
      Activate a Desktop Profile
    dropdown icon
    Address Books
      Create an Address Book
      Edit an Address Book
      Delete an Address Book
    dropdown icon
    Outdial Automatic Number Identification (ANI)
      Create an Outdial ANI
      Edit an Outdial ANI
      Delete an Outdial ANI
    dropdown icon
    Dial Plans
      Regular expression for the default US dial plan
      Regular expression for the default Any Format dial plan
      Create a Dial Plan
      Edit a Dial Plan
      Delete a Dial Plan
    dropdown icon
    Global Variables
      Create a Global Variable
      Edit a Global Variable
      Deactivate a Global Variable
      Activate a Global Variable
    dropdown icon
    Multimedia Profiles
      Create a Multimedia Profile
      View the Details of a Multimedia Profile
      Edit a Multimedia Profile
      Deactivate a Multimedia Profile
      Activate a Multimedia Profile
    dropdown icon
    Desktop Layout
      Create a Desktop Layout
      View a Desktop Layout
      Edit a Desktop Layout
      Copy a Desktop Layout
      Deactivate a Desktop Layout
      Activate a Desktop Layout
    dropdown icon
    Skill Definitions
      Create a Skill Definition
      Edit a Skill Definition
      Deactivate a Skill Definition
      Activate a Skill Definition
    dropdown icon
    Skill Profiles
      Create a Skill Profile
      Edit a Skill Profile
      Copy a Skill Profile
      Delete a Skill Profile
    dropdown icon
    Threshold Rules
      Call Metrics
      Agent Metrics
      Create a Threshold Rule
      Copy a Threshold Rule
      Edit a Threshold Rule
      Deactivate a Threshold Rule
      Activate a Threshold Rule
    dropdown icon
    Entry Point Mappings
      Map an Entry Point
      Edit Dial Number to Entry Point Mappings
      Delete Dial Number to Entry Point Mappings
    dropdown icon
    Reports for the Provisioned Items
      Manage Reports for the Provisioned Items
    Delete inactive objects permanently
dropdown icon
Business Rules
    About Business Rules Engine
      Configure BRE
dropdown icon
Contact Routing
    dropdown icon
    About Contact Routing
      About Skills-based Routing
      Routing of Parked Contacts
      Set Up Skills-Based Routing
      Agent-based Routing
      About global routing overrides
    Configure Multimedia Profiles
      dropdown icon
      Working with Resource Files
        Upload an Audio Resource File
        Edit an Audio Resource File
        Play or Download a .wav File
        Update a Resource File
        Copy a Resource File
        Export References to a Media File
        Create a Predefined Email Template
        Configure a Predefined Chat Template
        Create a Predefined Chat Response
      dropdown icon
      Configure Routing Resources
        About Team Types
        View routing strategies for an entry point or queue
        View the current routing strategies
        View routing strategies by time zone
        Create a routing strategy
        Modify a Routing Strategy
        Routing Strategies Deletion and Restoration
        Audio on Hold
      dropdown icon
      Working with Global Routing Overrides
        View global routing overrides
        Create global routing overrides
        Edit a global routing override
        Global routing override parameters
        Delete a global routing override
        Restore or permanently delete a global routing override
dropdown icon
Flow Designer
    Flow Designer Overview
      Getting Started
        Key Terminology
          Access the Flow Designer Application
            Flow Designer Browser Requirements
              Flow Designer Email Requirements
                dropdown icon
                Flow Designer Layout
                  Activity Library
                  Canvas, Main Flow, and Event Flows
                  Properties Pane
                  Header Pane
                  Footer Pane
                dropdown icon
                Flow Designer Activities and Events
                  Activities in Call Handling
                  Activities in Flow Control
                  Events
                dropdown icon
                Variables and Expressions in Flow Designer
                  Custom Flow Variables
                  Predefined Variables
                  Global Variables in Flow Designer
                  Desktop viewable variables
                  JSON Variables
                  Writing Expressions
                  Pebble Template Syntax
                  Validate Expressions
                dropdown icon
                Create and Manage Flows
                  Create a Flow
                  Edit Flow Variables
                  Modify a Flow
                  Search entities in a flow
                  Apply version labels to a flow
                  Enable or Disable the Autosave Option
                  Copy and Paste Activities
                  Validate a Flow
                  Copy a Flow
                  Export a Flow
                  Import a Flow
                  Publish a Flow
                  Delete a Flow
                  Entry Point Routing Strategies
                  Queue Routing Strategies
                dropdown icon
                Create and manage subflows
                  Create a subflow
                  Edit a subflow
                  Delete a subflow
                  Add subflow to a main flow
                Error Handling
                  Flow Chaining
                    Flow Tracing
                      Flow Designer Error Codes
dropdown icon
Call Monitoring
    dropdown icon
    Monitor Calls
      Monitoring Overview
      Monitor Calls
      Coach an Agent
      Barge in on a Call
      Viewing Call Monitoring Information
      Working with Monitoring Schedules
dropdown icon
Call Recording
    dropdown icon
    Call Recording
      Segment Recording
    Create or Edit a Recording Schedule
      Deleting a Recording Schedule
dropdown icon
Recording Management
    Search for and Play Recordings
      Assign and Remove Tags
        dropdown icon
        Search Attributes
          Create and Export Tags
Digital Channels
dropdown icon
Transfer Outdial Calls to Queue
    Map the Outdial Transfer to Queue Entry Point to a DN
      Transfer an Outdial Call to a Queue on the Agent Desktop
        View Agent Outdial Statistics Report
dropdown icon
Agent Transfer a Call to an Entry Point
    Task Flow to Transfer a Call to an Entry Point
dropdown icon
Play a Stereo Recording
    Play a Stereo Recorded File
dropdown icon
Opt Out When in Queue
    Task Flow to Set Up the Opt-Out Functionality
      View Opt-out-of-Queue Report
dropdown icon
Webex Calling Integration
    Webex Calling Integration Task Flow
dropdown icon
Blended Multimedia Profiles
    Overview
      Configure a Multimedia Profile
        Associate a Multimedia Profile to an Agent, Team, or Site
          Assign Contacts to Agents
            View Agent Details
dropdown icon
Courtesy Callback
    About Courtesy Callback
      Configure the Callback Flow
        Make a Courtesy Callback
          View Courtesy Callback Reports
dropdown icon
Self Service
    Configure Entry Point and Select the Flow in Routing Strategy
      dropdown icon
      Enable a Virtual Agent
        Build a Dialogflow Agent
        Configure Virtual Agent
        Create VA activity in Flow Designer
      Blind Transfer
        Disconnect Contact
          IVR Transcript and global Variables in Agent Desktop
            IVR and CVA Dialog Flow Report in Analyzer
              dropdown icon
              Text-to-Speech
                Create a Service Account for Google Connector
                Configure a Google Connector
                Text-to-Speech Toggle
dropdown icon
Cisco Webex Experience Management Post Call Survey
    Webex Experience Management Account Setup
      Create a Webex Experience Management Connector
        dropdown icon
        Create Feedback Activity in the Flow Designer
          Configure an IVR Post-call Survey
          Configure SMS or Email Post-Call Survey
        View Agent Desktop Widgets
dropdown icon
Troubleshooting
    dropdown icon
    Troubleshooting Management Portal Problems
      Management Portal Problems
      Reporting Management Portal Issues to Customer Support
    dropdown icon
    Troubleshooting Desktop Problems
      Network Interruptions
      Desktop Application Problems
      Audio Problems
      Reporting Agent Desktop Issues to Customer Support
dropdown icon
Report Parameters
    Call Report Parameters
      Agent Report Parameters
        Historical Skill Report Parameters
          Historical Threshold Alerts Report Parameters
            Usage Metrics Report Parameters
In this article
cross icon
dropdown icon
Introduction to Webex Contact Center
    Webex Contact Center Overview
      About Sites, Teams, Entry Points, and Queues
        Webex Contact Center Management Portal
          Webex Contact Center Modules
            About Time Zones
              PCI compliance
dropdown icon
Get Started with Webex Contact Center
    dropdown icon
    System Requirements
      Supported Browsers for Management Portal
      Domain Access Required for Desktop
    System Limits in Webex Contact Center
      Sign in to Management Portal
        About Management Portal Components
          dropdown icon
          About Dashboards
            Entry Point - Site Level Dashboard
            Contact Center Overview - Historical
          Change User Interface Colors
            Create a Custom Theme
              View and Regenerate Your API Key
                Access Audit Trail Reports
dropdown icon
Provisioning Webex Contact Center Resources
    dropdown icon
    Tenant Settings
      General Settings
      Desktop settings
      Provisioning
      Settings
    dropdown icon
    Entry Points and Queues
      Create an Entry Point
      View the Details of an Entry Point
      Edit an Entry Point
      Copy an Entry Point
      Create an Outdial Entry Point
      View the Details of an Outdial Entry Point
      Edit an Outdial Entry Point
      Copy an Outdial Entry Point
      Create a Queue and an Outdial Queue
      View the Details of a Queue or an Outdial Queue
      Edit a Queue or an Outdial Queue
      Copy a Queue or an Outdial Queue
      Deactivate an Entry Point or a Queue
      Activate an Entry Point or a Queue
    dropdown icon
    Sites
      Create a Site
      View the Details of a Site
      Edit a Site
      Deactivate a Site
      Activate a Site
    dropdown icon
    Teams
      Create a team
      View a team
      Edit a team
      Deactivate a team
      Activate a Team
    dropdown icon
    Users
      View the Details of a User
      Edit a User
      Export Items Provisioned for a User
      Revoke API Key for a User
      Update and Upload Agent Template
    dropdown icon
    User Profiles
      Manage a User Profile
      View the Details of a User Profile
      Edit a User Profile
      Deactivate a User Profile
      Activate a User Profile
      Copy a User Profile
    dropdown icon
    Work Types
      Create a Work Type
      Edit a Work Type
      Deactivate a Work Type
      Activate a Work Type
    dropdown icon
    Auxiliary Codes
      Create Idle or Wrap-Up Codes
      Edit Idle or Wrap-Up Codes
      Delete Idle or Wrap-up Codes
    dropdown icon
    Desktop Profiles
      Create a Desktop Profile
      View the Details of a Desktop Profile
      Edit a Desktop Profile
      Copy a Desktop Profile
      Deactivate a Desktop Profile
      Activate a Desktop Profile
    dropdown icon
    Address Books
      Create an Address Book
      Edit an Address Book
      Delete an Address Book
    dropdown icon
    Outdial Automatic Number Identification (ANI)
      Create an Outdial ANI
      Edit an Outdial ANI
      Delete an Outdial ANI
    dropdown icon
    Dial Plans
      Regular expression for the default US dial plan
      Regular expression for the default Any Format dial plan
      Create a Dial Plan
      Edit a Dial Plan
      Delete a Dial Plan
    dropdown icon
    Global Variables
      Create a Global Variable
      Edit a Global Variable
      Deactivate a Global Variable
      Activate a Global Variable
    dropdown icon
    Multimedia Profiles
      Create a Multimedia Profile
      View the Details of a Multimedia Profile
      Edit a Multimedia Profile
      Deactivate a Multimedia Profile
      Activate a Multimedia Profile
    dropdown icon
    Desktop Layout
      Create a Desktop Layout
      View a Desktop Layout
      Edit a Desktop Layout
      Copy a Desktop Layout
      Deactivate a Desktop Layout
      Activate a Desktop Layout
    dropdown icon
    Skill Definitions
      Create a Skill Definition
      Edit a Skill Definition
      Deactivate a Skill Definition
      Activate a Skill Definition
    dropdown icon
    Skill Profiles
      Create a Skill Profile
      Edit a Skill Profile
      Copy a Skill Profile
      Delete a Skill Profile
    dropdown icon
    Threshold Rules
      Call Metrics
      Agent Metrics
      Create a Threshold Rule
      Copy a Threshold Rule
      Edit a Threshold Rule
      Deactivate a Threshold Rule
      Activate a Threshold Rule
    dropdown icon
    Entry Point Mappings
      Map an Entry Point
      Edit Dial Number to Entry Point Mappings
      Delete Dial Number to Entry Point Mappings
    dropdown icon
    Reports for the Provisioned Items
      Manage Reports for the Provisioned Items
    Delete inactive objects permanently
dropdown icon
Business Rules
    About Business Rules Engine
      Configure BRE
dropdown icon
Contact Routing
    dropdown icon
    About Contact Routing
      About Skills-based Routing
      Routing of Parked Contacts
      Set Up Skills-Based Routing
      Agent-based Routing
      About global routing overrides
    Configure Multimedia Profiles
      dropdown icon
      Working with Resource Files
        Upload an Audio Resource File
        Edit an Audio Resource File
        Play or Download a .wav File
        Update a Resource File
        Copy a Resource File
        Export References to a Media File
        Create a Predefined Email Template
        Configure a Predefined Chat Template
        Create a Predefined Chat Response
      dropdown icon
      Configure Routing Resources
        About Team Types
        View routing strategies for an entry point or queue
        View the current routing strategies
        View routing strategies by time zone
        Create a routing strategy
        Modify a Routing Strategy
        Routing Strategies Deletion and Restoration
        Audio on Hold
      dropdown icon
      Working with Global Routing Overrides
        View global routing overrides
        Create global routing overrides
        Edit a global routing override
        Global routing override parameters
        Delete a global routing override
        Restore or permanently delete a global routing override
dropdown icon
Flow Designer
    Flow Designer Overview
      Getting Started
        Key Terminology
          Access the Flow Designer Application
            Flow Designer Browser Requirements
              Flow Designer Email Requirements
                dropdown icon
                Flow Designer Layout
                  Activity Library
                  Canvas, Main Flow, and Event Flows
                  Properties Pane
                  Header Pane
                  Footer Pane
                dropdown icon
                Flow Designer Activities and Events
                  Activities in Call Handling
                  Activities in Flow Control
                  Events
                dropdown icon
                Variables and Expressions in Flow Designer
                  Custom Flow Variables
                  Predefined Variables
                  Global Variables in Flow Designer
                  Desktop viewable variables
                  JSON Variables
                  Writing Expressions
                  Pebble Template Syntax
                  Validate Expressions
                dropdown icon
                Create and Manage Flows
                  Create a Flow
                  Edit Flow Variables
                  Modify a Flow
                  Search entities in a flow
                  Apply version labels to a flow
                  Enable or Disable the Autosave Option
                  Copy and Paste Activities
                  Validate a Flow
                  Copy a Flow
                  Export a Flow
                  Import a Flow
                  Publish a Flow
                  Delete a Flow
                  Entry Point Routing Strategies
                  Queue Routing Strategies
                dropdown icon
                Create and manage subflows
                  Create a subflow
                  Edit a subflow
                  Delete a subflow
                  Add subflow to a main flow
                Error Handling
                  Flow Chaining
                    Flow Tracing
                      Flow Designer Error Codes
dropdown icon
Call Monitoring
    dropdown icon
    Monitor Calls
      Monitoring Overview
      Monitor Calls
      Coach an Agent
      Barge in on a Call
      Viewing Call Monitoring Information
      Working with Monitoring Schedules
dropdown icon
Call Recording
    dropdown icon
    Call Recording
      Segment Recording
    Create or Edit a Recording Schedule
      Deleting a Recording Schedule
dropdown icon
Recording Management
    Search for and Play Recordings
      Assign and Remove Tags
        dropdown icon
        Search Attributes
          Create and Export Tags
Digital Channels
dropdown icon
Transfer Outdial Calls to Queue
    Map the Outdial Transfer to Queue Entry Point to a DN
      Transfer an Outdial Call to a Queue on the Agent Desktop
        View Agent Outdial Statistics Report
dropdown icon
Agent Transfer a Call to an Entry Point
    Task Flow to Transfer a Call to an Entry Point
dropdown icon
Play a Stereo Recording
    Play a Stereo Recorded File
dropdown icon
Opt Out When in Queue
    Task Flow to Set Up the Opt-Out Functionality
      View Opt-out-of-Queue Report
dropdown icon
Webex Calling Integration
    Webex Calling Integration Task Flow
dropdown icon
Blended Multimedia Profiles
    Overview
      Configure a Multimedia Profile
        Associate a Multimedia Profile to an Agent, Team, or Site
          Assign Contacts to Agents
            View Agent Details
dropdown icon
Courtesy Callback
    About Courtesy Callback
      Configure the Callback Flow
        Make a Courtesy Callback
          View Courtesy Callback Reports
dropdown icon
Self Service
    Configure Entry Point and Select the Flow in Routing Strategy
      dropdown icon
      Enable a Virtual Agent
        Build a Dialogflow Agent
        Configure Virtual Agent
        Create VA activity in Flow Designer
      Blind Transfer
        Disconnect Contact
          IVR Transcript and global Variables in Agent Desktop
            IVR and CVA Dialog Flow Report in Analyzer
              dropdown icon
              Text-to-Speech
                Create a Service Account for Google Connector
                Configure a Google Connector
                Text-to-Speech Toggle
dropdown icon
Cisco Webex Experience Management Post Call Survey
    Webex Experience Management Account Setup
      Create a Webex Experience Management Connector
        dropdown icon
        Create Feedback Activity in the Flow Designer
          Configure an IVR Post-call Survey
          Configure SMS or Email Post-Call Survey
        View Agent Desktop Widgets
dropdown icon
Troubleshooting
    dropdown icon
    Troubleshooting Management Portal Problems
      Management Portal Problems
      Reporting Management Portal Issues to Customer Support
    dropdown icon
    Troubleshooting Desktop Problems
      Network Interruptions
      Desktop Application Problems
      Audio Problems
      Reporting Agent Desktop Issues to Customer Support
dropdown icon
Report Parameters
    Call Report Parameters
      Agent Report Parameters
        Historical Skill Report Parameters
          Historical Threshold Alerts Report Parameters
            Usage Metrics Report Parameters
Webex Contact Center Setup and Administration Guide
list-menu In this article

Webex Contact Center is a cloud-based solution that enhances customer experience by providing a seamless, intuitive, and flexible platform for managing customer interactions. This guide acts as your navigational compass, offering administrators a clear path through Webex Contact Center setup and management.

Introduction to Webex Contact Center

Welcome to Webex Contact Center. The following topics provide a brief insight about Webex Contact Center.

Webex Contact Center Overview

Contact centers of multisourcing enterprises leverage a combination of sourcing solutions, including captive, outsourced, and offshore. The typical multisource contact-center environment is organizationally complex, consisting of sites located all over the world, and staffed by direct company employees and/or outsourced agents.

In this environment, most locations operate independently and use disparate contact center technologies, including routing, administrative solutions, and reporting tools. This combination of tools and technologies makes both management and quality monitoring across different locations extremely challenging.

Cisco’s Webex Contact Center offers a unique solution that combines contact center and IP technologies in a global call management service. The Webex Contact Center solution is built on the Cisco Midpoint Call Management ® technology, a centralized control point for managing and monitoring calls and contacts across a heterogeneous contact center environment.

Offered as a cloud service, Webex Contact Center provides enterprises with full control over their global contact center queues and creates the appearance of a single, unified contact center environment. Calls, chats, and emails are distributed to the contact center sites where agents are available. When agents are occupied, contacts are queued centrally so they can be serviced by the next available agent irrespective of the physical location of the agent.

In the voice context, by queuing calls centrally, enterprises can offload the queuing function from their premises-based equipment, thus achieving substantial cost savings in telecom hardware, toll charges, and bandwidth use. More importantly, a call can be directed to the next available agent at any site because the endpoint of the call can be anywhere around the globe, Webex Contact Center seamlessly integrates remote agents and at-home agents into the enterprise’s multisource contact center environment.

About Sites, Teams, Entry Points, and Queues

A Webex Contact Center tenant is an enterprise that has contact centers at one or more sites. The enterprise also has entry points for incoming contacts that are associated with queues. Incoming contacts can be toll-free numbers for voice calls, designated email addresses for emails, or chats with agents. For example, an enterprise that is named Acme might have an entry point that is named Welcome. Welcome classifies contacts into AcmeBilling and distributes to teams of agents in Chicago, Manila, and Bangalore.

Each Webex Contact Center tenant profile consists of sites, teams, entry points, and queues.

A site is a physical contact center location under the control of the enterprise or an outsourcer. For example, Acme might have sites in Chicago, Manila, and Bangalore.

A team is a group of agents at a specific site who handle a particular type of contact. For example, Acme might have teams at their Chicago site that are named Chi_Billing, Chi_Sales, and Chi_GoldCustomerService, and teams at their Bangalore site named Bgl_Billing, Bgl_GoldCustomerService, and Bgl_Experts. Agents can be assigned to more than one team, but an agent can service only one team at a time.

An entry point is the initial landing place for the customer contacts on the Webex Contact Center system. For the voice contacts, typically one or more toll-free or dial numbers are associated with an entry point. IVR call treatment is performed while a call is in the entry point.

A queue is where active contacts are kept while they await handling by an agent. Contacts are moved from the entry point into a queue and are distributed to agents.

Tenants that use the outdial feature are also configured with at least one outdial entry point and one outdial queue.

Telecom managers, contact center managers, and other representatives of the enterprise who are authorized to access the Webex Contact Center service have a view of contact center activity at their enterprise through the Webex Contact Center Management Portal.

In addition to sites, teams, entry points, and queues, the Provisioning module of the Webex Contact Center Management Portal provides an interface to add agents and assign them to teams. Each agent is configured with a desktop profile , a value that determines the agent’s permission levels and Agent Desktop behaviors, including which wrap-up and idle codes are available to the agent. Thus, you should add wrap-up and idle codes before you define desktop profiles and define desktop profiles before you define agents. If your enterprise is provisioned with the optional skills-based routing feature, you should also add skills and skill profiles before you define teams and agents.

Webex Contact Center Management Portal

You can access the Webex Contact Center Management Portal through a web browser. The Portal provides access to Webex Contact Center modules that enable authorized users to perform various tasks such as:

View real-time and historical contact center data

Silently monitor interactions directed to destination sites

Create agent accounts and other contact center resources

Create and edit scheduled contact routing strategies and team capacity strategies to control contact treatment and distribution

In addition, the Webex Contact Center Management Portal landing page displays graphs of real-time and historical call activity and current agent status.

Your assigned user profile determines your access to Webex Contact Center modules and functionality.

For information about how to access and work with the Webex Contact Center Management Portal, see Supported Browsers for Management Portal .

Webex Contact Center Modules

After you sign in to the Management Portal, click the module on the navigation bar that you want to access. If the navigation bar is collapsed, click the navigation button on the top-left corner of the Management Portal landing page to expand it. If you can't see a module in your interface, then either you don’t have the appropriate permissions to access the module, or it’s an optional module that your enterprise doesn’t have license to.

The following table describes the modules that authorized users can access through the Webex Contact Center Management Portal.

Module

Description

Provisioning

Allows authorized users to create, view, and edit the settings that are provisioned for the enterprise. The module provides access to the Audit Trail, Agent Skills Report, Provisioned Items Report, and Provisioned Skills Report.

Allows authorized users to silently monitor the quality of service being delivered across their multisource contact centers. The power of the Webex Contact Center service lies in the unique ability to monitor any call across any site. Through a simplified web interface, users can select the queue, team, site, or agent that they want to silently monitor. Authorized users can provide instructions to the monitored agent without being heard by the caller, and can join a call being monitored and participate in the conversation. For more information, see Monitor Calls .

About Time Zones

All dates and times displayed on the Webex Contact Center Management Portal and in the Webex Contact Center modules reflect the time zone that is provisioned for the enterprise with the following exceptions:

Dates and times displayed on the main pages of the Real-Time Reports and Call Monitoring modules reflect the browser time.

Time values in routing strategies are based on the time zone that is provisioned for the entry point or queue. If no time zone is specified, the time zone is provisioned for the enterprise.

Dates are converted to UTC time when they are saved to the database, so the system behavior, such as time-of-day routing, is applied universally across the multi-site contact center network, regardless of which time zones the sites are located in. The system filters the historical reports based on the enterprise time zone.

To specify a different time zone for displaying the time values in routing strategies, see View routing strategies by time zone .

When you edit a tenant time zone, you must relogin to see the changes.

PCI compliance

Webex Contact Center is fully Payment Card Industry (PCI) compliant to protect customer organizations from data loss while using voice and digital channels. We protect and secure PCI data and related information in strict adherence to the Payment Card Industry Data Security Standard (PCI DSS). This compliance enables you to:

Prevent logging and storing of any sensitive information that is related to PCI data.

Mask and encrypt customer sensitive information such as debit or credit card details.

Drop attachments if PCI data is detected.

Restrict attachments in the email and chat services if it contains cardholder information.

Allow administrators to configure either to reject or drop the email or chat content if it has PCI data in the email subject line or email or chat body.

For more information, see Webex Contact Center Privacy Data Sheet from Cisco Trust Portal .

In Webex Contact Center, PCI is enabled by default. To know more about the file types that are supported across all digital channels for regular attachments, see Supported attachment types for digital channels in Webex Contact Center .

Embedded images aren’t supported in attachments.

This chapter describes the tasks that you need to do the first time you login to the Webex Contact Center .

System Requirements

This section details system requirements for various contact center applications.

Supported Browsers for Management Portal

The following table lists the supported operating systems and browsers for various client devices to access the Webex Contact Center Management Portal:

Browser

Microsoft Windows 10

Microsoft Windows 11

Mac OS X

Chromebook

Google Chrome

76.0.3809

103.0.5060.114

76.0.3809 or higher

76.0.3809 or higher

Domain Access Required for Desktop

To ensure that the Desktop responds as expected on your network, add the following domains to the Firewall/VPN (Virtual Private Network) allowed list:

An * shown at the beginning of a URL (e.g., *.webex.com) indicates that services in the top level domain and all subdomains must be accessible.

Domain / URL Description
Webex Contact Center Services URLs

cdn.jsdelivr.net

cdnjs.cloudflare.com

unpkg.com:443

jquery.com:443

*.jquery.com:443

*.broadcloudpbx.net:443

Content Delivery Network (CDN) services to efficiently deliver static files.

*.cisco.com:443

*.ciscoccservice.com:443

ciscoccservice.com:443

Contact Center micro-services.

*.ciscospark.com:443

*.wbx2.com:443

*.webex.com:443

Webex micro-services.

Additional services related to Webex Contact Center—Third Party domains

*.cloudcherry.com:443

cloudcherry.com:443

Webex Experience Management platform (Formerly known as Cloud Cherry).

*.imiengage.io:443

imiengage.io:443

Digital channels.

*.mixpanel.com:443

mixpanel.com:443

*.split.io:443

*.lr-ingest.com:443

*.pendo.io:443

Performance tracking, error and crash capture, and session metrics.

System Limits in Webex Contact Center

This section on system limits contains all the configurations and visualization limits that apply to the Webex Contact Center Management Portal.

The table lists the maximum system limits for configuration object types and configuration object attributes. For details of attributes within each entity, see Provisioning . Some values of system limits may vary based on specific platforms. The Service Details section on your Control Hub organization will show the voice channel service as Classic or Next Generation.

Table 1. Maximum System Limits for Configuration Object Types and Attributes

Configuration Object Type

Configuration Object Attribute

Maximum Allowed Limit for Tenants based on Classic

Maximum Allowed Limit for Tenants based on Next Generation

Sites

Active

Sites

Inactive

Teams

Agent based

Teams

Agent based - Users

Teams

Agent based - Inactive Users

Teams

Capacity based

Teams

Capacity based - Active

Teams

Capacity based - Inactive

Auxiliary code

Auxiliary codes

Wrapup

Work type

Work type

Wrapup

Auxiliary Codes

Idle - Inactive

Auxiliary Codes

Wrapup - Inactive

Work type

Idle - Inactive

Work type

Wrapup - Inactive

Entry points

Active

Entry points

Inactive

Oudial entry points

Active

Oudial entry points

Inactive

Users

Active 20000

Users

Inactive

Users

Agents

Users

Supervisors

Users

Teams

Multimedia profiles

Active

Multimedia profiles

Inactive

Desktop layouts

Active

Desktop layouts

Inactive

Skills

Active

Skills

Inactive

Skills

Skills

Text length

Skills

Enum limits

Skills

Enum length

Skill profiles

Skill profiles

Skills

Global variables

Active

Global variables

Inactive

Threshold rule

Active

Threshold rule

Inactive

Desktop profiles

Active

Desktop profiles

Inactive

Desktop profiles

Maximum autowrapup timeout

600000 miliseconds

600000 miliseconds

Desktop profiles

Auxiliary codes - wrapup codes

Desktop profiles

Auxiliary codes - idle codes

Desktop profiles

Transfer targets

Desktop profiles

Buddy teams

Desktop profiles

Dial plans

Desktop profiles

Agent Dial number validation criteria

Desktop profiles

Viewable statistics queues

Desktop profiles

Viewable statistics teams

User profiles

Active

User profiles

Inactive

User profiles

Access rights - sites

User profiles

Access rights - teams

User profiles

Access rights - entry points

User profiles

Access rights - queues

Routing Strategy

Global

Routing Strategy

Global entry points

Routing Strategy

Per entry point

Dialled numbers

Entry Point

15000

15000

Dialled numbers

Per entry point

Contact service queue

Inbound

11000

Contact service queue

Inbound - inactive

Contact service queue

Outbound

Contact service queue

Outbound - Inactive

Contact service queue

Distribution groups

Contact service queue

Distribution groups - teams

Contact service queue

Distribution groups - total teams

Contact service queue

Service level threshold - telephony

86400 seconds

86400 seconds

Contact service queue

Service level threshold - chat

86400 seconds

86400 seconds

Contact service queue

Service level threshold - digital

604800 seconds

604800 seconds

Contact service queue

Service level threshold - email

1209600 seconds

1209600 seconds

Contact service queue

Maximum time in queue - telephony

86400 seconds

86400 seconds

Contact service queue

Maximum time in queue - chats

86400 seconds

86400 seconds

Contact service queue

Maximum time in queue - digital

604800 seconds

604800 seconds

Contact service queue

Maximum time in queue - email

1209600 seconds

1209600 seconds

Call recording schedule

Per queue

Call monitoring Schedule

Call monitoring Schedule

Queues

Call monitoring Schedule

Sites

Call monitoring Schedule

Teams

Call monitoring Schedule

Agents

Call recording Schedule

Sites

Call recording Schedule

Teams

Call recording Schedule

Agents

Address Book

Address Book

Entries

Address Book

Total entries

100000

100000

Outdial ANI

Outdial ANI

Entry

Outdial ANI

Total entries

Audio file

17250

17250

Audio file

Size in bytes

5242880

5242880

Audio file

Total size in bytes

2097152000

2097152000

Call monitoring

Dashboard - queues

Call monitoring

Dashboard - sites

Call monitoring

Dashboard - teams

Call monitoring

Dashboard - agents

Recording management

Queues

Recording management

Sites

Recording management

Teams

Recording management

Agents

Recording management

Wrapup codes

Recording management

Call monitoring

Maximum concurrent sessions

Maximum concurrent supervisor sessions

Maximum concurrent supervisor sessions

Business Hours

Overrides

Overrides

Holiday list

Business Hours

Working hours

Overrides

Overrides

Holiday list

Number of Connectors

Per connector Type

CCAI Config

The table lists the system limits for visualization of filters on the UI of the Management Portal for recording management, call recording and call monitoring schedules features:

Table 2. Maximum System Limits for Filters

Application/Feature

Object Types with Filters

Description

Maximum Allowed Limit

Recording Management

Queues

The maximum number of filters for queues.

Sites

The maximum number of filters for sites.

Teams

The maximum number of filters for teams.

Agents

The maximum number of filters for agents.

Wrap-Up Codes

The maximum number of filters for wrap-up codes.

The maximum number of filters for tags.

Call Recording Schedules

Sites

The maximum number of filters for sites.

Teams

The maximum number of filters for teams.

Agents

The maximum number of filters for agents.

Call Monitoring Dashboard

Queues

The maximum number of filters for queues.

Sites

The maximum number of filters for sites.

Teams

The maximum number of filters for teams.

Agents

The maximum number of filters for agents.

Call Monitoring Schedules

Queues

The maximum number of filters for queues.

Sites

The maximum number of filters for sites.

Teams

The maximum number of filters for teams.

Agents

The maximum number of filters for agents.

The listed entities have a maximum limit on the number of characters that can be used for the Name field.

Entry Point

Queue

Outdial Entry Point

Outdial Queue

Users

User Profiles

Work Types

Auxilary Code

Desktop Profiles

Address Book

Outdial ANI

Skills Definition

Skill Profile

Entry Point Mappings

Audio Files

The Name cannot exceed 80 characters. It can contain alphanumeric characters, underscores, and hyphens.

The table lists the supported configuration limits for routing and queuing. Active limits are the operable limits for configurations to work optimally. Maximum limits are the threshold limits for configurations to work at maximum capacity. We recommend that you use configuration values that are within the parameters mentioned in the Maximum Limits column of this table.

Table 3. Active and maximum configuration limits

Configurations

Active Limits

Maximum Limits

Maximum number of agents for a team

Maximum number of teams for a Call Distribution Group

Maximum Call Distribution Groups in a queue

Maximum number of teams in a queue, across all Call Distribution Groups

Maximum number of agents for a queue (maximum agents in a team x maximum teams for a Call Distribution Group x maximum Call Distribution Groups in the queue)

Maximum time in a queue (voice)

1 day

1 day

Maximum skills for a skill profile

Maximum number for a Capacity-Based Team

Maximum Capacity-Based Teams for an organization

Maximum number of concurrent calls for Capacity-Based Teams (maximum number for a Capacity-Based Team x maximum number of Capacity-Based Teams for an organization)

Maximum skill requirements for a contact

Maximum number of queues for an organization

Maximum number of concurrent calls for call monitoring

Maximum number of agents in a campaign

Maximum number of configured agents for a campaign

Maximum number of Preview campaigns for an organization

Maximum number of configured Preview campaigns for an organization

Maximum number of Progressive campaigns for an organization

Maximum number of configured Progressive campaigns for an organization

Sign in to Management Portal

Sign in to the Webex Contact Center Management Portal through a web browser with your sign in credentials. You can access the modules and functionalities that your administrator grants access to.

To sign in to the Management Portal:

Sign in to https://admin.webex.com .

Click Services from the left pane.

On the Contact Center card, click Settings .

Under the Advance Configuration section, click the Management Portal link. You can bookmark this link and access the portal directly with this link.

The Management Portal landing page appears. For more information, see About Management Portal Components .

After you sign out, close all Webex Contact Center windows before you sign in again.

About Management Portal Components

The Webex Contact Center Management Portal landing page has multiple components that you can access based on your authorization.

The following table describes the components of the Management Portal landing page:

Component

Description

Navigation bar

Displays the modules that you are authorized to access. For more information, see Webex Contact Center Modules

You can see either the name of the module or, if the navigation bar is collapsed, an icon that represents the module. Hover the mouse pointer over an icon to display the module name.

To expand or collapse the navigation bar, click the button on the upper-left side of the landing page.

Displays the number of calls that are currently in IVR, in queue, connected, and the number of currently available agents.

The rest of this panel displays four charts. Three of them provide real-time statistics for the current call activity, interval call activity, and site-level agent activity. The fourth chart provides historical statistics.

You can click the icon at the top of a chart to display the corresponding report in the Reporting and Analytics module window.

To change the size of a chart, point to a corner or edge and when the mouse pointer changes to a two-headed arrow, drag the corner or edge to shrink or enlarge the chart.

To restore the original size of resized charts, click Reset Widgets .

Expands and collapses a panel where you can do the following:

Select a different user interface skin. For more information, see Change User Interface Colors .

Customize the user interface banner color and images that are used on the Management Portal pages. For more information, see Create a Custom Theme .

Change the time zone in which the time values in routing strategies are displayed. For more information, see View routing strategies by time zone .

View and update the API key assigned to your user account. For more information, see View and Regenerate Your API Key .

Displays the following options in a drop-down list:

Help: Opens the Management Portal online help document in a separate window.

Sign Out: Closes all of the open modules and signs you out of the Management Portal.

About Dashboards

The Webex Contact Center Management Portal landing page provides the following dashboards:

Entry Point - Site level Dashboard (default)

Contact Center Overview - Realtime

Contact Center Overview - Historical

Agent State Data - Realtime

For detailed information about the visualizations available in each dashboard, see the section Visualization in the Cisco Webex Contact Center Analyzer User Guide .

You can access the dashboards from the drop-down list at the top-left corner of the Dashboard tab.

Access to the above listed dashboards is based on access privileges configured in the User Profile settings in the management portal. For more information, see User Profiles .

The dashboard summary view is available to all the users who access the Management Portal.

Entry Point - Site Level Dashboard

Displays information about the number of contacts that are in IVR and Queues.

Snapshot Entry Point IVR Realtime - Chart: Indicates the number of calls that are in the IVR.

Entry Point Interval Realtime - Chart: Indicates the number of contacts (voice, email, and chat) per entry point in real time for a specific interval. By default, the interval is 30 minutes and the duration is from the start of the day.

Site Interval Realtime - Chart: Indicates the number of connected contacts (voice, email, and chat) per site in real time since the start of the day.

Entry Point Contact Volume - Chart: Indicates the number of connected contacts per entry point on a daily interval, for the last seven days.

Contact Center Overview - Historical

Displays information about contacts handled, contacts abandoned, and contacts in queues for a specified duration and time interval. You can use the Interval and Duration drop-down lists in the dashboard to filter the data based on the selected time interval and duration. To refresh the data, use the Refresh icon.

The following information is available:

Average Service Level: Indicates the percentage of contacts that are handled within the configured service level for the queue.

Total Contacts Handled: Indicates the total number of contacts (voice, email, social, and chat) handled.

Total Contacts Abandoned: Indicates the total number of contacts (voice, email, social, and chat) abandoned.

Average Handled Time: Indicates the average time that is taken to handle a contact (voice, email, social, and chat).

Longest Contact in Queue: Indicates the time in queue for the contact (voice, email, social, or chat) with the longest waiting time.

Contact Details in Queue: Shows the details of contacts (voice, email, social, and chat) that are currently in queue.

In addition, the Team Details - Historical dashboard displays the following information in a specified duration and time interval:

Teams

Agents in Teams

Agent Login

Contacts handled by the agents

You can filter the data using the following filters available in the dashboard:

Agent Name

Team Name

Interval

Duration

Agent State Data - Realtime

As an administrator or supervisor, you can monitor the agent state data using the Agent State Data - Realtime dashboard. The dashboard displays the following information:

The name of the agent.

The site and team to which the agent is assigned.

The login time of the agent.

The most recent known state of the agent.

The duration for which the agent has been in the most recent state.

The idle code, if the agent is in the Idle state.

The filters at the top of the dashboard enable you to display the agent state data for selected sites, teams, or agents. The list of sites, teams, or agents available in the filters depends on the teams or sites to which the administrator or supervisor has access rights. For more information, see Access Rights .

Agent State Data - Realtime dashboard provides you the ability to sign out agents based on the agent state. The most recent agent states and descriptions are available in the following table.

Most Recent State

Indicates that

Connected

The agent is connected to at least one channel. This state includes Ringing and Wrap-Up also. An icon indicates the most recently connected channel in the State Duration field.

Available

The agent is available on the desktop, but hasn’t received an active contact.

The agent has set an Idle state. Check the Idle Code field for more information.

An option to forcefully sign out an agent is available, if a regular sign out is not possible. The administrator or supervisor should exercise caution while forcefully signing out the agent, as the agent's current contacts are cleared.

For Chat and Email channels, when the supervisor tries to forcefully sign out an agent from the Management Portal, the agent gets signed out; but the chat session remains open. The contact clean up functionality is not available for these channels.

To sign out an agent, click Sign Out in the Action field. You receive a notification that the agent is successfully signed out.

You can access the Agent State Data - Realtime dashboard only if you have View or Edit permissions to the Logout Agents module. To sign out agents, you must have Edit permissions to the module. For more information, see Module Settings .

The Social channel type appears in the reports if your enterprise has purchased the Social Channel add-on.

The Deployment Name filter appears only for Cloud Connect users.

For more information about reports, see the Types of Records Available in Each Repository section in Webex Contact Center Analyzer User Guide .

Change User Interface Colors

You can set colors or skins in the selection panel and in the banner on the pages:

Click the Gears icon at the top-right corner of the Management Portal.

Click the tab displaying the Wrench icon, and select a skin.

The colors change immediately.

(Optional) Click the Reset icon to restore the default color.

Create a Custom Theme

You can customize the banner color and images for the Management Portal user interface by creating a custom theme. You must have proper authorization to customize the user interface.

To create a custom theme:

Click the Gears icon at the top-right corner of the Management Portal.

Click the tab displaying the Custom Theme icon.

In Banner Color , enter the HTML (hexadecimal) code for a color or click the small box on the right and select a color.

(Optional) Click the folder button for each listed image type, navigate to the image file in your system that you want to use, and click Open . The supported file types are PNG, JPG, JPEG, and GIF.

Click Save .

The user interface updates with the new theme.

(Optional) Click Reset to revert your changes.

View and Regenerate Your API Key

To view or regenerate your API key:

Click the Gears icon at the top-right corner of the Management Portal.

Click the tab displaying the API Key icon.

(Optional) Click the link to view the API key.

Click Regenerate Key to regenerate your API key.

Access Audit Trail Reports

The Audit Trail page provides an interface where you can view details about the provisioning module changes to your account in last three years. However, you can fetch data for a seven-day period only. You can also download the details in a Microsoft Excel or an Adobe PDF file. Ensure that you have permission to view the reports.

To display an audit trail report:

From the Management Portal navigation bar, choose Audit Trail .

Select the filters:

Call Status

Description

Entity

Select the entity from the drop-down. Entities are the items in the provisioning database tables.

Action

Select the action performed on the selected entity, such as Create, Delete, and Update.

Time Period

Select a date range of seven days from the calender controls.

Click Apply Filters .

(optional) Click Download PDF or Download EXCEL to download the report.

Provisioning your Webex Contact Center is an important step that includes various tasks for setting up the Webex Contact Center. Refer to the following sections for details.

Tenant Settings Entry Points and Queues Sites Teams Users User Profiles Work Types Auxiliary Codes Desktop Profiles Address Books Outdial Automatic Number Identification (ANI) Dial Plans Global Variables Multimedia Profiles Desktop Layout Entry Point Mappings Skill Definitions Skill Profiles Threshold Rules Entry Point Mappings Reports for the Provisioned Items

Tenant Settings

You can now access tenant settings directly from the Control Hub of newly enhanced Webex Contact Center. For more information, visit Tenant Settings help on Webex Help Center.

If you are still accessing tenant settings through Webex Contact Center Management Portal, you can continue with the following instructions.

You can use the Webex Contact Center Management Portal to configure the tenants that your administrator provisions for your enterprise. To view the tenant settings for your enterprise, click your enterprise name under the Provisioning module in the navigation bar.

Click the following tabs to configure the tenant settings:

General Settings

Desktop Settings

Provisioning

Settings

General Settings

The General Settings tab displays the following settings.

In the following table, the check mark (✓) at the Tenant column indicates the settings that the authorized users of your enterprise specify. Similarly the ✓ mark in the Partner column identifies the settings that the partner administrator specifies. The ✓ in the Webex Contact Center column identifies the settings that the Webex Contact Center administrator specifies.

To modify the settings, click Edit at the bottom of the page.

Setting

Description

Tenant

Partner

Webex Contact Center

Tenant Details

The time zone that you provision for your enterprise. For more information, see About Time Zones .

Manage RONA timeouts

The contact center administrators can manage the Redirection on No Answer (RONA) timeout settings for agents and customers.

To configure the RONA timeout settings for both inbound and outbound call scenarios:

Log in to the customer organization on Control Hub .

Navigate to Services > Contact Center > Settings > Desktop .

In the RONA timeouts section, enter the timeout values in seconds, for the channels.

The table shows the default value and the allowed range for the RONA timeout settings.

Channels Default Value (seconds) Minimum Value (seconds)

Maximum Value (seconds)

Telephony (inbound and outbound)

Email

Social

For inbound call scenarios, Webex Contact Center connects the customer call to the agent session for the duration of the unanswered call. The call is then redirected to another agent or skill group. For example, if the Telephony default value is set to 18 seconds and the agent does not receive the call within the specified time, the call goes to RONA state. Webex Contact Center returns the call to the queue and re-routes it to another agent or skill group.

For outbound call scenarios, the configured time is inclusive of both agent and customer accepting the expected call for the specified duration. Webex Contact Center will first connect to the agent for the time specified and the remaning time will be utilized to connect to the customer. For example, if the Telephony default value is set to18 seconds and it takes 2 seconds to connect to the agent, the remaining 16 seconds will be utilized to connect to the customer. It is recommended to set an optimal time that balances both the time of the agent and the customer/devices handling the calls.

Provisioning

The Provisioning tab displays the following settings. The partner administrator and the Webex Contact Center administrator specify these settings.

To modify the settings, click Edit at the bottom of the page.

Setting

Description

System Profile

Allows the supervisors to manage the human resources. Supervisors can proactively analyze and adjust for daily realities and make smarter decisions to manage resources to optimize service levels.

Workforce Options enable one or more of the following Workforce Optimization options for your enterprise:

Quality Management

Workforce Management

WFO Analytics

Workforce Analytics with Transcriptions

Workforce Optimization Bundle

The availability of these features depends on your license. Contact your organization administrator for more information.

Enables the third-party software List and the Campaign Manager (LCM) module for a tenant. LCM manages the upload, selection, and rescheduling of contacts. It also provides campaign manager reports.

The availability of this feature depends on your license. Contact your organization administrator for more information.

If this setting is Yes , your enterprise allows customers to post questions or concerns in plain language to the system.

The availability of this feature depends on your license. Contact your organization administrator for more information.

Settings

The Settings tab displays the following settings. An asterisk (*) indicates that the settings are not available to tenants with standard licenses.

In the table below, the ✓ mark in the Tenant column indicates the settings that authorized users of your enterprise specify. Similarly, the ✓ mark in the Partner column identifies the settings that the partner administrator specifies. The ✓ in the Webex Contact Center column identifies the settings that the Webex Contact Center administrator specifies.

To modify the settings, click Edit at the bottom of the page.

Setting

Description

Tenant

Partner

Webex Contact Center

Call Settings

The time interval in seconds to determine whether the agent handles the call or the call ends. The time determines if there is an issue with the connectivity or with the behavior of the agent. You can consider a call as disconnected, if the call terminates within this time interval after it reaches a destination site.

The default dial number for the tenant to make outdial calls. The default dial number is displayed in the customer's caller ID, if an agent does not select a specific outdial ANI (Automatic Number Identification) for an outdial call.

To be available as the default outdial ANI, the dial number must be mapped to an entry point. For more information, see Entry Point Mappings .

By default, the first dial number that is mapped to an entry point is displayed as the default outdial ANI. If a dial number is not mapped to an entry point, the Default Outdial ANI field indicates Not Configured .

To select a default outdial ANI for the tenant, click Edit at the bottom of the page. The Default Outdial ANI drop-down list contains all of the existing dial numbers that are mapped to entry points. To set a dial number as the default outdial ANI, select the dial number from the drop-down list.

Desktop Inactivity Timeout enables you to automatically sign out an agent from the desktop after being inactive for the specified time. An agent is considered inactive for not performing any activity on the Agent Desktop while in the Idle state. Agent activity includes handling contacts, working on custom widgets, or performing any task on the Agent Desktop.

The default setting is set to No . If the setting remains at No , then the agents who are signed in will be charged for agent license usage until their session is explicitly signed out.

If the setting is Yes , system automatically signs out an agent after being idle for the provided timeout duration.

You can provide an idle timeout value from 3 to 10,000 minutes.

The number of concurrent voice contact sessions that the tenant is entitled to.

This entitlement is based on the following formula:

((Number of committed Standard Agent licenses + Number of committed Premium Agent licenses) x 3) + Number of Add-on IVR port licenses

One session (interaction) in surge protection includes all the inbound and outbound calls related to that session.

For zero commitment orders, the default value of Concurrent Voice Contact Entitlements is:

100 + Number of Add-on IVR port licenses

You cannot modify the value of Concurrent Voice Contact Entitlements.

The percentage of voice contact sessions that the tenant can have, over and above the Concurrent Voice Contact Entitlements.

The default surge percentage is 30%.

The maximum number of concurrent voice contact sessions that are allowed for the tenant. The contact center drops any inbound or outbound voice contacts after reaching this threshold.

This value is derived from the Concurrent Voice Contact Entitlements and the Voice Contact Surge Percentage fields.

For example, if the concurrent voice contact entitlements is 300 and the surge percentage is 30% (default value), the Maximum Concurrent Voice Contact Threshold is calculated as:

300 x 1.3 = 390

If the Maximum Concurrent Voice Contact Threshold is insufficient for your business requirements for a short duration, submit a service request to Cisco Support to have the value adjusted. Cisco Support will adjust the surge percentage to ensure that the required Maximum Concurrent Voice Contact Threshold is available for your tenant.

This field is for production traffic only and reverts to the previous entitlement unless you purchase license in 7 days. This feature is not meant for load testing or any non-production use.

Use this field only if there is evidence of calls being rejected. Be wary that if you increase the surge percentage then your monthly invoice may also increase as per the overage.

The number of concurrent digital contact sessions that the tenant is entitled

This entitlement is based on the following formula:

(Number of committed Standard Agent licenses + Number of committed Premium Agent licenses) x 2 x 15

For zero commitment orders, the default value of concurrent digital contact entitlements is:

100 x 15

You cannot modify the value of concurrent digital contact entitlements.

The percentage of digital contact sessions that the tenant can have, over and above the concurrent digital contact entitlements.

The default surge percentage is 30%.

The maximum number of concurrent digital contact sessions that are allowed for the tenant. The contact center drops any new digital contacts after reaching this threshold.

The value of Maximum Concurrent Digital Contact Threshold is set to 30% higher than the concurrent digital contact entitlements.

Maximum Concurrent Digital Threshold = Concurrent Digital Contact Entitlements *

This value is derived from the Concurrent Digital Contact Entitlements and the Digital Contact Surge Percentage fields:

Maximum Concurrent Digital Threshold =

(Number of committed Standard Agent licenses + Number of committed Premium Agent licenses) x 2 x 15 x 1.3

For example, if the concurrent digital contact entitlements is 300 and the surge percentage is 30% (default value), the maximum concurrent digital contact threshold is calculated as:

300*1.3 = 390

For zero commitment orders, the maximum concurrent digital contact threshold

Max Concurrent Digital Contact Threshold = Concurrent Digital Contact Entitlement * 1.3 =

1500 * 1.3

When incoming contacts are rejected because of the surge, the associated flow generates a flow error on its node. You can find the details of the error in the Surge Protection Statistics report.

If the maximum concurrent digital contact threshold is insufficient for your business requirements for a short duration, submit a service request to Cisco Support to have the value adjusted. Cisco Support will adjust the surge percentage to ensure that the required maximum concurrent digital contact threshold is available for your tenant.

This field is for production traffic only and reverts to the previous entitlement unless you purchase a license in 7 days. This feature is not meant for load testing or any non-production use.

Use this field only if there is evidence of calls being rejected. Be wary that if you increase the surge percentage then your monthly invoice may also increase as per the overage.

The number of times the system attempts a requested callback if the initial callback attempt fails.

The number of seconds between the callback attempts in case the initial callback attempt fails.

If this setting is Yes , agents can pause and resume recording a call. For example, the agent can pause a call recording while obtaining sensitive information from the customer, such as credit card information.

If this setting is No , you can enable this feature for individual queues at another time.

You can use this feature only if your administrator enables the Privacy Shield feature for your enterprise. For more information, contact your administrator.

This setting specifies the amount of time for which the system pauses the call recording. After the time has elapsed, the system automatically starts recording the call.

If this setting is Yes , the system does not route any contacts to the teams with no logged-in agents.

If this setting is No , you can enable this setting for individual queues. For more information, see Adding an Entry Point or Queue .

If this setting is Yes , the system records all inbound and outdial calls.

If this setting is No , the system records calls based on the settings for each queue.

Entry Points and Queues

Entry points and queues are types of virtual teams. A virtual team is a holding place for incoming customer requests.

You can create entry points and queues depending on how the Webex Contact Center administrator has configured your profile.

Entry Point

The inbound entry point is the initial landing place for a customer contact in the Webex Contact Center system. For the customer calls, you can associate one or more toll-free or dial numbers with a given entry point. The system performs IVR call treatment for a call while the call is in the entry point.

You can assign a flow to an entry point. Moreover, if you want to implement the business hours to define the working and nonworking hours for your contact center, you can choose a flow that has the business hours activity configured, and assign it to the entry point.

We strongly recommend you to assign new flows directly to an entry point using the business hours activity. For the existing flows, you should also plan to migrate the routing strategy flow configurations to entry point using business hours.

If a flow is associated to an entry point and uses business hours, it will take precedence over the same flow that is associated with a routing strategy as well.

For more information on how to configure Business Hours in a flow, see Business Hours .

To use entry points for the telephony channel type, ensure that you do the following:

Map a dial number (DN) to the entry point. For more information, see Entry Point Mappings .

Assign a flow to an entry point. For more information, see Create an Entry Point .

Contact your Webex Contact Center administrator for other Provisioning configurations.

Queue

An inbound queue is where the customer contact waits before the system assigns the customer to an agent or DN.

The inbound queue that represents a third-party Automatic Call Distributor (ACD) is known as a proxy queue. Calls that are sent to an external ACD are distributed to agents by the external ACD. Webex Contact Center uses proxy queues to track the call activity that occurs on the external ACD queues. There are two types of proxy queues: dedicated and shared. Agents signed in to a dedicated proxy queue serve only the Webex Contact Center customer; agents signed in to a shared queue serve multiple customers.

Outdial Entry Point

The outdial entry point is provisioned for outbound (outdial) customer calls in the Webex Contact Center system.

In the Outdial Entry Point list, a system-generated Outdial Transfer to Queue entry point is automatically created. If the outdial calls need to be transferred to the queue, map the DN to the Outdial Transfer to Queue entry point. For more information on mapping an outdial entry point, see Map an Entry Point .

You can’t edit the system-generated Outdial Transfer to Queue entry point.

Outdial Queue

The outdial queue where the customer contact waits for the system to assign the customer to an agent or DN.

Create an Entry Point

To create an entry point:

From the Management Portal navigation bar, choose Provisioning > Entry Points/Queues .

Choose Entry Point .

Click + New Entry Point .

In the General Settings area, enter the following settings:

Setting

Description

The name of the entry point.

The Name can’t exceed 80 characters. It can contain alphanumeric characters, underscores, and hyphens.

Description

A short description of the entry point.

Channel Type

Choose a channel type, such as Telephony, Email, and Chat.

The default channel type is Telephony.

Outdial Primary DID URL

The full pathname of the DID .xml file that supports outbound dialing. The Webex Contact Center administrator configures this field.

This setting is applicable only for Outdial Entry Point.

Outdial Backup DID URL

The full pathname of the backup DID .xml file. The Webex Contact Center administrator configures this field.

This setting is applicable only for Outdial Entry Point.

In the Advanced Settings area, enter the following settings:

Setting

Description

Service Level Threshold

The service level threshold field has no functional impact on the system's calculations, you may enter any dummy number for the threshold duration.

Control Script URL

The system automatically populates this field with the URL for this entry point or the default control script of the queue. It happens when you don’t configure the control script using the Webex Contact Center Routing Strategy module.

This setting is available for the Telephony channel type.

IVR Requeue URL

Currently we don’t support this setting.

Overflow Number

Enter the destination phone number to which the system diverts the customer calls when they exceed the Maximum Time in Queue that you have set in the routing strategy.

This setting is applicable only for the Telephony channel type.

Vendor ID

Enter the unique alphanumeric string that maps this entry point to the vendor.

Currently, we don’t support this setting.

Time Zone (Routing Strategies Only)

(Optional) Enter the time zone that routing strategies use for this entry point.

The default time zone is the time zone of the tenant.

DN List

IVR DN List

Enter the DN pool list numbers if you want to integrate this entry point with an external IVR.

This setting is available for the Telephony channel type.

Choose a flow from the drop-down list to assign that flow to this entry point.

This list contains all flows that are created in the Routing Strategy > Flow page of Management Portal.

If you want to implement the business hours entities to define working and non-working hours for your organization, we recommend you to choose only those flows in which the Business Hours activity is configured. The Business Hours activity takes the appropriate branch based on the business hours configuration associated with it. For more information about creating business hours entities in Control Hub, see Set up Business Hours in Webex Contact Center .

For more information on how to configure Business Hours activity, see Business Hours .

Click Save .

View the Details of an Entry Point

To view an entry point:
From the Management Portal navigation bar, choose Provisioning > Entry Points/Queues .

Choose Entry Point .

Click the ellipsis icon beside an entry point and click View . You can view the following details:

Setting

Description

The name of the entry point.

The Name can’t exceed 80 characters. It can contain alphanumeric characters, underscores, and hyphens.

Description

A short description of the entry point.

Channel Type

Choose a channel type, such as Telephony, Email, and Chat.

The default channel type is Telephony.

Outdial Primary DID URL

The full pathname of the DID .xml file that supports outbound dialing. The Webex Contact Center administrator configures this field.

This setting is applicable only for Outdial Entry Point.

Outdial Backup DID URL

The full pathname of the backup DID .xml file. The Webex Contact Center administrator configures this field.

This setting is applicable only for Outdial Entry Point.

Edit an Entry Point

To edit an entry point or an outdial entry point:

From the Management Portal navigation bar, choose Provisioning > Entry Points/Queues .

Choose Entry Point .

Click the ellipsis icon beside an entry point and click Edit .

You can edit the following fields:

Vendor ID

Enter the unique alphanumeric string that maps this entry point to the vendor. You use this setting in the following scenario:

If the queue is a proxy queue.

If it is an entry point that you use for any channel except Telephony.

Currently, we do not support this setting.

The name of the entry point.

The Name can’t exceed 80 characters. It can contain alphanumeric characters, underscores, and hyphens.

Description

A short description of the entry point.

Channel Type

Choose a channel type, such as Telephony, Email, and Chat.

The default channel type is Telephony.

Outdial Primary DID URL

The full pathname of the DID .xml file that supports outbound dialing. The Webex Contact Center administrator configures this field.

This setting is applicable only for Outdial Entry Point.

Outdial Backup DID URL

The full pathname of the backup DID .xml file. The Webex Contact Center administrator configures this field.

This setting is applicable only for Outdial Entry Point.

If you are viewing a proxy queue, you can click the search button in the DNIS Pool Data field to open a pop-up window displaying the list of DNIS entries for the queue. You can click a button bottom of the pop-up window to print the list or download the data as a .csv file.

If you are editing a proxy queue configured to use the blocked area codes feature, you can click the edit button to edit the list of blocked area codes. For more information, see Block an Area Code

Copy an Entry Point

To copy an entry point:
From the Management Portal navigation bar, choose Provisioning > Entry Points/Queues .

Choose Entry Point .

Click the ellipsis icon beside an entry point and click Copy .

A copy of the selected entry point appears. The fields have the same values as the original entry point.

You can save the same entry point with a different name or edit and save the entry point.

You can edit the following details:

There are some settings that you cannot edit. You can edit the Chat Template settings from https://admin.webex.com/ .

The name of the entry point.

The Name can’t exceed 80 characters. It can contain alphanumeric characters, underscores, and hyphens.

Description

A short description of the entry point.

Channel Type

Choose a channel type, such as Telephony, Email, and Chat.

The default channel type is Telephony.

Outdial Primary DID URL

The full pathname of the DID .xml file that supports outbound dialing. The Webex Contact Center administrator configures this field.

This setting is applicable only for Outdial Entry Point.

Outdial Backup DID URL

The full pathname of the backup DID .xml file. The Webex Contact Center administrator configures this field.

This setting is applicable only for Outdial Entry Point.

Create an Outdial Entry Point

To create an outdial entry point:

From the Management Portal navigation bar, choose Provisioning > Entry Points/Queues .

Choose Outdial Entry Point .

Click + Outdial Entry Point .

In the General Settings area, enter the following settings:

Setting

Description

The name of the outdial entry point.

The Name cannot exceed 80 characters. It can contain alphanumeric characters, underscores, and hyphens.

Description

A short description of the outdial entry point.

Channel Type

Choose a channel type as Telephony.

The default channel type is Telephony.

Outdial Primary DID URL

The full pathname of the DID .xml file that supports outbound dialing. The Webex Contact Center administrator configures this field.

This setting is applicable only for Outdial Entry Point.

Outdial Backup DID URL

The full pathname of the backup DID .xml file. The Webex Contact Center administrator configures this field.

This setting is applicable only for Outdial Entry Point.

In the Advanced Settings area, enter the following settings:

Setting

Description

Service Level Threshold

Enter the duration for which a customer request can be in a queue before the system flags it as outside the service level. If the agent completes a customer service request within this time interval, the system considers it within the service level.

Control Script URL

The system automatically populates this field with the URL for this entry point or the default control script of the queue. It happens when you do not configure the control script using the Webex Contact Center Routing Strategy module.

This setting is available for the Telephony channel type.

IVR Requeue URL

Currently we do not support this setting.

Overflow Number

Enter the destination phone number to which the system diverts the customer calls when they exceed the Maximum Time in Queue that you have set in the routing strategy.

This setting is applicable only for the Telephony channel type.

Vendor ID

Enter the unique alphanumeric string that maps this entry point to the vendor.

Currently, we do not support this setting.

Time Zone (Routing Strategies Only)

(Optional) Enter the time zone that routing strategies use for this outdial entry point.

Contact Center supports building flows and event flows using the flow designer. You can use these flows in an Outdial Entry Point.

Choose the flow that you want to assign for the Outdial Entry Point.

This outdial queue will be used for reporting purposes.

You can choose either a routing strategy or a flow for any outdial entry point. If you choose a routing strategy, you can't customize the outdial features such as selecting flow, music, and outdial queues. You can't use flow control configurations such as Customize ANI, Screen pop, Global variable and so on, as part of the outdial experience. We recommend that you use flows instead of routing strategies to avail any advanced configurations such as Screen pop, Customize ANI and so on.

For activities that are supported, see Support for workflows in Outdial Entry Point .

Music on Hold

Select the music file that you want use in the Outdial Entry Point.

Outdial Queue

Select the outdial queue from the list for the Outdial Entry Point.

DN List

IVR DN List

Enter the DN pool list numbers if you want to integrate this entry point with an external IVR.

This setting is available for the Telephony channel type.

Click Save .

View the Details of an Outdial Entry Point

To view an outdial entry point:
From the Management Portal navigation bar, choose Provisioning > Entry Points/Queues .

Choose Outdial Entry Point .

Click the ellipsis icon beside an entry point and click View . You can view the following details:

Setting

Description

The name of the outdial entry point.

The Name cannot exceed 80 characters. It can contain alphanumeric characters, underscores, and hyphens.

Description

A short description of the outdial entry point.

Channel Type

Choose a channel type as Telephony.

The default channel type is Telephony.

Outdial Primary DID URL

The full pathname of the DID .xml file that supports outbound dialing. The Webex Contact Center administrator configures this field.

This setting is applicable only for Outdial Entry Point.

Outdial Backup DID URL

The full pathname of the backup DID .xml file. The Webex Contact Center administrator configures this field.

This setting is applicable only for Outdial Entry Point.

Edit an Outdial Entry Point

To edit an outdial entry point:

From the Management Portal navigation bar, choose Provisioning > Entry Points/Queues .

Choose Outdial Entry Point .

Click the ellipsis icon beside an outdial entry point and click Edit .

You can edit the following fields:

Vendor ID

Enter the unique alphanumeric string that maps this entry point to the vendor. You use this setting in the following scenario:

If the queue is a proxy queue.

If it is an entry point that you use for any channel except Telephony.

Currently, we do not support this setting.

The name of the outdial entry point.

The Name cannot exceed 80 characters. It can contain alphanumeric characters, underscores, and hyphens.

Description

A short description of the outdial entry point.

Channel Type

Choose a channel type as Telephony.

The default channel type is Telephony.

Outdial Primary DID URL

The full pathname of the DID .xml file that supports outbound dialing. The Webex Contact Center administrator configures this field.

This setting is applicable only for Outdial Entry Point.

Outdial Backup DID URL

The full pathname of the backup DID .xml file. The Webex Contact Center administrator configures this field.

This setting is applicable only for Outdial Entry Point.

Copy an Outdial Entry Point

To copy an outdial entry point:
From the Management Portal navigation bar, choose Provisioning > Entry Points/Queues .

Choose Outdial Entry Point .

Click the ellipsis icon beside an entry point and click Copy .

A copy of the selected outdial entry point appears. The fields have the same values as the original outdial entry point.

You can save the same outdial entry point with a different name or edit and save the outdial entry point.

You can edit the following details:

Setting

Description

The name of the outdial entry point.

The Name cannot exceed 80 characters. It can contain alphanumeric characters, underscores, and hyphens.

Description

A short description of the outdial entry point.

Channel Type

Choose a channel type as Telephony.

The default channel type is Telephony.

Outdial Primary DID URL

The full pathname of the DID .xml file that supports outbound dialing. The Webex Contact Center administrator configures this field.

This setting is applicable only for Outdial Entry Point.

Outdial Backup DID URL

The full pathname of the backup DID .xml file. The Webex Contact Center administrator configures this field.

This setting is applicable only for Outdial Entry Point.

You cannot edit certain settings. You can edit the Chat Template settings from https://admin.webex.com/ .

Create a Queue and an Outdial Queue

To create a queue:

From the Management Portal navigation bar, choose Provisioning > Entry Points/Queues .

Choose Queue or Outdial Queue .

Click + New Queue or + New Outdial Queue .

Enter the following settings for the queue and click Save :

Agent DN — Allows agents to sign in using a DN

Extension — Allows agents to sign in through a specific extension number

Click Unrestricted to allow agents to use any DN to sign in through the Station Credentials prompt on the Agent Desktop.

If an agent enters an ad-hoc DN and the entry does not meet the sign-in syntax rules, the system rejects the agent sign-in.

To restrict the DN that the agent can enter, click one of the following:

Provisioned Value restricts the sign-in DN to the default value you provision for the agent.

Note : To provision or change an agent's default DN, edit the agent's user settings. Choose Provisioning > User > Edit > Agent Settings and enter a DN in the Default DN field. If you do not provision a DN, the agent can enter any DN to sign in.

Validation Criteria (Select from list) restricts the sign-in DN to the one or more dial plans you specify in the Validation Criteria setting.

This setting appears only if you set Validation for Agent DN to Validation Criteria .

Select the dial plan to use for the DN validation:

Click All to validate the DN against all available dial plan formats.

Click Specific to validate the DN against one or more dial plans that you can choose from the Select Validation Criteria drop-down list. For more information, see Dial Plan .

Agent Statistics

The Desktop Profile > Agent Statistics page displays the following settings.

Setting

Description

Agent Statistics

Click On or Off to specify whether you want the agents to view their personal statistics in Agent Desktop.

This setting controls whether the agent can display statistics for all or some queues in the Agent Personal Statistics tab. Do one of the following:

Click All to enable the agent to display statistics for all queues.

Click Specific and then choose the queues from the Select Queues drop-down list to enable the agent to display statistics for specific queues.

Click None to prevent the agent from displaying queue statistics.

Settings for Logged-in Team Statistics and Team Statistics are independent of each other.

This toggle has no impact on Analyzer user reports.

This setting controls whether the agent can display statistics for all or some teams in the Agent Personal Statistics tab. Do one of the following:

Click All to enable the agent to display statistics for all teams.

Click Specific and then choose the teams from the Select Teams drop-down list to enable the agent to display statistics for specific teams.

Click None to prevent the agent from displaying teams statistics.

Agent Thresholds

The Agent Thresholds page appears only if your enterprise uses the Threshold Alerts feature. This page provides settings to specify the alerts that the agent can display in the Agent Personal Statistics tab on the Agent Desktop.

This feature is not supported. Enabling or disabling the Allow Agent Threshold under tenant settings to show the agent threshold on the desktop profile page will be removed in sometime.

If your enterprise uses the Agent Threshold Alerts feature, the page also provides settings to specify the thresholds associated with the agent.

For more information, see Threshold Rules .

Setting

Description

Agent Viewable Threshold Alerts

Choose rules from the drop-down list to specify the alerts that you want the agent to receive.

When an agent breaches a threshold rule, the system generates an alert and displays it in the Agent Personal Statistics tab in Agent Desktop.

This setting appears only if your enterprise uses the Agent Threshold Alerts feature.

Click On or Off to specify whether you want the agent and the supervisor to receive alerts when the agent breaches specified threshold rules.

If the agent breaches a selected rule, the system generates the alert and displays it in the Agent Threshold Alerts section of the Agent Personal Statistics tab. The supervisor also receives the alert in their Webex Contact Center Management Portal.

This is available if you enable threshold alerts. If agent viewable threshold alerts are available, choose the rules for triggering the alerts from the drop-down list.

Choose rules from the drop-down list to specify the alerts that you want the agent and supervisor to receive.

Agent Timeout

Agent Timeout enables you to automatically sign out an agent from the desktop after being inactive for the specified time. An agent is considered inactive if not performing any activity on the Agent Desktop while in the Idle state. Agent activity includes handling contacts, working on custom widgets, or performing any task on the Agent Desktop.

Setting

Description

Choose an idle timeout setting for an agent from the following options:

Default Value : Select this to inherit the values given in Timeout Settings at the tenant level configuration.

Custom Value : Type the value in minutes to set the idle timeout. Enter any value from 3 to 10,000 minutes in the text box. This overrides the value given in Timeout Settings at the tenant level configuration.

View the Details of a Desktop Profile

Table 1. Configuration for Channel Type Telephony

Setting

Description

General Settings

Enter a name for the queue.

Description

(Optional) Enter a short description for the queue.

(Read-only) This read-only field displays whether the settings are for an entry point, a queue, an outdial entry point, or an outdial queue.

Channel Type

The available channel types are:

Telephony
The default channel type.
Email
Email channel.
Chat
Chat channel.

For outdial queues, the only channel type that is supported is Telephony.

Contact Routing Settings

If Campaign Management is enabled in the System Profile (see Provisioning ), then the Contact Routing Settings section is displayed for the Outdial queues.

Queue Routing Type

The supported queue routing types are:

Longest Available Agent : Calls are routed to the agent who has been available for the longest time in all teams assigned to the queue in the Call Distribution section. For more information, see Longest Available Agent (LAA) .

Skills Based : Calls are routed to agents based on skill requirements configured in the Flow that is associated with the entry point.

The Skills Based routing type is available only if your queue is provisioned with Channel Type as Telephony .

When you select Skills Based as the routing type, two other options appear for you to specify how to route a call when more than one agent with the required skill set is available:

Longest Available Agent : The call is routed to the agent who has been available for the longest duration.

Best Available Agent : The call is routed to the agent with the highest proficiency across all skills for the contact. This setting is applicable if at least one of the skills in the skill requirement list is of type Proficiency. For more information, see Skills-based Routing Types .

You cannot edit the Queue Routing Type after the queue is saved.

Outbound Campaign Enabled

This toggle button is displayed for outdial queues.

If the toggle button is enabled, then the Call Distribution and Queue Routing Type fields are displayed. This field cannot be edited later. The Longest Available Agent is the only supported queue routing type for outdial queues.

Call Distribution

Add Group

Add a Call Distribution Group to associate one or more teams with this queue. Add multiple groups to distribute calls to more teams as time in queue progresses.

Advanced Settings

Permit Monitoring

Click Yes or No to specify whether users can monitor the calls.

This setting is available for the Telephony channel type.

Permit Recording

Click Yes or No to specify whether the system can record the calls.

This setting is available for the Telephony channel type.

Record All Calls

This setting is available if you enable Permit Recording.

Click Yes or No to indicate whether the system can record all the calls for this queue.

This setting is available for the Telephony channel type.

Pause/Resume Enabled

Click Yes or No to specify whether the agents can pause and resume a call recording. For example, the agent can pause call recording while discussing sensitive information from the customer, such as credit card details.

If you enable the Pause/Resume Enabled feature in the Tenant settings, the system overrides a No setting here. For more information, see Tenant Settings .

Agents can use this feature if your organization administrator enables the Privacy Shield feature in the Webex Contact Center service configuration.

Recording Pause Duration

This setting is available if you set Pause/Resume Enabled to Yes .

This setting specifies the time in seconds, after which the recording resumes automatically.

This setting is available for the Telephony channel type.

Service Level Threshold

Enter the time that a customer request can be in a queue before the system flags it as outside the service level. If you complete a customer service request within this time interval, the system considers it within the service level.

Maximum Time in Queue

Enter the time after which the contact (all media types) is terminated.

Default Music in Queue

Select the name of the audio (.wav) file to play for calls when the calls arrive or wait in the queue. This is the default audio file.

If Play Music is not configured in the Queue Contact activity, then the default music file is played.

Time Zone (Routing Strategies Only)

(Optional) If your organization administrator enables Multiple Time Zone for your enterprise, you can select the time zone of the entry point.

Table 2. Configuration for Channel Type Chat

Setting

Description

General Settings

Enter a name for the queue.

Description

(Optional) Enter a short description for the queue.

(Read-only) This read-only field displays whether the settings are for an entry point, a queue, an outdial entry point, or an outdial queue.

Channel Type

The channel type is: Chat

For outdial queues, the only channel type supported is Telephony.

Contact Routing Settings

Queue Routing Type

The supported queue routing types are:

Longest Available Agent : Chats are routed to the agent who has been available for the longest time over all teams assigned to the queue in the Chat Distribution section. For more information, see Longest Available Agent (LAA) .

Skills Based : Chats are routed to agents based on skill requirements configured in the Webex Connect flow.

When you select Skills Based as the routing type, two other options appear for you to specify how to route a chat when more than one agent with the required skill set is available:

Longest Available Agent : The chat is routed to the agent who has been available for the longest duration. For more information, see Longest Available Agent (LAA) .

Best Available Agent : When you select this setting, the chat is routed to the agent with the highest proficiency across all skills for the contact. This setting is applicable if at least one of the skills in the skill requirement list is of type Proficiency. For more information, see Skills-based Routing Types .

You cannot edit the Queue Routing Type after the queue is saved.

Add Group

Add a Chat Distribution Group to associate one or more teams with this queue. Add multiple groups to distribute chats to more teams as time in queue progresses.

Advanced Settings

Service Level Threshold

Enter the time that a customer request can be in a queue before the system flags it as outside the service level. If you complete a customer service request within this time interval, the system considers it within the service level.

Maximum Time in Queue

Enter the time after which the contact (all media types) is terminated.

Time Zone (Routing Strategies Only)

(Optional) If your organization administrator enables Multiple Time Zone for your enterprise, you can select the time zone of the entry point.

Table 3. Configuration for Channel Type Email

Setting

Description

General Settings

Enter a name for the queue.

Description

(Optional) Enter a short description for the queue.

(Read-only) This read-only field displays whether the settings are for an entry point, a queue, an outdial entry point, or an outdial queue.

Channel Type

The channel type is: Email

For outdial queues, the only channel type supported is Telephony.

Contact Routing Settings

Queue Routing Type

The supported queue routing types are:

Longest Available Agent : Emails are routed to the agent who has been available for the longest time over all teams assigned to the queue in the Email Distribution section. For more information, see Longest Available Agent (LAA) .

Skills Based : Emails are routed to agents based on skill requirements configured in the Webex Connect flow.

When you select Skills Based as the routing type, two other options appear for you to specify how to route an email when more than one agent with the required skill set is available:

Longest Available Agent : The email is routed to the agent who has been available for the longest duration.

Best Available Agent : When you select this setting, the email is routed to the agent with the highest proficiency across all skills for the contact. This setting is applicable if at least one of the skills in the skill requirement list is of type Proficiency. For more information, see Skills-based Routing Types .

You cannot edit the Queue Routing Type after the queue is saved.

Add Group

Add an Email Distribution Group to associate one or more teams with this queue. Add multiple groups to distribute emails to more teams as time in queue progresses.

Advanced Settings

Service Level Threshold

Enter the time that a customer request can be in a queue before the system flags it as outside the service level. If you complete a customer service request within this time interval, the system considers it within the service level.

Maximum Time in Queue

Enter the time after which the contact (all media types) is terminated.

Time Zone (Routing Strategies Only)

(Optional) If your organization administrator enables Multiple Time Zone for your enterprise, you can select the time zone of the entry point.

Click the ellipsis icon beside a queue and click View . You can view the following details:

Table 4. Configuration for Channel Type Telephony

Setting

Description

General Settings

Enter a name for the queue.

Description

(Optional) Enter a short description for the queue.

(Read-only) This read-only field displays whether the settings are for an entry point, a queue, an outdial entry point, or an outdial queue.

Channel Type

The available channel types are:

Telephony
The default channel type.
Email
Email channel.
Chat
Chat channel.

For outdial queues, the only channel type that is supported is Telephony.

Contact Routing Settings

If Campaign Management is enabled in the System Profile (see Provisioning ), then the Contact Routing Settings section is displayed for the Outdial queues.

Queue Routing Type

The supported queue routing types are:

Longest Available Agent : Calls are routed to the agent who has been available for the longest time in all teams assigned to the queue in the Call Distribution section. For more information, see Longest Available Agent (LAA) .

Skills Based : Calls are routed to agents based on skill requirements configured in the Flow that is associated with the entry point.

The Skills Based routing type is available only if your queue is provisioned with Channel Type as Telephony .

When you select Skills Based as the routing type, two other options appear for you to specify how to route a call when more than one agent with the required skill set is available:

Longest Available Agent : The call is routed to the agent who has been available for the longest duration.

Best Available Agent : The call is routed to the agent with the highest proficiency across all skills for the contact. This setting is applicable if at least one of the skills in the skill requirement list is of type Proficiency. For more information, see Skills-based Routing Types .

You cannot edit the Queue Routing Type after the queue is saved.

Outbound Campaign Enabled

This toggle button is displayed for outdial queues.

If the toggle button is enabled, then the Call Distribution and Queue Routing Type fields are displayed. This field cannot be edited later. The Longest Available Agent is the only supported queue routing type for outdial queues.

Call Distribution

Add Group

Add a Call Distribution Group to associate one or more teams with this queue. Add multiple groups to distribute calls to more teams as time in queue progresses.

Advanced Settings

Permit Monitoring

Click Yes or No to specify whether users can monitor the calls.

This setting is available for the Telephony channel type.

Permit Recording

Click Yes or No to specify whether the system can record the calls.

This setting is available for the Telephony channel type.

Record All Calls

This setting is available if you enable Permit Recording.

Click Yes or No to indicate whether the system can record all the calls for this queue.

This setting is available for the Telephony channel type.

Pause/Resume Enabled

Click Yes or No to specify whether the agents can pause and resume a call recording. For example, the agent can pause call recording while discussing sensitive information from the customer, such as credit card details.

If you enable the Pause/Resume Enabled feature in the Tenant settings, the system overrides a No setting here. For more information, see Tenant Settings .

Agents can use this feature if your organization administrator enables the Privacy Shield feature in the Webex Contact Center service configuration.

Recording Pause Duration

This setting is available if you set Pause/Resume Enabled to Yes .

This setting specifies the time in seconds, after which the recording resumes automatically.

This setting is available for the Telephony channel type.

Service Level Threshold

Enter the time that a customer request can be in a queue before the system flags it as outside the service level. If you complete a customer service request within this time interval, the system considers it within the service level.

Maximum Time in Queue

Enter the time after which the contact (all media types) is terminated.

Default Music in Queue

Select the name of the audio (.wav) file to play for calls when the calls arrive or wait in the queue. This is the default audio file.

If Play Music is not configured in the Queue Contact activity, then the default music file is played.

Time Zone (Routing Strategies Only)

(Optional) If your organization administrator enables Multiple Time Zone for your enterprise, you can select the time zone of the entry point.

Table 5. Configuration for Channel Type Chat

Setting

Description

General Settings

Enter a name for the queue.

Description

(Optional) Enter a short description for the queue.

(Read-only) This read-only field displays whether the settings are for an entry point, a queue, an outdial entry point, or an outdial queue.

Channel Type

The channel type is: Chat

For outdial queues, the only channel type supported is Telephony.

Contact Routing Settings

Queue Routing Type

The supported queue routing types are:

Longest Available Agent : Chats are routed to the agent who has been available for the longest time over all teams assigned to the queue in the Chat Distribution section. For more information, see Longest Available Agent (LAA) .

Skills Based : Chats are routed to agents based on skill requirements configured in the Webex Connect flow.

When you select Skills Based as the routing type, two other options appear for you to specify how to route a chat when more than one agent with the required skill set is available:

Longest Available Agent : The chat is routed to the agent who has been available for the longest duration. For more information, see Longest Available Agent (LAA) .

Best Available Agent : When you select this setting, the chat is routed to the agent with the highest proficiency across all skills for the contact. This setting is applicable if at least one of the skills in the skill requirement list is of type Proficiency. For more information, see Skills-based Routing Types .

You cannot edit the Queue Routing Type after the queue is saved.

Add Group

Add a Chat Distribution Group to associate one or more teams with this queue. Add multiple groups to distribute chats to more teams as time in queue progresses.

Advanced Settings

Service Level Threshold

Enter the time that a customer request can be in a queue before the system flags it as outside the service level. If you complete a customer service request within this time interval, the system considers it within the service level.

Maximum Time in Queue

Enter the time after which the contact (all media types) is terminated.

Time Zone (Routing Strategies Only)

(Optional) If your organization administrator enables Multiple Time Zone for your enterprise, you can select the time zone of the entry point.

Table 6. Configuration for Channel Type Email

Setting

Description

General Settings

Enter a name for the queue.

Description

(Optional) Enter a short description for the queue.

(Read-only) This read-only field displays whether the settings are for an entry point, a queue, an outdial entry point, or an outdial queue.

Channel Type

The channel type is: Email

For outdial queues, the only channel type supported is Telephony.

Contact Routing Settings

Queue Routing Type

The supported queue routing types are:

Longest Available Agent : Emails are routed to the agent who has been available for the longest time over all teams assigned to the queue in the Email Distribution section. For more information, see Longest Available Agent (LAA) .

Skills Based : Emails are routed to agents based on skill requirements configured in the Webex Connect flow.

When you select Skills Based as the routing type, two other options appear for you to specify how to route an email when more than one agent with the required skill set is available:

Longest Available Agent : The email is routed to the agent who has been available for the longest duration.

Best Available Agent : When you select this setting, the email is routed to the agent with the highest proficiency across all skills for the contact. This setting is applicable if at least one of the skills in the skill requirement list is of type Proficiency. For more information, see Skills-based Routing Types .

You cannot edit the Queue Routing Type after the queue is saved.

Add Group

Add an Email Distribution Group to associate one or more teams with this queue. Add multiple groups to distribute emails to more teams as time in queue progresses.

Advanced Settings

Service Level Threshold

Enter the time that a customer request can be in a queue before the system flags it as outside the service level. If you complete a customer service request within this time interval, the system considers it within the service level.

Maximum Time in Queue

Enter the time after which the contact (all media types) is terminated.

Time Zone (Routing Strategies Only)

(Optional) If your organization administrator enables Multiple Time Zone for your enterprise, you can select the time zone of the entry point.

(Read-only) This read-only field displays whether the settings are for an entry point, a queue, an outdial entry point, or an outdial queue.

Channel Type

The available channel types are:

Telephony
The default channel type.
Email
Email channel.
Chat
Chat channel.

For outdial queues, the only channel type that is supported is Telephony.

Contact Routing Settings

If Campaign Management is enabled in the System Profile (see Provisioning ), then the Contact Routing Settings section is displayed for the Outdial queues.

Queue Routing Type

The supported queue routing types are:

Longest Available Agent : Calls are routed to the agent who has been available for the longest time in all teams assigned to the queue in the Call Distribution section. For more information, see Longest Available Agent (LAA) .

Skills Based : Calls are routed to agents based on skill requirements configured in the Flow that is associated with the entry point.

The Skills Based routing type is available only if your queue is provisioned with Channel Type as Telephony .

When you select Skills Based as the routing type, two other options appear for you to specify how to route a call when more than one agent with the required skill set is available:

Longest Available Agent : The call is routed to the agent who has been available for the longest duration.

Best Available Agent : The call is routed to the agent with the highest proficiency across all skills for the contact. This setting is applicable if at least one of the skills in the skill requirement list is of type Proficiency. For more information, see Skills-based Routing Types .

You cannot edit the Queue Routing Type after the queue is saved.

Outbound Campaign Enabled

This toggle button is displayed for outdial queues.

If the toggle button is enabled, then the Call Distribution and Queue Routing Type fields are displayed. This field cannot be edited later. The Longest Available Agent is the only supported queue routing type for outdial queues.

Call Distribution

Add Group

Add a Call Distribution Group to associate one or more teams with this queue. Add multiple groups to distribute calls to more teams as time in queue progresses.

Advanced Settings

Permit Monitoring

Click Yes or No to specify whether users can monitor the calls.

This setting is available for the Telephony channel type.

Permit Recording

Click Yes or No to specify whether the system can record the calls.

This setting is available for the Telephony channel type.

Record All Calls

This setting is available if you enable Permit Recording.

Click Yes or No to indicate whether the system can record all the calls for this queue.

This setting is available for the Telephony channel type.

Pause/Resume Enabled

Click Yes or No to specify whether the agents can pause and resume a call recording. For example, the agent can pause call recording while discussing sensitive information from the customer, such as credit card details.

If you enable the Pause/Resume Enabled feature in the Tenant settings, the system overrides a No setting here. For more information, see Tenant Settings .

Agents can use this feature if your organization administrator enables the Privacy Shield feature in the Webex Contact Center service configuration.

Recording Pause Duration

This setting is available if you set Pause/Resume Enabled to Yes .

This setting specifies the time in seconds, after which the recording resumes automatically.

This setting is available for the Telephony channel type.

Service Level Threshold

Enter the time that a customer request can be in a queue before the system flags it as outside the service level. If you complete a customer service request within this time interval, the system considers it within the service level.

Maximum Time in Queue

Enter the time after which the contact (all media types) is terminated.

Default Music in Queue

Select the name of the audio (.wav) file to play for calls when the calls arrive or wait in the queue. This is the default audio file.

If Play Music is not configured in the Queue Contact activity, then the default music file is played.

Time Zone (Routing Strategies Only)

(Optional) If your organization administrator enables Multiple Time Zone for your enterprise, you can select the time zone of the entry point.

Table 8. Configuration for Channel Type Chat

Setting

Description

General Settings

Enter a name for the queue.

Description

(Optional) Enter a short description for the queue.

(Read-only) This read-only field displays whether the settings are for an entry point, a queue, an outdial entry point, or an outdial queue.

Channel Type

The channel type is: Chat

For outdial queues, the only channel type supported is Telephony.

Contact Routing Settings

Queue Routing Type

The supported queue routing types are:

Longest Available Agent : Chats are routed to the agent who has been available for the longest time over all teams assigned to the queue in the Chat Distribution section. For more information, see Longest Available Agent (LAA) .

Skills Based : Chats are routed to agents based on skill requirements configured in the Webex Connect flow.

When you select Skills Based as the routing type, two other options appear for you to specify how to route a chat when more than one agent with the required skill set is available:

Longest Available Agent : The chat is routed to the agent who has been available for the longest duration. For more information, see Longest Available Agent (LAA) .

Best Available Agent : When you select this setting, the chat is routed to the agent with the highest proficiency across all skills for the contact. This setting is applicable if at least one of the skills in the skill requirement list is of type Proficiency. For more information, see Skills-based Routing Types .

You cannot edit the Queue Routing Type after the queue is saved.

Add Group

Add a Chat Distribution Group to associate one or more teams with this queue. Add multiple groups to distribute chats to more teams as time in queue progresses.

Advanced Settings

Service Level Threshold

Enter the time that a customer request can be in a queue before the system flags it as outside the service level. If you complete a customer service request within this time interval, the system considers it within the service level.

Maximum Time in Queue

Enter the time after which the contact (all media types) is terminated.

Time Zone (Routing Strategies Only)

(Optional) If your organization administrator enables Multiple Time Zone for your enterprise, you can select the time zone of the entry point.

Table 9. Configuration for Channel Type Email

Setting

Description

General Settings

Enter a name for the queue.

Description

(Optional) Enter a short description for the queue.

(Read-only) This read-only field displays whether the settings are for an entry point, a queue, an outdial entry point, or an outdial queue.

Channel Type

The channel type is: Email

For outdial queues, the only channel type supported is Telephony.

Contact Routing Settings

Queue Routing Type

The supported queue routing types are:

Longest Available Agent : Emails are routed to the agent who has been available for the longest time over all teams assigned to the queue in the Email Distribution section. For more information, see Longest Available Agent (LAA) .

Skills Based : Emails are routed to agents based on skill requirements configured in the Webex Connect flow.

When you select Skills Based as the routing type, two other options appear for you to specify how to route an email when more than one agent with the required skill set is available:

Longest Available Agent : The email is routed to the agent who has been available for the longest duration.

Best Available Agent : When you select this setting, the email is routed to the agent with the highest proficiency across all skills for the contact. This setting is applicable if at least one of the skills in the skill requirement list is of type Proficiency. For more information, see Skills-based Routing Types .

You cannot edit the Queue Routing Type after the queue is saved.

Add Group

Add an Email Distribution Group to associate one or more teams with this queue. Add multiple groups to distribute emails to more teams as time in queue progresses.

Advanced Settings

Service Level Threshold

Enter the time that a customer request can be in a queue before the system flags it as outside the service level. If you complete a customer service request within this time interval, the system considers it within the service level.

Maximum Time in Queue

Enter the time after which the contact (all media types) is terminated.

Time Zone (Routing Strategies Only)

(Optional) If your organization administrator enables Multiple Time Zone for your enterprise, you can select the time zone of the entry point.

Click the ellipsis icon beside a queue and click Copy .

A copy of the queue page appears. The fields have the same values as the original queue.

You can save the same queue with a different name or edit the queue.

You can edit the following details:

You cannot edit some of the settings.

You can edit the Chat Template settings from https://admin.webex.com/ .

Deactivate an Entry Point or a Queue

You cannot deactivate an entry point or queue if you associate it with any other entities such as dial numbers or other routing strategy. When you try to deactivate these entry points or queues, you get an error message. Click the information icon at the end of the message to view the list of all the associated entities.

After you deactivate an entry point or queue, you can still see it in the Entry Points/Queues page as Not Active. Historical reports also display details of the deactivated entry points or queues.

In the Entry Points/Queues page, you can click the ellipsis icon and then the restore icon to reactivate an entry point or queue.

To deactivate an entry point or queue:

From the Management Portal navigation bar, choose Provisioning > Entry Points/Queues .

Choose the type of entry point or queue that you want to deactivate.

Click the ellipsis icon beside an entry point or queue and click Mark Inactive .

Click Yes to confirm.

Once the object is marked inactive, it can be permanently deleted. For more information, see Delete inactive objects permanently .

Activate an Entry Point or a Queue

From the Management Portal navigation bar, choose Provisioning > Entry Points/Queues .

Choose the type of entry point or queue that you want to activate.

Click the ellipsis icon beside the entry point or queue with the status Not Active and click Restore .

Click Yes to confirm.

The status of the entry point or queue changes to Active.

Sites

A site is a physical contact center location under the control of your enterprise. For example, enterprise Acme can have sites in Chicago, Manila, and Bangalore with agents to handle customer contacts.

When you create a site, the system automatically adds a team and a multimedia profile to the new site. You can change the team name and other settings, but cannot change the team type from Capacity based to Agent based. Do not delete the team without adding another team for the new site.

Create a Site

To create a site:
From the Management Portal navigation bar, choose Provisioning > Site .

Click + New Site .

Enter the following details and click Save :

Settings

Description

General Settings

Enter a name for the site.

Advanced Settings

Multimedia Profile

This setting is available, if your administrator enables Multimedia for your enterprise.

Select a multimedia profile for the site. If you do not assign, the system assigns the Default_Telephony_Profile . For more information, see Multimedia Profiles .

View the Details of a Site

To view the details of a site:

From the Management Portal navigation bar, choose Provisioning > Site .

Click the ellipsis icon beside the site that you want to view, and click View .

You can view the following settings:

Edit a Site

To edit a site:

From the Management Portal navigation bar, choose Provisioning > Site .

Click the ellipsis icon beside the site that you want to edit, and click Edit .

You can edit the following settings. Click Save after you have made the changes:

Setting

Description

General Settings

Edit the name of the site. Generally, it is the name of the geographical location.

Advanced Settings

Status

Modify the status of the site.

Multimedia Profile

Modify the multimedia profile for the site.

If you do not assign a profile to the site, the system assigns the Default_Telephony_Profile . This setting is available if the administrator has enabled Multimedia for your enterprise. For more information, see Multimedia Profiles .

Deactivate a Site

You cannot deactivate a site if agents or active teams are associated with the site. If you try to deactivate such a site, a message informs you that you cannot deactivate the site. You can click the information icon in the message to view the list of entities that are associated with this site.

If you deactivate a site, you can still see it in the Sites page as Not Active. Historical reports also display details of the deactivated sites.

To deactivate a site:

From the Management Portal navigation bar, choose Provisioning > Site .

Click the ellipsis icon beside the site you want to deactivate, and click Mark Inactive .

Click Yes to confirm.

The status of the site changes to Not Active.

Once the object is marked inactive, it can be permanently deleted. For more information, see Delete inactive objects permanently .

Activate a Site

To activate a site:

From the Management Portal navigation bar, choose Provisioning > Site .

Click the ellipsis icon beside the site that you want to activate and click Restore .

Click Yes to confirm.

The status of the site changes to Active.

Teams

A team is a group of people who support a specific group of functions. For example, supporting the Gold customers or managing billing, and so on. A team consists of agents and is associated with a specific site.

Create a team

From the Management Portal navigation bar, choose Provisioning > Team .

Click + New Team .

Enter the following details:

Setting

Description

General Settings

Choose the site from the drop-down list. You can’t edit the site later.

Enter a name for the team. Use names that indicate the function of the team, such as Billing or Customer Support.

Choose a team type:

Agent Based: You assign a specific number of agents to the team.

Capacity Based: You don’t assign any specific number of agents to the team. You use capacity-based teams for voice mailboxes or agent groups that Webex Contact Center does not manage.

Advanced Settings

Enter the dial number where the system distributes the calls for this team. This setting is applicable only for capacity-based teams.

Capacity

If Capacity Based is specified in the Team Type field, specify the maximum number of simultaneous calls that this team can handle.You can specify a maximum of up to 10,000. Calls will be routed toother sites or will be queued after the team capacity has beenreached.

Priority

The priority of the team. Currently Cisco doesn’t support this feature.

Skill Profile

(Optional) If your organization administrator enables the optional Skills-based Routing feature for your enterprise, you can select a skill profile for this team. For more information, see Skill Profiles .

As an administrator, you can update the skill profile of agents. These changes are applied to all relevant agents without the need for these agents to sign out and sign in again to the Desktop.

You can’t assign this setting to a capacity-based team.

Multimedia Profile

(Optional) If your organization administrator enables Multimedia for your enterprise, you can select a multimedia profile for this team. For more information, see Multimedia Profiles . This profile overrides the multimedia profile that you assign to the site of this team.

You can’t assign this profile to a capacity-based team.

Agents

From the drop-down list, choose the agents you want to add to the team. You can assign only the agents that your organization administrator configures for your enterprise. For more information, see View the Details of a User .

You can’t assign this profile to a capacity-based team.

Desktop Layout

(Optional) For agent-based teams, choose a desktop layout from the drop-down list. To create a desktop layout for agent-based teams, see Create a Desktop Layout .

If the team uses an unmodified layout, the new layout-based features appear automatically on the Desktop. The Desktop users can view the new layout-based features when they sign in or reload the browser.

This setting is not applicable for a capacity-based team.

Click the ellipsis icon beside the team that you want to view, and click View . You can view all of the configured details.

Edit a team

From the Management Portal navigation bar, choose Provisioning > Team .

Click the ellipsis icon beside the team that you want to edit, and click Edit . You can edit the following settings:

Setting

Description

General Settings

Displays the site chosen for creating a team. This field cannot be edited.

Enter a name for the team. Use names that indicate the function of the team, such as Billing or Customer Support.

Choose a team type:

Agent Based: You assign a specific number of agents to the team.

Capacity Based: You don’t assign any specific number of agents to the team. You use capacity-based teams for voice mailboxes or agent groups that Webex Contact Center does not manage.

Advanced Settings

Enter the dial number where the system distributes the calls for this team. This setting is applicable only for capacity-based teams.

Priority

The priority of the team. Currently Cisco doesn’t support this feature.

Skill Profile

(Optional) If your organization administrator enables the optional Skills-based Routing feature for your enterprise, you can select a skill profile for this team. For more information, see Skill Profiles .

As an administrator, you can update the skill profile of agents. These changes are applied to all relevant agents without the need for these agents to sign out and sign in again to the Desktop.

Multimedia Profile

(Optional) If your organization administrator enables Multimedia for your enterprise, you can select a multimedia profile for this team. For more information, see Multimedia Profiles . This profile overrides the multimedia profile that you assign to the site of this team.

You can’t assign this profile to a capacity-based team.

Agents

From the drop-down list, choose the agents you want to add to the team. You can assign only the agents that your organization administrator configures for your enterprise. For more information, see View the Details of a User .

You can’t assign this profile to a capacity-based team.

Desktop Layout

(Optional) For agent-based teams, choose a desktop layout from the drop-down list. To create a desktop layout for agent-based teams, see Create a Desktop Layout .

If the team uses an unmodified layout, the new layout-based features appear automatically on the Desktop. The Desktop users can view the new layout-based features when they sign in or reload the browser.

Deactivate a team

You cannot deactivate teams associated with agents or active routing strategies. When you try to deactivate such teams, Management Portal displays a message that the team cannot be deactivated. You can click the information icon in the message to view the list of entities associated with a team.

If you deactivate a team, you still see the Teams page as Not Active. Historical reports also display details of deactivated teams.

From the Management Portal navigation bar, choose Provisioning > Team .

Click the ellipsis icon beside the team that you want to deactivate, and click Mark Inactive .

Click Yes to confirm.

The status of the team changes to Not Active.

Once the object is marked inactive, it can be permanently deleted. For more information, see Delete inactive objects permanently .

Activate a Team

From the Management Portal navigation bar, choose Provisioning > Team .

Click the ellipsis icon beside the team that you want to activate and click Restore .

Click Yes to confirm.

The status of the team changes to Active .

Users

Users of a contact center are agents, supervisors, and managers. A user profile defines a user's access privileges for the Management Portal. Management Portal modules provide users with real-time visibility and control over resources for which they are responsible.

An agent user account must include a user profile granting access to the Agent Desktop module, and must include a desktop profile, as described in Desktop Profiles . Agents use the Webex Contact Center Desktop to manage customer interactions and supervisors to manage supervisor capabilities.

You can create and delete users through Control Hub .

Management Portal synchronizes users with contact center licenses from Control Hub, irrespective of their status.

By default, you are shown only active users. To view inactive users, check the Show Inactive Users check box.

View the Details of a User

From the Management Portal navigation bar, choose Provisioning > Users .

To view the details of a user, click the ellipsis icon beside the first name, and then click View .

You can search users using one of the following parameters:

First Name

Last Name

Email

The search results display 20 users per page. Enter any three characters in the Search box. The search results display the users that match the search criteria. Follow one of these steps to navigate the user list page:

Click Next to navigate to the next page.

Click Last to navigate to the last page.

Click Previous to navigate to the previous page.

Click First to navigate to the first page.

You can view the following details of the user:

Setting

Description

General Settings

Username

The name the user uses to log in to the Webex Contact Center Management Portal.

First Name

The first name of the user.

Last Name

The last name of the user.

Email

The email address of the user.

The work phone number of the user.

Mobile

The mobile phone number of the user. The system displays the number as a string without dashes; for example, 4155551212.

User Profile

The profile of the user. For more information, see Manage a User Profile .

Contact Center Enabled

The setting to access the Agent Desktop and handle customer requests.

Status

The status of the user.

Agent Settings

The site of the agent. For more information, see Create a Site .

Teams

The teams to which the agent belongs. For more information, see Create a team

If a user doesn't belong to any team, then the user is a supervisor.

If a user belongs to any team, then the user is both a supervisor and an agent.

Skill Profile

The skill profile of the agent.

This feature is available if your administrator has enabled the optional Skills-Based Routing feature for your enterprise. This profile overrides any skill profile at the team level that is associated with the agent. For more information, see Skill Profiles .

Desktop Profile

The profile of the agent. For more information, see Desktop Profiles .

An agent can belong to several teams, but can have only one desktop profile.

Multimedia Profile

The multimedia profile of the agent.

This feature is available if your administrator enables the optional Multimedia feature for your enterprise. This profile overrides the multimedia profile of the team that the agent uses to sign in to the Desktop. For more information, see Multimedia Profiles .

External ID

Agent identification details, such as the employee number.

Default DN

The dial number of the agent.

The dial number can be in one of the following formats:

E.164 number format: [+][Country Code][Number]

Example: +11234567890

IDD (International Direct Dialing) format: [IDD][Country Code][Number]

Example: 01161123456789

To edit the details of a user, click the ellipsis button next to the first name of the user and then click Edit . You can edit the following settings:

Setting

Description

General Settings

Username

Enter the name that the user uses to log in to the Webex Contact Center system. The username must be a valid email address. You can’t edit this setting.

First Name

Enter the first name of the user.

Last Name

Enter the last name of the user.

Email

Optionally, enter the email address of the user.

Agent Settings

External ID

Optionally, enter another means of identifying the agent, such as an employee number.

User Profile

Edit the profile of the user. For more information, see Manage a User Profile .

Contact Center Enabled

Click On to provide the user access to Agent Desktop.

Status

Edit the status of the user.

Supervisor Settings

Primary Team

Edit the team for the supervisor.

Agent Settings

The site of the agent. For more information, see Create a Site .

Ensure that the following conditions are met when you change the site of a user:

The agent isn’t signed in to the Agent Desktop when the site is changed. You can sign out the agent explicitly or change the site during a scheduled maintenance.

If the site attribute is changed while an agent is signed in, the agent experiences errors and unexpected desktop behavior.

When you change the site:

The team assigned to the agent is automatically reset. You must assign a new team to the agent.

The desktop profileis reset if its parent type attribute is Site . The desktop profile isn’t reset if its parent type attribute is Tenant .

The agent can't see the data that is related to the previously assigned site in the Agent Performance Statistics Reports on the Agent Desktop.

Teams

The teams to which the agent belongs. To assign the agent to one or more teams, choose the teams from the drop-down list.

Skill Profile

Edit the skill profile of the agent. Choose a profile from the drop-down list.

This feature is available if your administrator enables the optional Skills-Based Routing feature for your enterprise. This profile overrides any skill profile at the team level that is associated with the agent. For more information, see Skill Profiles .

Desktop Profile

Edit the profile of the agent. Choose a profile from the drop-down list. For more information, see Desktop Profiles .

Note: An agent can belong to several teams, but has a single desktop profile.

Multimedia Profile

Edit the multimedia profile of the agent. Choose a profile from the drop-down list.

You can't assign custom multimedia profiles to standard agents. This field is grayed out by default when you choose a standard agent.

This feature is available if your administrator enables the optional Multimedia feature for your enterprise. This profile overrides the multimedia profile of the team that the agent uses to log in to the Agent Desktop. For more information, see Multimedia Profiles .

Default DN

(Optional) Edit the dial number of the agent. If a dial number isn’t specified for the agent, you can add a dial number.

Enter the dial number in one of the following formats:

E.164 number format: [+][Country Code][Number]

Example: +11234567890

IDD (International Direct Dialing) format: [IDD][Country Code][Number]

Example: 01161123456789

External ID

(Optional) Edit the identification details of the agent, such as the employee number.

You can edit the following settings from Cisco Webex Control Hub :

Setting

Description

General Settings

Username

The name that the user uses to log in to Management Portal.

First Name

The first name of the user.

Last Name

The last name of the user.

Email

The email address of the user.

Export Items Provisioned for a User

To export the details of the items that you have provisioned for a user:
From the Management Portal navigation bar, choose Provisioning > Users .

Click the ellipsis icon beside a username and click Excel or PDF . The report contains details of the following items:

Setting

Description

Active Inbound Entry Point Details

The details of the entry points that you map to the user.

Outdial Entry Points

The details of outdial entry points that you map to the user.

Inbound Queues

The details of inbound queues that you map to the user.

Outdial Queues

The details of outdial queues that you map to the user.

Sites

The details of the sites that you map to the user.

Teams

The details of the teams that you map to the user.

Agents

The details of the agents that you map to the user.

Revoke API Key for a User

To revoke API key for a user:
From the Management Portal navigation bar, choose Provisioning > Users .

Click the ellipsis icon beside the required user and click Revoke API Key .

A message appears that you have successfully revoked the API Key for the user.

If you do not map an API key to the profile of that user, an error message appears that the user does not have an API key.

Update and Upload Agent Template

To upload the details of multiple agents simultaneously:

From the Management Portal navigation bar, choose Provisioning > Users .

To download the template, click the Export as CSV ( ) icon.

Click Bulk Update ( ) icon.

Browse the Agent Update template from your local system and choose the template.

Click Upload .

(Optional) Check the status of the upload from Bulk Operations Status in Provisioning.

User Profiles

User profiles determine the features accessible to a user in Cisco Contact Center.

Manage a User Profile

To create a user profile:

From the Management Portal navigation bar, choose Provisioning > User Profiles .

Click the + New User Profile .

Enter the details in the following tabs and click Save in each tab.

General Settings

Module Settings

Access Rights

From the User Profiles page, you can also do the following:

To view the settings for a profile, click the ellipsis beside the user profile that you want to view, and click View .

To edit the settings for a profile, click the ellipsis icon beside the user profile that you want to edit, and click Edit . Modify the settings and click Save .

To export the settings for a profile, click the button to the left of the user profile and click Excel or PDF .

To revoke the API key for the profile, click the button to the left of the user profile and click Revoke API Key .

General Settings

When you configure a new user profile or edit an existing user profile, you can change the following settings in the General Settings tab.

Parameter

Description

Enter a name for the user profile.

When you copy a user profile, the system appends the words copy_of before the name of the original user profile. You can keep the same name or edit it as per your requirement.

Choose a type to determine the privilege level for this profile.

For Management Portal, generic profile and module mapping are:

Standard Agent—Has access to Desktop module.

Premium Agent—Has access to Desktop and Multimedia module.

Supervisor—Has access to all modules but can't manage tenants in the Provisioning module.

Administrator—Has access to all modules.

Administration Only—Has access to the Provisioning, Routing Strategy, and Call Recording modules.

Multimedia mode access to Standard Agent is only applicable if you have subscribed to Flex 3.0 plan. For more information, refer to Flex 3.0 Contact Center Ordering Guide .

You can’t edit the profile type later.

Module Settings

You can use user profiles to control access to Management Portal. The Module Settings tab allows you to specify permissions to the Management Portal modules. You can set module access when you create a new user profile, or edit or copy an existing user profile.

The Module Access has the following options:

If you click All for Module Access, then the user profile can access all of the modules. Click Specific if you want to provide the user access to selected modules only.

You can specify access to the following specific modules.

Setting

Description

Additional Supervisory Features

Allows the administrator to manage additional supervisory features for the agents.

To enable the following setting, click the toggle button:

Send Messages : Allows the supervisor to send a message to an agent from the Team Performance Details page.

Change Agent States : Allows the supervisor to change the agent state from the Team Performance Details page.

Allows the user to silently monitor the quality of service that is delivered to customers across multisource contact centers. The user can silently monitor a selected queue, team, site, or agent if you enable Call Monitoring for the user.

To enable the following settings, click the toggle button:

Whisper Coach : Allows the user who is monitoring the call to speak to the agent (who is handling the call), without the customer hearing the conversation.

Restricted Monitor Only : Prevents the user from viewing and editing monitoring schedules that the user did not create.

View Blind Monitor Requests : Allows the user to view blind monitoring requests of other users.

Allows authorized users to choose a multimedia profile for the user, that includes all types of media such as voice, chat, email, and social. If Multimedia is not enabled, when you edit the user's details via Provisioning > Users , the Multimedia Profile drop-down list displays only the default telephony profile.

Users who have subscribed to Flex 3.0 plan can access the following:

• Digital Channels - Access to chat and email only

• Social Channels - Access to social integrations

Users with Standard Agent user profile have access to Digital Channels only.

Provides the user access to the Provisioning module. The user can perform provisioning activities for the enterprise only if you select Edit in the Provisioning drop-down list. You can control access for an administrator user to perform the following provisioning activities for the enterprise:

Manage Entry Points/Queues : Allows the user to manage Webex Contact Center entry points and queues.

Manage Sites : Allows the user to manage Webex Contact Center sites.

Manage Teams : Allows the user to manage Webex Contact Center teams.

Manage Users : Allows the user to manage Webex Contact Center users.

Manage User Profiles : Allows the user to manage Webex Contact Center user profiles.

Entry Point DN Mappings : Allows the user to map DNs to entry points.

Manage Dial Plans : Allows the user to create and edit dial plans.

Audit Trail : Allows the user to access the Audit Trail interface. This interface allows users to view details of the provisioning changes for the enterprise.

Branding : Provides the user access to the Custom Theme settings on the Management Portal landing page. The user can customize the banner color and images on the Management Portal pages.

Manage Tenants : Allows the user to edit some of the tenant settings.

Revoke API Key : Allows the user to revoke the API key of a Webex Contact Center user.

Manage Desktop profiles : Allows the user to manage desktop profiles.

Manage Skill Definitions : Allows the user to manage skill definitions.

Manage Skill Profiles : Allows the user to manage skill profiles.

Mange Work Types : Allows the user to manage work types.

Manage Auxilliary Codes : Allows the user to manage auxilliary codes.

Manage Outdial ANIs : Allows the user to manage Outdial ANIs.

Manage Desktop Layout : Allows the user to manage desktop layouts.

Manage Multimedia Profile : Allows the user to manage multimedia profiles.

Manage Address Books : Allows the user to manage address books.

Provides access to the Recording Management module, which allows the user to search for and play audio files recorded through the Webex Contact Center Call Recording feature. You can enable the following permissions to the Recording Management module:

Tags: Allows the user to access the Tags tab to view, create, and edit tags that can be assigned to audio files. You can use these tags as search criteria.

Security Keys: Allows the user to access the Security Keys tab to view and change the schedule for generating security key pairs.

This setting allows Supervisors to access Quality Management widget through Desktop.

Provides access to the Reporting and Analytics module. The Reporting and Analytics module allows the user to segment, profile, and visualize the data in contact center systems. This module also helps to identify the key variables that impact productivity and desired business outcomes. Users can configure and modify the Analyzer schemas using this module.

You can provide the user access to Business Rules if you have enabled View or Edit permissions for the Reporting and Analytics module. Business Rules enable the user to incorporate customer data into the Webex Contact Center environment for custom routing and other generic implementation.

Provides you access to the web-based user interface for managing and configuring call handling strategies.

You can create and schedule global call routing and team capacity strategies and alter them in real-time in response to changes in business dynamics.

You can enable the following permissions to the Routing Strategy module:

Manage Call Flow Scripts: Allows you to upload and update call control scripts. A control script defines how calls are handled.

Manage Flows: Allows you to create and manage flows. A flow defines how you handle the calls.

Manage Audio Files: Allows you to upload and update media resources such as audio-on-hold files for use in routing strategies. Resource files with .wav, .ulaw, .au, .php, and .xml extensions are supported along with other formats, depending on how the tenant’s system is configured.

Provides you access to the Flow Control module based on the option selected such as None , View , and Edit . You can provide the user access to Manage Call Flow Scripts and if you have enabled the View or Edit permission for the Routing Strategy module.

View: If you set Routing Strategy to View , the portal provides only the Open option in the flows table.

When this configuration is set to View , the Copy and Delete options are not provided in the Flows tab even when you set the Manage Call Flow Scripts toggle to On .

Edit: If you set Routing Strategy to Edit , you can configure the following settings:

Using this toggle, you can either enable or disable access to the Flow Control module.

If you disable the permission in the portal for a user, then the portal blocks the Flow Control module to load by stating- "Flow access denied - You do not have permission to edit flows for your organization".

If you enable the permission in the portal for a user, then the portal allows such user to work with the Flow Control module.

Allows you to upload and update media resources such as audio-on-hold files for use in routing strategies. Resource files with .wav, .ulaw, .au, .php, and .xml extensions are supported along with other formats, depending on how the tenant’s system is configured.

Allows supervisor to access the workforce optimization features to manage human resources. Supervisors can proactively analyze and manage resources for optimizing service levels.

The availability of workforce optimization features depends on your license.

Access Rights

You can configure the following settings from the Access Rights tab when you configure a new user profile or edit an existing user profile:

Entry Points

Queues

Sites

Teams

From the drop-down list, choose the specific entities that the user can access. You can choose All to provide access to all entities of that type.

View the Details of a User Profile

To view the details of a user profile:
From the Management Portal navigation bar, choose Provisioning > User Profiles .

Click the ellipsis icon beside a user profile and click View .

You can view the following details:

General Settings

Module Settings

Access Rights

Edit a User Profile

To edit a user profile:
From the Management Portal navigation bar, choose Provisioning > User Profiles .

Click the ellipsis icon beside a user profile that you want to edit and click Edit .

You can edit the details in the following tabs and click Save in each tab:

General Settings

Module Settings

Access Rights

Deactivate a User Profile

Before you begin

Ensure that you do not associate the user profile to any entity before you deactivate the user profile.

To deactivate a user profile:

From the Management Portal navigation bar, choose Provisioning > User Profiles .

Click the ellipsis icon beside a user profile and click Mark Inactive .

Click Yes to confirm.

The status of the user profile changes to Not Active.

Once the object is marked inactive, it can be permanently deleted. For more information, see Delete inactive objects permanently .

Activate a User Profile

From the Management Portal navigation bar, choose Provisioning > User Profiles .

Click the ellipsis icon beside the user profile that you want to activate and click Restore .

Click Yes to confirm.

The status of the user profile changes to Active.

Copy a User Profile

You can copy an existing user profile, update the details, and save the profile with a different name.

To copy a user profile:

From the Management Portal navigation bar, choose Provisioning > User Profiles .

Click the ellipsis icon beside a user profile that you want to copy, and click Copy .

Enter the details in the following tabs and click Save in each tab.

General Settings

Module Settings

Access Rights

Work Types

When you create an idle or wrap-up code, you associate it with a work type. Work types group idle and wrap-up codes in auxiliary reports.

Create a Work Type

To create a work type:

From the Management Portal navigation bar, choose Provisioning > Work Types .

Click + New Work Type .

Enter the following details and click Save :

Setting

Description

Enter a name for the work type.

Description

(Optional) Enter a description of the work type.

Specify the type of auxiliary code to associate with the work type.

Edit a Work Type

To edit a work type:

From the Management Portal navigation bar, choose Provisioning > Work Types .

Click the ellipsis icon beside the work type that you want to edit and click Edit . Except the Type, you can edit the following settings:

Setting

Description

Edit the name for the work type.

Status

You cannot edit the status. It can only be changed if the Restore option is used.

You cannot assign an inactive work type to an auxiliary code.

Description

(Optionally) Edit the description of the work type.

Specifies the type of auxiliary code. You cannot edit this setting.

Deactivate a Work Type

You cannot deactivate a work type if there are any auxiliary codes that are associated with the work type. When you try to deactivate such a work type, a message informs you that you cannot deactivate the work type. You can click the information icon in the message to view the list of entities that you have associated with this work type.

After you deactivate a work type, you can still see it in the Work Types page as Not Active work types. Historical reports also display details of the deactivated work types.

To deactivate a work type:

From the Management Portal navigation bar, choose Provisioning > Work Types .

Click the ellipsis icon beside the work type that you want to deactivate and click Mark Inactive .

Click Yes to confirm.

The status of the work type changes to Not Active.

Once the object is marked inactive, it can be permanently deleted. For more information, see Delete inactive objects permanently .

Activate a Work Type

To activate a work type:

From the Management Portal navigation bar, choose Provisioning > Work Types .

Click the ellipsis icon beside the work type that you want to activate and click Restore .

Click Yes to confirm.

The status of the work type changes to Active.

Auxiliary Codes

Idle or wrap up codes are two types of Auxiliary codes. Agents select Idle or Wrap-Up codes in Webex Contact Center Agent Desktop to indicate their unavailability or status of the customer contacts. Idle codes typically indicate why an agent is not available to take customer contacts, such as during a lunch break or meeting. Wrap-up codes indicate the result of the customer contacts, for example, the agent escalated the contact, or sold a service.

You associate each idle or wrap-up code with a work type. Work types are values that the system uses to group idle and wrap-up codes in auxiliary reports. For more information, see Create a Work Type .

Agents can use an idle or wrap-up code if you assign the code to their profile.You must add at least one idle code and one wrap-up code in a desktop profile. For more information, see Desktop Profiles .

If your enterprise uses the outdial feature, it is recommended that you create a wrap-up code such as Outdial Failed . Agents can use this code when they are in the wrap-up state after initiating an outdial call that fails to connect.

Create Idle or Wrap-Up Codes

To create an idle or wrap-up code:

From the Management Portal navigation bar, choose Provisioning > Auxiliary Codes .

The Aux Codes Idle Codes page appears. To view the list of wrap-up codes, click Wrap Up Codes at the top of the page.

Click + New Idle Code or + New Wrap Up Code .

Enter the following details and click Save .

Is System Auxiliary Code

Click Yes or No to indicate whether this is the system code. System auxiliary codes are used by the multimedia subsystem.

Status

Displayed on the View and Edit pages to specify whether the code is Active or Not Active.

Click Yes or No to indicate whether this is the default code.

If this is the first idle or wrap-up code for your organization, you must make it the default. You can modify it later after you create more codes.

When you make a code default, the system overrides the existing default code. At one point, there can be only one default code each for Idle and wrap-up.

You must assign the default idle and wrap-up codes in desktop profiles. For more information, see Desktop Profiles .

The default wrap-up code is used when the agent’s profile specifies Auto Wrap Up. These agents do not enter wrap-up codes. Instead, they automatically go into the Available state after completing an incoming call and automatically go into the Idle state after making an outdial call.

The default idle code is used when the agent initially logs in and after the agent makes an outdial call if the agent’s profile specifies Auto wrap-up.

Work Type

Select the work type that you want to associate with this code.

Edit Idle or Wrap-Up Codes

From the Management Portal navigation bar, choose Provisioning > Auxiliary Codes .

Click the ellipsis icon beside the idle or wrap-up code that you want to edit and click Edit .

Enter the following details and click Save .

Setting

Description

Enter the code name.

Description

(Optional) Enter a description of the code.

Is Default

Click Yes or No to indicate whether this code is the default code.

If this code is the first idle or wrap-up code that you create, you must make it the default code. You can modify it later after you create other codes.

You must include the default idle and wrap-up codes in desktop profiles. For more information, see Desktop Profiles .

The system uses the default wrap-up code when the profile of the agent specifies Auto Wrap Up. These agents do not enter wrap-up codes. Instead, they automatically go into the Available state after completing an incoming call and automatically go into the Idle state after making an outdial call.

The system uses the default idle code when the desktop profile has Auto Wrap enabled.

Is System Auxiliary Code

Click Yes or No to indicate whether this code is the system code. The multimedia subsystem uses the System auxiliary codes.

Work Type

Select the work type that you want to associate with this code.

Delete Idle or Wrap-up Codes

You cannot delete the idle or wrap-up code that is set as default. A message informs you that you cannot suspend or delete the default aux-code if you try to delete it. You must set another idle or wrap-up code to default before deleting the chosen wrap-up or idle code. See Edit Idle or Wrap-Up Codes to change the default setting.

From the Management Portal navigation bar, choose Provisioning > Auxiliary Codes .

Click the ellipsis icon beside the idle or wrap-up code and click Mark Inactive .

Click Yes to confirm.

The status of the idle or wrap-up code changes to Not Active.

Once the object is marked inactive, it can be permanently deleted. For more information, see Delete inactive objects permanently .

Desktop Profile is a group of permissions and Desktop behaviors that you assign to agents and supervisors. Each desktop profile specifies the following permissions and settings:

Queue Transfer

Agent Consult and Transfer

Wrap-up and Idle Codes

Wrap-up Timeout Values

Agent Auto Available

Dialing Capabilities

Dial Number Capabilities

Access to the agent personal statistics

Auto Answer

For reports in the Agent Personal Statistics (APS) pane on Agent Desktop, desktop profile settings are applied.

General Information

The General Information tab displays the following settings.

Setting

Description

Enter a name for the desktop profile. You can create a desktop profile from a copy of another desktop profile. When you copy a profile, the system renames the copy. The copy name consists of the name of the profile from which the copy is made and the words copy_of appended as a prefix. You can retain the name the system assigned to the file or rename it.

This setting appears only on the Edit page to indicate if the profile is active.

Active : You can assign the profile to an agent.

Not Active : You can't assign the profile to an agent.

Choose a parent type:

Tenant : The desktop profile is available to all sites at your enterprise.

Site : The desktop profile is available to a specific site.

Click Yes or No to specify whether incoming and outgoing calls on the Agent Desktop must automatically answer for an agent.

If you choose Yes , Auto Answer works in both the following scenarios:

Scenario 1: On Next Generation voice media platform, the agent uses Desktop as the voice channel option.

Scenario 2: All the following conditions are met:

If you choose Yes , Auto Answer works when all of the following conditions exist:

The deployment type is either a Webex Calling Cloud Connected PSTN or Local Gateway configuration.

On Control Hub, the Webex Contact Center Telephony option is Webex Calling .

On Control Hub, the setting enableAutoAnswer is on .

Agents use only one device.

If agents use a Multiplatform Phone (MPP), you don't configure Webex App for the user on Control Hub.

If agents use the Webex App, you configure the Desktop option for the user on Control Hub.

When all the preceding conditions exist, calls are automatically answered for agents with only one device. Agents with more than one device must answer calls manually. Incoming calls to an agent are automatically answered and appear on the Agent Desktop. With outdial calls, the branch to the agent is automatically answered. The system doesn't invoke Auto Answer for simultaneous ring destinations, or if the agent forwards or redirects the call.


In Webex Contact Center, you must not configure voicemail on agent devices, because if an agent declines a call and it is subsequently redirected to voicemail, the system will categorize the call as 'answered'.

Auxiliary Codes

The Desktop Profile > Auxiliary Codes page displays settings for the wrap up and idle codes and permissions that are related to wrap up and agent availability.

Setting

Description

When you click Auto Wrap Up with Time Out Of and enter the time, the system automatically enters the default wrap-up code after an agent completes a conversation. The agent, however, can select a different code within the time period that you specify here.

Click Manual Wrap Up if you want the agent to select a wrap-up code after completing a call. No timeout is associated with manual wrap-up.

Click On if you want the agent to go into the Available state after completing and wrapping up an outdial call.

By default, an agent becomes available after the outdial call. However, if the agent does not want to be available after the outdial call, He/she can select an idle state from the Agent Availability State drop down list on the Desktop before the call is wrapped up.

Click Off if you want the agent to go into the Idle state after completing and wrapping up an outdial call.

Specify the wrap-up codes that the agents can select when they wrap up a contact:

Click All to make all wrap-up codes available.

Click Specific to make specific codes available; then choose codes from the drop-down list. To remove a code, click X on the left side of the listed code name.

You must add the default wrap-up code in the Selected Codes list. The system uses the default code when you have enabled Auto Wrap Up in the profile of the agent. These agents do not enter wrap-up codes.

Specify the Idle codes that the agents can select in Agent Desktop:

Click All to make all idle codes available.

Click Specific to make specific codes available; then select codes from the drop-down list. To remove a code, click X on the left side of the listed code name.

You must add the default idle code in the Selected list. The system uses default codes in the following scenarios:

When the agent initially logs in.

After the agent makes an outdial call if you have enabled Auto Wrap Up in the profile of the agent.

Specify the entry points or queues that the agents can choose from the Queue drop-down list on the Agent Desktop:

Click All to make all entry points and queues available.

A maximum of 1000 entry points or queues are listed for an organization.

Click Specific to make specific entry points and queues available; then choose entry points and queues from the drop-down list.

Click None if you do not want to make any entry points or queues available as transfer targets.

Specify the teams that the agents can choose from the Agent drop-down list on the Agent Desktop.

Agents can consult with, conference with, and transfer calls to the agents from the teams that they choose.

Click All to make the agents on all teams available.

Click Specific to make agents on specific teams available; then select teams from the drop-down list.

Click None if you do not want to make any teams available for consultation, conference, or call transfer.

Click On if you want the agent to be able to select a queue in the Queue drop-down list as a target for a consultation. The target must be an inbound Webex Contact Center queue.

If the agent selects an entry point as the target, the system disables the Consult button.

The system supports Consult to Queue only for queues that have teams serving them. If the agent attempts to consult to a queue that only redirects to another entry point or queue, the system displays a Consult Failed message.

Dial Plan

The Desktop Profile > Dial Plan page allows you to configure settings related to agent outdialing. The following table describes these settings.

Setting

Description

Outdial Enabled

If you want the agent to be able to make outdial calls, click the Outdial Enabled field to toggle to Yes .

If you don't want the agent to make outdial calls, click the Outdial Enabled field to toggle to No . This setting prevents the dial pad from appearing on the Agent Desktop.

To display the dial pad, you must have an appropriate setup. Contact the full administrator for the setup.

Choose an address book from the drop-down list in the Address Book field. An address book includes the speed-dial numbers that the agent can choose from to make outdial and consult calls.

If you set Outdial Enabled to No and you choose an address book, the agent can select a name from the address book for consults and transfers, but can't make outdial calls.

Choose None if you don't want to make an address book available to the agent.

See Create an Address Book for more information.

If you want the agent to be able to make ad-hoc outdial calls, click the Dial Plan Enabled field to toggle to Yes .

If you don't want the agent to be able to make ad-hoc outdial calls, click the Dial Plan Enabled field to toggle to No .

When the Dial Plan Enabled setting is No , and the Outdial Enabled setting is Yes , the agent can make an outdial call, but only by either selecting an entry from the address book or typing a name from the address book in the Enter number to call field on the dial pad.

This setting appears only if you set Dial Plan Enabled to Yes . Choose one or more dial plans for the system to use to validate the Dial Numbers (DN) that the agent enters in the Enter number to call field.

Two default dial plans are available. You can also create custom dial plans for your enterprise. The default dial plans are:

US accepts input text such as the following:

18005551234
1-800-555-1234
1 (800) 555-1234

Any Format accepts input such as the following:

123
5551234
555-1234
1-800-FLOWERS
(800) 555-1234
John.Smith

This setting appears only if you set Outdial Enabled to Yes . Optionally, from the drop-down list in the Outdial ANI field, choose the name associated with the list of phone numbers that the agent can use to make an outdial call. The system uses the number that the agent uses as the caller ID for the call. For more information, see Create an Outdial ANI .

Agent DN validation

The Desktop Profile > Voice Channel options page displays the following settings.

Setting

Description

Voice Channel options
From the Management Portal navigation bar, choose Provisioning > Desktop Profiles .

Click the ellipsis icon beside the desktop profile you want to view and click View . You can view the following details:

General Information

Auxiliary Codes

Collaboration

Dial Plan

Agent DN validation

Agent Statistics

Agent Timeout

(Optional) Click Edit in each tab to edit the settings.

Edit a Desktop Profile

From the Webex Contact Center Portal navigation bar, choose Provisioning .

Choose Desktop Profiles .

The Desktop Profiles page appears. This page displays a list of desktop profiles.

Click the ellipsis icon beside the desktop profile you want to edit and click Edit . You can edit the following details:

General Information

Auxiliary Codes

Collaboration

Dial Plan

Agent DN validation

Agent Statistics

Agent Timeout

Click the ellipsis icon beside the desktop profile you want to copy and click Copy . You can edit the following details in the copied desktop profile:

General Information

Auxiliary Codes

Collaboration

Dial Plan

Agent DN validation

Agent Statistics

Agent Timeout

(Optional) Click Edit in each tab to edit the settings.

Deactivate a Desktop Profile

You cannot deactivate a desktop profile if you associate it with any other entities such as, dial numbers or any other routing strategy. When you try to deactivate these desktop profiles, you get an error message. Click the information icon at the end of the message to view the list of all the associated entities.

After you deactivate a desktop profile, you can still see it in the Desktop Profiles page as Not Active. Historical reports also display details of the deactivated desktop profile.

From the Management Portal navigation bar, choose Provisioning > Desktop Profiles .

Click the ellipsis icon beside a desktop profile and click Mark Inactive .

Click Yes to confirm.

The status of the desktop profile changes to Not Active.

Once the object is marked inactive, it can be permanently deleted. For more information, see Delete inactive objects permanently .

Activate a Desktop Profile

To activate a desktop profile:
From the Management Portal navigation bar, choose Provisioning > Desktop Profiles .

Click the ellipsis icon beside a desktop profile with the status Not Active and click Restore .

Click Yes to confirm.

The status of the desktop profile changes to Active .

Address Books

Address books contain entries with phone numbers. Instead of entering a number manually when starting a call, agents can use the address book to select an entry to dial. Agents can access an address book after you add it to their Desktop Profile. For more information, see Dial Plan in Desktop Profiles .

You can create address books that are available to all sites or only to a specific site. The value of Maximum Address Books in the tenant settings of your enterprise determines the number of address books that you can create. For more information, see Tenant Settings .

When an address book is updated, the administrator must inform the agents to reload the bowser or sign out and sign in again to view the updates.

Create an Address Book

To create a new address book:

From the Management Portal navigation bar, choose Provisioning > Address Book .

Click + New Address Book .

Enter the following details and click Save .

Setting

Description

Enter a name for the address book.

Description

(Optional) Enter a description for the address book.

Parent Type

Select a parent type:

Tenant: The address book is available to all sites at your enterprise.

Site: The address book is only available for a specific site.

Parent Name

Select the site for the address book to be available. This field is available only if you select the Parent Type as Site.

(Optional) In the Entry List, click the + icon to add new entries in the address book.

In the Add Address Book dialog box, enter the following details:

Setting

Description

Enter the name of the entry.

Phone Number

Enter the phone number for the entry.

You can specify the phone number in one of the following formats:

E.164 number format: [+][Country Code][Number]

Example: +11234567890

IDD (International Direct Dialing) format: [IDD][Country Code][Number]

Example: 01161123456789

Edit an Address Book

You can edit the general settings and the entries of an address book.
From the Management Portal navigation bar, choose Provisioning > Address Book .

Click the ellipsis button beside the address book that you want to edit and click Edit .

You can edit the following fields in the General Settings tab:

Setting

Description

Edit the name of the address book.

Description

Edit the description of the address book.

Parent Name

Edit the site for the address book. This field is available only if the parent type is Site.

In the Entry List section, under the Action column, click the edit button to edit an entry.

You can edit the following in the Edit Address Book dialog box:

Setting

Description

Edit the name of the entry.

Phone Number

Edit the phone number of the entry.

You can specify the phone number in one of the following formats:

E.164 number format: [+][Country Code][Number]

Example: +11234567890

IDD (International Direct Dialing) format: [IDD][Country Code][Number]

Example: 01161123456789

(Optional) In the Entry List section, under the Action column, click Delete to delete an entry.

(Optional) Click the + icon to add a new entry to the entry list.

Click Save .

Delete an Address Book

You cannot delete an address book if you associate it with any other entities such as, desktop profile. When you try to delete these address books, you get an error message. Click the information icon at the end of the message to view the list of all the associated entities.

From the Management Portal navigation bar, choose Provisioning > Address Book .

Click the ellipsis icon beside the address book that you want to delete and click Delete .

Click Yes to confirm.

Outdial Automatic Number Identification (ANI)

The Outdial Automatic Number Identification (ANI) feature allows an agent to select a phone number as the caller ID for an outdial call.

To make an outdial ANI list available to an agent, add the outdial ANI list to a Desktop Profile, and assign the profile to the agent. For more information, see Desktop Profiles .

Create an Outdial ANI

To create an outdial ANI:

From the Management Portal navigation bar, choose Provisioning > Outdial ANI .

Click + New Outdial ANI .

Enter the following details in the General Settings section:

Field

Description

Enter a name for the outdial ANI.

Description

(Optional) Enter a description for the outdial ANI.

The Name and Description fields allow alphanumeric characters, space, hyphen (-), and underscore ( _ ).

Click the + icon in the Outdial ANI Entry List section to add a new outdial ANI entry.

Enter the following details in the Add Outdial ANI dialog:

Field

Description

Enter a name for the outdial ANI entry.

The field allows alphanumeric characters, space, hyphen (-), and underscore ( _ ).

Number

Choose a dial number from the drop-down list. The drop-down list displays only the dial numbers that are mapped to entry points. For more information, see Entry Point Mappings .

Repeat Step 5 and Step 6 to add another outdial ANI entry to the list.

Click Save .

Newly added entries are in the Outdial ANI Entry List section.

Edit an Outdial ANI

To edit an outdial ANI:

From the Management Portal navigation bar, choose Provisioning > Outdial ANI .

Click the ellipsis icon beside the outdial ANI that you want to edit and click Edit .

You can edit the following:

General Settings section—Edit the Name or Description of the outdial ANI.

Outdial ANI Entry List section—Edit the name or dial number of an outdial ANI entry.

In the Action column, click the Edit icon next to an entry.

Edit the outdial ANI entry Name or Number .

(Optional) To delete an entry, click the corresponding Delete icon in the Action column.

Click Yes to the prompt message to confirm the deletion.

Click Save .

Delete an Outdial ANI

You cannot delete an outdial ANI if you have associated it with any entity, for example, a desktop profile.

To delete an outdial ANI:

From the Management Portal navigation bar, choose Provisioning > Outdial ANI .

Click the ellipsis icon beside the outdial ANI that you want to delete and click Delete .

Click Yes to confirm.

Dial Plans

The Dial Plan page allows you to define validation criteria for the:

Dial Number (DN) that an agent uses to sign in to the Agent Desktop.

DN that an agent uses for outdialing.

If you satisfy the validation prerequisites, the system validates DNs that agents enter in the Desktop environment against the syntax rules that are defined in one or more dial plans. The following table describes the validation prerequisites.

DN usage

Validation prerequisites

Agent Desktop sign-in

Configure Desktop Profiles > Agent DN Validation as follows:

Set Validation for Agent DN to Validation Criteria (Select from list) .

Set Validation Criteria field to Specific .

Choose a dial plan from the drop-down list in the Select Validation Criteria field. Default dial plans and any dial plan you create appear in this list.

Set Dial Plan Enabled to Yes .

Choose a dial plan from the drop-down list in the Select Dial Plan field. Default dial plans and any dial plan you create appear in this list.

Note: Agents use the Desktop dial pad to make outbound calls. To display the dial pad, you must have the correct setup. Contact your administrator for the setup.

If you allow agents to enter DNs without requiring validation and their entries don't comply with valid syntax, the Desktop rejects sign-ins and outbound calls fail.

You can choose from two default dial plans and create new dial plans. The default dial plans are:

Any Format

The default US dial plan accepts entries such as:

1-800-555-1234

1 (800) 555-1234

18005551234

18005551234,,,222

In this example, commas indicate pauses before entry of an extension number.

The default Any Format dial plan accepts entries such as:

5551234

555-1234

8005551234

1800FLOWERS

bruce.matthews

You can use the Any Format dial plan to validate a DN, the first part of an email address, or a Session Initiation Protocol (SIP) uniform resource identifier (URI).

All dial plans require a regular expression for the system to recognize what defines a valid entry. The regular expression comprises the syntax rules that the system uses to interpret what is valid.

You can create separate dial plans with appropriate regular expressions to specify the required syntax for the:

DN that an agent uses to sign in to the Desktop Station Credentials pop-up window.

DN an agent enters in the Enter number to call field of the Desktop dial pad.

Optionally, you can specify a prefix and characters that the system must strip from the entry in the dial pad.

The regular expressions of the default dial plans are described in the following sections. You can refer to the syntax rules that are described in these sections to guide you in formulating regular expressions for the dial plans you create.

Regular expression for the default US dial plan

Regular expression for the default Any Format dial plan

For an outdial call, the system performs the following steps to determine the validity of an entry an agent makes in the Enter number to call field of the Desktop dial pad:

Strip the characters specified in the dial plan’s Stripped Characters field from the entry in the Enter number to call field.

In the default US and Any Format dial plans, the specified Stripped Characters are left parenthesis, right parenthesis, space, and hyphen.

Validate the resulting entry according to the criteria defined in the regular expression of the chosen dial plan. If the entry meets the criteria, it's deemed valid.

If the entry is invalid, prepend the entry that is specified in the Prefix field.

In the US dial plan, the specified prefix is number 1.

Validate the resulting entry according to the defined regular expression again.

Regular expression for the default US dial plan

The regular expression that is specified for the US dial plan is:

1[0-9]{3}[2-9][0-9]{6}([,]{1,10}[0-9]+){0,1}

Following is a description of what this regular expression specifies.

The first digit must be 1.

Three digits in the range of 0–9 must follow.

{3} means 3 digits in the preceding range [0-9]

One digit in the range of 2-9 must follow.

Six digits in the range of 0-9 must follow.

{6} means six digits in the preceding range [0-9]

Zero or one occurrence of the following sequence can follow: between one and ten commas [,] followed by one or more digits [0-9].

{1,10} means one to ten pauses as specified by one comma [,] per pause

+ means one or more digits in the preceding range [0-9]

{0,1} means zero or one occurrence of the sequence of pauses [,] followed by one or more digits in the preceding range [0-9]

Regular expression for the default Any Format dial plan

The regular expression that is specified for the Any Format dial plan is:

([0-9a-zA-Z]+[-._])*[0-9a-zA-Z]+

Following is a description of what this regular expression specifies.

The dial pad entry can start with zero or more sets of the following sequence:

one or more alphanumeric characters [0-9a-zA-Z] followed by one hyphen, period, or underscore [-._].

+ means one or more alphanumeric characters in the preceding range [0-9a-zA-Z]

* means zero or more of the preceding sequence of alphanumeric characters [0-9a-zA-Z] followed by one hyphen, period, or underscore [-._].

One or more alphanumeric characters [0-9a-zA-Z] must follow.

Create a Dial Plan

Before you begin

You require Administrator privileges to complete this procedure.

From the Management Portal navigation bar, choose Provisioning > Dial Plan .

The Dial Plan page appears. This page displays a list of existing dial plans.

Click + New Dial Plan .

Configure the following settings.

Setting

Description

Enter a name for the Dial Plan . You can assign one or more dial plans to an agent when you create or edit the agent's profile, and when you configure Agent DN validation .

Regular Expression

Enter a regular expression. The regular expression comprises the valid syntax for dial numbers (DN) the agent enters in the Desktop environment. Each dial plan requires a regular expression.

For examples of the regular expressions of the default dial plans, see the following sections. Use the examples shown in these sections to formulate regular expressions for the dial plans you create.

Regular expression for the default US dial plan

Regular expression for the default Any Format dial plan

Prefix

(Optional) Enter a prefix that the system automatically adds to the phone number that the agent enters. For example, enter the digit 1 for long-distance calls within the United States.

The system adds a prefix only if the agent does not add it when entering a DN in the Desktop environment.

Stripped Character

Enter the characters that the system removes from the DN that an agent enters in the Desktop environment.

The system automatically removes the following characters from the number that an agent enters: left and right parentheses, space, and hyphen.

Click Save .

Edit a Dial Plan

Before you begin

You require Administrator privileges to complete this procedure.

From the Management Portal navigation bar, choose Provisioning > Dial Plan .

The Dial Plan page appears. This page displays a list of existing dial plans.

Click the ellipsis icon beside the dial plan you want to edit and choose Edit .

The Edit Dial Plan page appears.

You can edit the settings described in the following table. When you are done editing, click Save .

Setting

Description

Edit the name of the Dial Plan .

Regular Expression

Edit the Regular Expression .

The regular expression comprises the valid syntax for dial numbers (DN) the agent enters in the Desktop environment. Each dial plan requires a regular expression.

Prefix

Enter a DN in the Desktop environment.

Stripped Character

Edit the Stripped Character . The system automatically removes the following characters from the number that the agent enters: left and right parentheses, space, and hyphen.

From the Management Portal navigation bar, choose Provisioning > Dial Plan

The Dial Plan page appears. This page displays a list of all existing dial plans.

Click the ellipsis icon beside the dial plan you want to delete and choose Delete .

The Heads Up! dialog box appears.

Click Yes to confirm.

Global Variables

Global variables are custom variables defined in the Provisioning module and accessible throughout a flow. Flow developers can add global variables to the flow as required. For more information, see Global Variables in Flow Designer .

Global variables are specific to the Webex Contact Center voice channel. They collect one of the following types of data values:

Caller-entered data: Data that a customer enters using IVR during a call, such as an account number.

Agent-entered data: Data that an agent enters into the Interaction Control pane of the Desktop during an active call with a customer, such as a case number or action code.

You can create any number of global variables. However, you can enable only up to 100 global variables for reporting at a time.

For more information, see Create a Global Variable .

By default, you are shown only active global variables. To view inactive global variables, check the Show Inactive Global Variables check box.

Global variable values are visible to users who have access to historical records on the Management Portal. Never store secure data such as credit card numbers, personal identification numbers, or social security numbers using global variables.

You can't delete Global variables; but you can deactivate a global variable that isn’t in use in any flow. You can’t use an inactive global variable to store data. For more information on how to deactivate a global variable, see Create a Global Variable .

System-Defined Variables

System-defined variables are the predefined global variables used by the Webex Contact Center.

You can edit the system-defined variables in the Provisioning module; but you can’t create or deactivate system-defined variables.

Webex Contact Center uses the following system-defined variables:

Global_FeedbackSurveyOptin : Indicates whether the customer chooses to participate in (opt-in) or not participate in (opt-out) a post call survey. The Variable Type is defined as String ; while the default value is uninitialized , meaning there is no initial value.

Global_Language : Indicates the language that a customer uses in the flow. The Variable Type is defined as String ; and the default value is en-US . For more information, see Webex Experience Management Language Support .

Global_VoiceName : Indicates the output-recorded name used in the flow. The Variable Type is defined as String ; while the default value is Automatic . When the value is Automatic , Google Dialogflow chooses the voice name for a given language.

Create a Global Variable

From the Management Portal navigation bar, choose Provisioning > Global Variables .

Click + New Global Variable .

The Global Variable window appears.

Enter a Name for the variable.

You can't edit a name after it's created.

The name supports only alphanumeric characters and underscores. Spaces are not supported.

The name supports a maximum of 80 characters, but only 50 characters are displayed. If you hover the mouse pointer, the tooltip displays the complete name.

Choose one of the following types from the Variable Type drop-down list and specify the variable value.

Variable Type Default Value

Boolean

Select True or False .

String

Enter a string value. The string can be a maximum of 256 characters long for each variable. Strings support alphanumeric characters, special characters and spaces.

Integer

Enter an integer value.

Decimal

Enter a decimal value.

Date Time

Enter a date in Tenant Timezone in one of the supported formats:

YYYY-MM-DD

YYYY-MM-DDThh:mm

(Optional) Enable the Make Reportable toggle button to display the variable in the Analyzer for reporting purposes.

You can enable up to 100 global variables for reporting.

(Optional) Enable the Make Agent Viewable toggle button to display the variable on the Desktop along with the value entered as part of the flow.

When you enable the Make Agent Viewable toggle button, the following configurations appear:

Desktop Label : This label appears on the Desktop in place of the variable name. Enter a clearer label than the variable name itself, so that agents can understand the data that is being passed to them.

The desktop label supports a maximum of 50 characters.

Agent Editable : Enable this toggle button when you want the agent to be able to edit the value of the variable as part of the interaction session. Any updates to the variable that is made in the Desktop are available in the flow. The agent can edit the variable and click the Save button in the Desktop. If the call gets disconnected before the edits are saved, the variable update doesn’t take place.

Click Save .

Edit a Global Variable

To edit a global variable:

From the Management Portal navigation bar, choose Provisioning > Global Variables .

Click the ellipsis icon beside the required global variable and click Edit .

Make the necessary changes and click Save .

You can’t edit the Name and Variable Type fields of a global variable.

You can enable up to 100 global variables for reporting. For more information, see Create a Global Variable .

Click the ellipsis icon beside the global variable that you want to deactivate and click Mark Inactive .

Click Yes to confirm.

The status of the global variable changes to Not Active .

Once the object is marked inactive, it can be permanently deleted. For more information, see Delete inactive objects permanently .

Activate a Global Variable

From the Management Portal navigation bar, choose Provisioning > Global Variables .

Click the ellipsis icon beside the required global variable and click Restore .

Click Yes to confirm.

The status changes from Not Active to Active .

Multimedia Profiles

If your administrator enables multimedia for your enterprise, you can assign each agent with a multimedia profile. Each profile specifies the number of each type of media, such as email, chat, or telephone, that the agent can handle simultaneously.

The optional multimedia feature enables the Webex Contact Center system to manage routing strategies for email, telephone, and chat contacts.

You can assign multimedia profiles to sites, teams, or individual agents. By default, the system assigns the Default_Telephony_Profile to every site. You cannot edit or delete this profile, but can re-assign a different multimedia profile to the site.

All of the teams under a site have the same multimedia profile as that of the site, unless you assign a different profile to the teams. Similarly, all of the agents under the teams have the same profile as that of the team, unless you change the profile for the agents.

Create a Multimedia Profile

To configure a multimedia profile:

From the Management Portal navigation bar, choose Provisioning > Multimedia Profiles

Click + New Multimedia Profile .

Do the following:

In the Profile Details area, enter the following details:

Setting

Description

Enter a name for the multimedia profile.

Description

(Optional) Enter a description for the profile.

In the Media Details area, enter the following details:

Setting

Description

Blended

Allows agents to handle multiple contacts simultaneously for different channel types. Set the number for each channel type.

Number of contacts that you can set:

Voice: 0–1

Chat, Email, and Social Channel: 0–5

Blended Real-time

Allows agents to handle one mandatory real-time channel, either Voice or Chat, and in addition you can set the limit for Email.

Number of contacts that you can set:

Voice: 1 (mandatory)

Chat: 1–5

Email: 0–5

Exclusive

Allows agents to focus on one customer contact at a time. Check the channel types for which the agents receive contacts.

Click Save .

View the Details of a Multimedia Profile

To view the details of a multimedia profile:

From the Webex Contact Center Portal navigation bar, choose Provisioning .

Click the ellipsis icon beside a multimedia profile and click View .

In the Profile Details area, view the following information about the multimedia profile:

Setting

Description

The name of the multimedia profile.

Description

The description of the profile.

Status

The status of the multimedia profile. The status can be either Active or Inactive .

In the Media Details area, view the following information about the multimedia profile:

Setting

Description

Voice

Displays the number of contacts for the voice channel.

Displays the number of contacts for the chat channel.

Email

Displays the number of contacts for the email channel.

(Optional) Click Edit to change the settings. For more information, see Edit a Multimedia Profile .

(Optional) Click Delete to deactivate the settings. For more information, see Deactivate a Multimedia Profile .

Edit a Multimedia Profile

To edit a multimedia profile:

From the Management Portal navigation bar, choose Provisioning > Multimedia Profiles .

Click the ellipsis icon beside a multimedia profile and click Edit .

Do the following:

In the Profile Details area, edit the following details:

Setting

Description

Enter a name for the multimedia profile.

Description

(Optional) Enter a description for the profile.

In the Media Details area, edit the following details:

Setting

Description

Blended

Allows agents to handle multiple contacts simultaneously for different channel types. Set the number for each channel type.

Number of contacts that you can set:

Voice: 0–1

Chat, Email: 0–5

Blended Real-time

Allows agents to handle one mandatory real-time channel, either Voice or Chat, and in addition you can set the limit for Email.

Number of contacts that you can set:

Voice: 1 (mandatory)

Chat: 1–5

Email: 0–5

Exclusive

Allows agents to focus on one customer contact at a time. Check the channel types for which the agents receive contacts.

Deactivate a Multimedia Profile

You cannot deactivate a multimedia profile if you associate it with any entity.

To delete a multimedia profile:

From the Management Portal navigation bar, choose Provisioning > Multimedia Profiles .

Click the ellipsis icon beside the multimedia profile that you want to deactivate, and click Mark Inactive .

Click Yes to confirm.

The status of the multimedia profile changes to Not Active .

Once the object is marked inactive, it can be permanently deleted. For more information, see Delete inactive objects permanently .

Activate a Multimedia Profile

From the Management Portal navigation bar, choose Provisioning > Multimedia Profiles .

Click the ellipsis icon beside a multimedia profile with the status Not Active and click Restore .

Click Yes to confirm.

The status of the multimedia profile changes to Active .

Desktop Layout

The Desktop Layout feature allows you to configure the Webex Contact Center Desktop as per your business requirements. You can customize elements such as logo, title, and widgets. For the complete list of elements that you can customize, see Define a Custom Desktop Layout . You can create a desktop layout and assign it to a team. This layout generates the agent experience on the desktop for all agents who sign in as part of that team.

There are two types of layouts:

Global Layout: This layout is a system-generated layout that gets assigned by default when you create a team. For more information, see Create a team . When you create a team, the Global Layout is automatically set as the desktop layout for the team. You cannot delete this layout.

Custom Layout: A layout that provides a customized desktop experience. You can create a custom layout for one or more teams.

If you assign a new desktop layout when an agent is signed in, the agent must reload the page to see the new layout.

The Webex Contact Center Desktop supports three personas:

Agent

Supervisor

Supervisor and an Agent

The JSON layout file has separate sections for each of the personas. The administrator should configure the settings for each persona in the corresponding section of the JSON layout file. For more information about a sample JSON layout file, see JSON Layout Top-Level Properties .

When Cisco adds a new feature to the Desktop Layout, the unmodified layout is updated automatically with the new features. The updated desktop layout is automatically available to the existing teams that use the unmodified desktop layout. The Desktop users using the unmodified desktop layout receive the new layout-based features when they sign in or reload the browser.

If you are using the Default Desktop Layout.json file without any modification, then it is considered an unmodified layout. However, if you download the Default Desktop Layout.json file and upload it again, it is considered a modified layout even if the file content or filename is not modified.

Create a Desktop Layout

To create a custom desktop layout:

Before you begin

Ensure that you have a custom JSON layout file that defines your layout. To create a custom JSON layout file, download the Default Desktop Layout.json file from the Desktop Layout page and customize the layout as described in Define a Custom Desktop Layout .
From the Management Portal navigation bar, choose Provisioning > Desktop Layout .

Click New Layout .

Enter the following details:

Setting

Description

Enter a name that identifies the purpose of the layout.

Description

Enter a description.

Choose a team name from the drop-down list.

If a custom layout is already assigned to a team, then that team name doesn’t appear in this drop-down list. For more information on the Team settings, see Create a team .

If you assign a custom layout on this page, you overwrite the global layout, which is the default layout for all teams.

JSON File Click to download the Default Desktop Layout.json file and customize the layout as described in Define a Custom Desktop Layout .

If you use the unmodified layout, the new layout-based features appear automatically on the Desktop. The Desktop users can view the new layout-based features when they sign in or reload the browser.

Upload the JSON file that you customized to define the custom desktop layout.

The system validates the JSON file for errors and an appropriate message appears.

The system enables the Save button when the validation is complete.

To integrate Webex Experience Management widgets, see the Webex Experience Management documentation.

If the uploaded custom layout has validation errors, click Restore to restore the default layout.

Click Save to save the configuration.

Important:

To verify the layout experience, see View Layout Experience on Desktop .

View Layout Experience on Desktop

Create a test team. For more information, see Create a team .

Assign yourself to the test team.

From the Management Portal navigation bar, choose Desktop Agent Desktop .

Select the test team and validate the experience.

Define a Custom Desktop Layout

This topic discusses how to create a custom layout by editing the JSON file and provides sample use cases to get started with widgets such as the Customer Experience Management Metrics widget and Customer Experience Journey widget.

Before You Begin

The following are good-to-have skills to customize the Desktop layout:

Understanding of the HTML structure

Understanding of the document tree model in a browser

Understanding of the JSON format

Desktop Layout Overview

In the Desktop, there are two types of widgets—iframe-based and web component-based. The header, navigation (custom page), persistent area, headless area, and aux panel are the customizable area in a Desktop. These are not widgets.

The following list details the spaces that you can configure. The images illustrates the layout of the Desktop:

Title and Logo area: This space displays the Webex Contact Center logo and name (default) at the top-left corner of your screen.

Horizontal Header area: This space has a configurable area that is populated with custom widgets. These widgets can display, for example, inline information and drop-down menus. As the height of this header is only 64 pixels, the widget height cannot cross the header height.

Workspace area: This space changes as per the selection on the navigation bar or when an agent is interacting with customers. When an agent is on a call, this area displays the interaction control and auxiliary information pane (that includes custom widgets and persistent widgets). When an agent is interacting on email, chat, or social channels, this area displays the workspace area and auxiliary information pane (that includes the persistent widget area).

Custom Page displays on the Desktop interface in the workspace pane. You can access the custom page through icons on the navigation bar. Each custom page can contain one or more custom widgets.

Custom Widget is a third-party application that is configured in the JSON layout. You can place the custom widget on the custom page, custom tab (Auxiliary Information pane), or on the horizontal header of the Desktop.

Navigation Bar area: Use this space to add navigation items to access custom pages.

Sample Desktop UI for Voice
Sample Desktop UI for New Digital Channels
JSON Layout Top-Level Properties
Roles

The default JSON layout has following three roles.

agent—To set the Desktop Layout to be displayed when an agent signs in to the Webex Contact Center Desktop to handle agent activities.

supervisor—To set the Desktop Layout to be displayed when a supervisor signs in to the Webex Contact Center Desktop to handle only supervisor capabilities.

When a supervisor signs in to the Desktop, the desktop layout that is specified for the primary team is applied. If you do not provide a primary team, the global layout applies. By default, APS reports are disabled.

supervisorAgent—To set the Desktop Layout to be displayed when a supervisor signs in to the Webex Contact Center Desktop to handle both supervisor capabilities and agent activities.

You can either add or modify widgets for each role in the corresponding persona of the relevant JSON layout file.

The following are the top-level properties for JSON layout based on the role:

"agent": { "version": "0.1.0", "appTitle": "Webex Contact Center", "logo": "", "taskPageIllustration": "https://www.abc.com/image/logo.jpg", "stopNavigateOnAcceptTask": false, "dragDropEnabled": false, "notificationTimer": 8, "maximumNotificationCount": 3, "browserNotificationTimer": 8, "wxmConfigured": false, "desktopChatApp": { "webexConfigured": false, "headerActions": ["outdial", "notification"], "area": { "advancedHeader": { "panel": { "navigation": { "persistent": { "headless": { "supervisor": { "version": "0.1.0", "appTitle": "Webex Contact Center", "logo": "", "taskPageIllustration": "https://www.abc.com/image/logo.jpg", "stopNavigateOnAcceptTask": false, "dragDropEnabled": false, "notificationTimer": 8, "maximumNotificationCount": 3, "browserNotificationTimer": 8, "wxmConfigured": false, "desktopChatApp": { "webexConfigured": false, "headerActions": ["outdial", "notification"], "area": { "advancedHeader": { "panel": { "navigation": { "persistent": { "headless": { "homePage": { "supervisorAgent": { "version": "0.1.0", "appTitle": "Webex Contact Center", "logo": "", "taskPageIllustration": "https://www.abc.com/image/logo.jpg", "stopNavigateOnAcceptTask": false, "dragDropEnabled": false, "notificationTimer": 8, "maximumNotificationCount": 3, "browserNotificationTimer": 8, "wxmConfigured": false, "desktopChatApp": { "webexConfigured": false, "headerActions": ["outdial", "notification"], "area": { "advancedHeader": { "panel": { "navigation": { "persistent": { "headless": {

appTitle

taskPageIllustration

stopNavigateOnAcceptTask

dragDropEnabled

notificationTimer

maximumNotificationCount

browserNotificationTimer

wxmConfigured

desktopChatApp

The changes made to the JSON layout properties take effect when the Desktop browser is refreshed.

If a feature that you enabled on JSON layout is not available on the Desktop, contact Cisco Support to enable the feature.

All the properties in the JSON layout are case sensitive.

appTitle

To specify a title on the horizontal header of the Desktop. The default title is Webex Contact Center .

Example :

"appTitle": "Webex Contact Center"

The default appTitle is changed from Contact Center Desktop to Webex Contact Center . There is no impact on the existing custom layouts that use the old default appTitle ( Contact Center Desktop ). To use the new appTitle, you must modify the custom layout. However, the new global layout uses the default appTitle as Webex Contact Center .

The title can either be text, an image, or an empty string. The title text appears in two rows. If the text extends beyond the second row, an ellipsis icon is displayed, and the tooltip displays the complete title. Styles cannot be applied to the title.

You can either use data URIs (Uniform Resource Identifier) or host a custom title image on a content delivery network (CDN), Amazon Web Services (AWS) Simple Storage Service (S3) bucket, or a similar hosting service, and then specify the URL to the hosted image. The supported title image formats are PNG, JPG, JPEG, GIF, SVG, and WebP. The supported title image size is 184 x 32 pixels (width x height).

To specify a URL for the company logo. If you do not provide a URL, then the Webex Contact Center logo appears by default.

Example :

"logo": "https://my-cdn.com/logo.png"

You can host a custom logo image on a CDN, Amazon Web Services (AWS) Simple Storage Service (S3) bucket, or a similar hosting service, and then specify the URL to the hosted image. The supported logo image formats are PNG, JPG, JPEG, GIF, SVG, and WebP. The supported logo image size is 96 x 32 pixels (width x height).

"appTitle": "",
  "logo": "",
                    
"appTitle": "ABC Company",
  "logo": "https://my-cdn.com/abclogo.png",
                    
"appTitle": "ABC Company",
  "logo": "",
                    

If appTitle is not configured and logo is configured

"appTitle": "",
  "logo": "https://my-cdn.com/abclogo.png",
                    
"appTitle": "ABC Company",
  "logo": "no-logo",
                    

If appTitle is not configured and logo is not preferred

"appTitle": "",
  "logo": "no-logo",
                    
"appTitle": "https://my-cdn.com/abccompanylogo.png ",
  "logo": "https://my-cdn.com/abclogo.png",
                    

If appTitle is added as an image and logo is not configured

"appTitle": "https://my-cdn.com/abccompanylogo.png ",
  "logo": "",
                    

If appTitle is added as an image and logo is not preferred

"appTitle": "https://my-cdn.com/abccompanylogo.png ",
  "logo": "no-logo",
                    

The custom image size is adjusted based on the aspect ratio. The custom title text that is configured earlier may now appear in two rows on the Desktop. To avoid this, you can modify the custom title text.

If title and logo are not configured in the horizontal header of the Desktop, that space is used by the header widgets. The header widgets must be configured correctly to use the title and logo space.

The title and logo together cannot exceed the maximum width of 304 pixels (including padding). If the logo width is lesser than 96 pixels, the remaining width can be used for the title.

If the custom image size is higher than the supported size, the image size is adjusted based on the aspect ratio in the horizontal header. If the custom image size is lesser than the supported size, the actual image size is retained in the horizontal header.

taskPageIllustration

To specify a custom illustration for the task page based on organization preferences and brand alignment. When an agent signs in, the task page displays the configured illustration as a background. By default, the task page appears without illustration.

Example :

"taskPageIllustration": "https://www.abc.com/image/logo.jpg",

You can either use data URIs or host a custom illustration on a content delivery network (CDN), Amazon Web Services (AWS) Simple Storage Service (S3) bucket, or a similar hosting service, and then specify the URL to the hosted illustration. The illustration can be configured at the global or team level based on the layout definition. Ensure to configure the correct URL to prevent the broken image from being displayed on the Desktop.

The supported task page illustration formats are PNG, JPG, JPEG, GIF, SVG, and WebP. The recommended illustration size is 400 x 400 pixels (width x height). If the custom illustration size is larger than the recommended size, the illustration size is adjusted based on the aspect ratio in the task page. If the custom illustration size is smaller than the recommended size, the actual illustration size is retained in the task page.

Sample example for a custom illustration retaining the actual size
Sample example for a custom illustration adjusted based on the aspect ratio
stopNavigateOnAcceptTask

To determine whether to shift the focus to a newly accepted task, when the agent accepts the new task while working on a previous task. The default value is false .

Example :

"stopNavigateOnAcceptTask": false

If the value is set as true , when the user accepts a new task on the Desktop, the focus is retained on the previous task and does not shift to the newly accepted task. This setting prevents the user from losing any data when accepting a new request.

For example, consider that Agent 1 is on chat with Customer 1 and simultaneously on a voice call with Customer 2. During the voice call, Agent 1 is updating the details of Customer 2 in the Interaction Control pane. Currently, Agent 1 has two active tasks in the Task List pane, and the focus is on the Interaction Control pane. When Agent 1 accepts a new chat request from Customer 3, the focus remains on the Interaction Control pane with Customer 2 and does not shift to the newly accepted chat request.

To retain the focus on the previous task and not to shift to the newly accepted task, select the custom layout with the stopNavigateOnAcceptTask property value set to true .

If the stopNavigateOnAcceptTask property value is not entered in the JSON layout, the Desktop shifts the focus to the newly accepted task. The behavior is similar to when the stopNavigateOnAcceptTask property value is set to false .

The setting applies to all tasks (voice and digital channels) performed on the Desktop—such as accepting a task, conference, consult, or transfer, and for outdial calls, outbound campaign calls, auto wrap up, and so on.

The setting does not apply if the Desktop user is on the Home page, with no active task in the Task List pane. In such a case, when a new task is accepted, the focus is shifted from the Home page to the newly accepted task.

dragDropEnabled

To enable the drag-and-drop and resizing of the widgets on the custom pages, set the value to true . The default value is false .

Example :

"dragDropEnabled": false

For more information about enabling the drag-and-drop feature for the tabs in the Auxiliary Information pane, see Auxiliary Information Pane .

notificationTimer

To set the duration (in seconds) after which the desktop notifications on the Desktop are automatically dismissed. The notification appears at the top-right corner of the Desktop. The default timeout value is 8 seconds. The valid range for timeout values is 1-10 seconds. For the timeout changes to take effect, the browser must be refreshed after the changes are made.

Example :

"notificationTimer": 8
maximumNotificationCount

To set the number of desktop notifications to be displayed at a time on the Desktop. The default value is 3. The range for desktop notifications is 1-10. The desktop notifications are stacked. If there are many notifications, they appear with a slight delay depending on the notificationTimer settings.

Example :

"maximumNotificationCount": 3
browserNotificationTimer

To set the duration (in seconds) after which the browser toaster notifications on the Desktop are automatically dismissed. Toaster is a native browser notification that appears only if the Desktop is not the active browser window or tab. The Desktop browser window or tab is inactive when

You are working on other browser windows or tabs.

You are working on other applications.

You have minimized the Desktop browser window.

The notification appears at the top-right corner of the Desktop. The default timeout value is 8 seconds. The recommended range for timeout values is 5-15 seconds. For the timeout changes to take effect, the browser must be refreshed after the changes are made.

Example :

"browserNotificationTimer": 8

The configured timeout for browser notifications depends on the operating system and browser settings. The timeout value is honored in the Chrome browser across Windows OS, Chrome OS, and macOS. However, the other supported browsers do not honor the configured notification timeout value consistently.

wxmConfigured

(Optional) To configure Webex Experience Management, set the value to true . The default value is false . For more information, see Add Widgets to Webex Contact Center .

Example :

"wxmConfigured": true
desktopChatApp

To configure multiple Cisco-offered chat applications such as Webex App.

webexConfigured

Webex App along with its messaging and meeting functionalities can be configured within the Desktop. This configuration allows agents to collaborate with other agents, supervisors, and subject matter experts (SMEs) in their organization without navigating away from the Desktop.

The site administrator manages Webex Meeting users and assigns privileges only if the users have Webex Enterprise Edition. For more information, see Manage Webex Meetings Users in Cisco Webex Control Hub .

The supervisors and SMEs must download the Webex Client on their system (personal device) or access Webex App using Webex App for Web ( https://web.webex.com/ ). For more information, see Download the App .

You can access the Webex App within the Agent Desktop to collaborate with other agents, supervisors, and subject matter experts (SMEs) of your organization without navigating away from the Agent Desktop. The call control feature isn't available. To receive and make calls, you require the external, non-embedded Webex App. For more information, see Calling Apps .

To configure Webex App within the Desktop:

In Cisco Webex Control Hub, when adding services for a user, select the Advanced Messaging check box ( Users > Manage Users > Services > Messaging ). For more information, see Manage User Accounts in Cisco Webex Site Administration .

In the custom Desktop Layout, set the webexConfigured property value to true .

Example :

"desktopChatApp": {
    "webexConfigured": true
                        

The default value of the webexConfigured property is false.

Webex App is available for the agent, supervisor, and supervisorAgent roles only if you set the webexConfigured property value to true for each of these roles. The agent, supervisor, or supervisorAgent can't sign out of Webex App.

To display the (Webex) icon on the horizontal header of the Desktop, enter the value webex in the headerActions property. For more information, see headerActions.

To enable Webex App for a specific team, select the custom layout with the webexConfigured property value set to true. For more information, see Create a team.

You can configure Webex App in the Auxiliary Information pane, custom page, and custom widget also. For more information, see Auxiliary Information Pane.

Webex App Notification

The values that are specified using the notificationTimer and browserNotificationTimer properties for the notification timer are applicable for Webex App. The default timeout value is 8 seconds for these properties. For more information, see notificationTimer and browserNotificationTimer.

headerActions

To change the order of the icons on the horizontal header of the Desktop. The default order is as follows:

(Webex)

(Outdial Call)

(Notification Center)

Set the value of the headerActions property as follows:

Icon Name

headerActions Property Value

Webex App

webex

"headerActions": ["webex", "outdial", "notification"],

The headerActions property value is case sensitive.

To change the default order of the icons, enter the headerActions property and the values in the custom layout accordingly.

Example: "headerActions": ["notification", "outdial", "webex"],

If you do not enter the headerActions property and values in the custom layout, the icons are displayed in the default order.

To remove the header icons and the associated functionalities from the Desktop, set an empty value for the headerActions property ("headerActions": []). However, if you have added Webex App to the Auxiliary Information pane or a custom page, or as a custom widget, the agent can still access Webex App although Webex App is not available in the horizontal header of the Desktop.

If the webexConfigured property value is set as false, the Webex App icon is not displayed on the horizontal header of the Desktop, even if the webex value is added in the headerActions property. For more information, see webexConfigured.

The area property is the core section of the Desktop Layout. You can define the layout as per the area.

"area": {
    "header": {
    "advancedHeader: {
          "comp": "widget-1",
          "attributes": { ... },
          "script": ....
    "panel": {
    "navigation": {
    "persistent": {
    "headless": {
            

You can configure the following area objects:

Panel: Represents the second panel or the right-most panel in the Auxiliary Information pane.

Navigation: Represents custom pages and their navigation elements that are related to the pages.

Persistent: Represents the page-level widgets that are persistent and display on all pages of the Desktop.

Headless: Represents the widgets that do not have a visual interface, but execute logic in the background.

If advancedHeader property is configured, the header and headerActions properties must be removed.

advancedHeader

To customise the visibility and change the order of the icons on the horizontal header of the Desktop. The default order is as follows:

(Webex)

(Outdial Call)

(Notification Center)

(Agent State Selector)

Set the value of the advancedHeader property as follows:

Icon Name

headerActions Property Value

Webex App

agentx-webex

Outdial Call

agentx-outdial

Notification Center

agentx-notification

Agent State Selector

agentx-state-selector

Example:

"advancedHeader": [
          "comp": "agentx-webex"
          "comp": "agentx-outdial"
          "comp": "agentx-notification"
          "comp": "agentx-state-selector"
          "comp": "widget-1",
          "attributes": { ... },
          "script": ....
                

The advancedHeader property value is case sensitive.

To change the default order of the icons, enter the advancedHeader property and the values in the custom layout accordingly.

The widgets flow into the dropdown menu from left to right.

If you do not enter the advancedHeader property in the custom layout, the default header is displayed.

When advanced header is enabled, you should move the widgets from the exisiting header to the advanced header as per the example.

When advanced header is enabled, old header will not be displayed.

Every widget icon has a default padding and margin that is defined through CSS and cannot be customised through desktop.

The location of the logo, title, and profile icons are fixed and cannot be customised.

To remove the header icons and the associated functionalities from the Desktop, set an empty value for the associated component in the advancedHeader property ("advancedHeader": []).

If you have added Webex App to the Auxiliary Information pane or a custom page, or as a custom widget, the agent can still access Webex App although Webex App is not available in the horizontal header of the Desktop.

If you add a widget with a long label, a truncated label name is displayed according to the space available.

You can use the attribute textContent to add a label to a widget.

Example:

"comp": "timer-widget", "attributes": { "duration": "08:00:00" }, "textContent": "Count Down Timer for Current Shift", "script": "https://wxcc-demo.s3.amazonaws.com/widgets/timer-widget.js"

The label "Count Down Timer for Current Shift" will be truncated and displayed according to the space available.

Avoid adding widgets with a long label.

When a widget flows to the drop-down, only the widget icon is clickable.

If the webexConfigured property value is set as false, the Webex App icon is not displayed on the horizontal header of the Desktop, even if the webex value is added in the advancedHeader property. For more information, see webexConfigured.

Home Page

When you sign in to the Desktop, you land on the Home Page.

Table 10. Display Matrix for appTitle and logo Based on the Desktop Layout Configuration
Condition Example appTitle If appTitle and logo are not configured No title Default logo If appTitle and logo are configured Configured text Configured logo If appTitle is configured and logo is not configured Configured text Default logo No title Configured logo If appTitle is configured and logo is not preferred Configured text No logo No title No logo If appTitle is added as an image and logo is configured Configured image Configured logo Configured image Default logo Configured image No logo

The Home Page is only applicable to Supervisors and SupervisorAgent persona.

You can view the following widgets on the Home Page. Analyzer widgets are provided by default, but the administrator can also configure Persistent and Custom widgets. For more information, see JSON Layout Top-Level Properties .

Analyzer Widgets

By default, Analyzer widget displays on the Desktop Home Page.

Home Page Layout Configuration

You can configure the Home Page of the Desktop to display layout that is based on your organization preferences and brand alignment. Edit the Homepage field to configure the home page. You can configure the following components to be displayed in the Home Page when a user signs in to the Desktop:

A Welcome message

The Task icon on the Navigation bar to navigate to the Task pane. The Task icon is displayed for the Supervisor and Supervisor & Agent role with the call monitoring feature enabled. Task pane displays incoming customer requests, active and past customer interactions, and active monitoring requests.

Filter sections such as Queue Name , Channel Type , and Managed Teams .

The following table describes the page properties that are required to configure the Home Page:

Table 11. Dynamic Home Page Layout—page Properties

Property

Description and Code

page > useFlexLayout

Flex layout is a new web component. It doesn't change the existing widgets. The new flex layout uses the same layout configuration format in a simplified way. It's backward compatible and doesn't impact existing widgets. You need to configure the JSON layout. To configure the JSON layout, provide the height and width of the widget. The widget is rendered in the same sequence as it's configured inside the JSON layout. Widgets have a default margin of 8 px.

The JSON layout is based on the dimensions (width x height) and coordinates (X, Y, and Z) of the widgets.

The flexible layout supports capabilities such as individual widget resize, maximize widgets, and so on.

The height of individual widgets is measured in pixels. 1 unit of height = 40 pixels. The width of the widget depends on the number of columns in the container and the number of columns that change based on the container width.

Widgets are displayed from the left to the right. The advanced layout engine uses custom logic to apply both horizontal and vertical space adjustment of widgets. Initially, the layout loads horizontally. After loading horizontally, the widget loads vertically and ensures that space utilization is optimal.

Configure the widgets based on the screen size. You can either increase or decrease the width of the widgets, based on the screen size. This renders the widgets more readable and usable.

Flex layout provides standard breakpoints such as large, medium, small, and extra small.

Large widgets have a resolution of 1360 px or more. For large widgets, specify the column value as 12.

Medium widgets have a resolution of 1070 px to 1360 px. For medium widgets, specify the column value as 10.

Small widgets have a resolution of 850 px to 1070 px. For small widgets, specify the column value as 6.

Extra small widgets have a resolution of 500 px. For extra small widgets, specify the column value as 4.

These pixels might vary based on the operating system and the broswer.

"page": {
          "id": "landing",
          "useFlexLayout": true,
          "widgets": {
            "comp1": {
              "comp": "div",
              "width": 4,
              "height": 4,
              "textContent": "Widget 1",
              "attributes": {
                "style": "width: max-content; margin: 80px 240px; color: white;"
            "comp2": {
              "comp": "div",
              "width": 4,
              "height": 4,
              "textContent": "Widget 2",
              "attributes": {
                "style": "width: max-content; margin: 80px 240px;color: white;"
                                    

page > comp

Ensure you provide a unique custom component.

"comp": "page-title",

The page-title component represents level 2 heading <h2> of the custom HTML element.

page > pageHeader

Ensure to specify a title string that can be static, dynamic, or both.

The page-title component represents level 2 heading <h2> in the custom HTML element.

Static string: For example, Hey, Welcome!

"comp": "page-title",
"attributes": {
    "pageTitle": "Hey, Welcome!"
                                            

Dynamic string: To fetch the value from the STORE. For example, Jane Doe.

"comp": "page-title",
"attributes": {
    "pageTitle": "$STORE.agent.agentName"
                                            

Both: The combination of static and dynamic strings. For example, Hey Jane Doe, Welcome!

"comp": "page-title",
"attributes": {
    "pageTitle": "Hey {$STORE.agent.agentName}, Welcome!"
                                            

You must enclose the dynamic part of the string within the closed curly brackets {} and prefix with the structure $.

page > pageSubHeader

Ensure to add Sub Header that displays on the Desktop. The user can add Go to Analyzer in the Sub Header.

Code block for Sub Header

"useFlexLayout": true,
          "pageSubHeader": {
            "comp": "div",
            "attributes": {
              "style": "display: flex; float:right;margin:16px 0px 16px 16px"
            "children": [
                "comp": "div",
                "children": [
                    "comp": "md-label",
                    "textContent": "$I18N.pageSubHeader.queueName",
                    "attributes": {
                      "style": "margin-bottom:8px;"
                                            

Code block for Go to Analyzer in Sub Header

"comp": "div", "children": [ "comp": "agentx-more-actions-wrapper", "properties": { "actionList": [ "comp": "agentx-wc-goto-analyzer"
Header Widgets

The header is used to display inline information, to add drop-down menus, and so on. As the header container has limited vertical space, the overall header height is only 64 pixels. For more information on the layout alignment, see the layout property section.

Example:
"header":{
   "id":"header",
   "widgets":{
      "head1":{
         "comp":"header-widget-one",
         "script":"https://my-cdn.com/dynamic-widgets/header-widget-one.js",
      "head2":{
         "comp":"header-widget-two",
         "script":"https://my-cdn.com/dynamic-widgets/header-widget-two.js",
   "layout":{
      "areas":[[ "head1", "head2" ]], 
      "size": { "cols": [1, 1], "rows": [1] } 
            

To add a tooltip for a header widget, wrap the component with md-tooltip. Enter tooltip information in the message property.

Example:

"header": {
    "id": "dw-header",
    "widgets": {
        "head1": {
            "comp": "md-tooltip",
            "attributes": {
                "message": "Netlify"
            "children": [{
                "comp": "agentx-wc-iframe",
                "attributes": {
                    "src": "https://keen-jackson-8d352f.netlify.app"
            

You must add the style attributes display and height to configure any widgets through iFrame in the customizable widget area in the header. The best fit value of the height attribute is 64 pixels.

Ensure that you add the style attributes to the existing header widgets for them to load as expected within the iFrame.

Example:

"head1": {
    "comp": "agentx-wc-iframe",
    "attributes": {
        "src": "https://widget-kad.s3.amazonaws.com/Headers/Timer/Timer.htm",
        "style": "height:64px;display:flex;"
            

We recommend that you use only a single row with multiple columns for the header because the header height is only 64 pixels. For more information on the alignment, see the layout property section.

Navigation (Custom Pages)

In this section, you can add pages that appear on the left navigation bar. You specify a navigation icon and a unique URL for the widget to appear on the navigation bar. We recommend using a specific prefix for the URL to avoid conflicts. For more details, see the nav property section.

You can also have a collection of widgets that can display on this page. The page can have a single widget that appears on the screen or a collection of widgets in a grid. For more details on grid arrangement, see the layout property section.

You do not need to add a dynamic-area wrapper to the widget tree. This means that you can drag and drop and resize widgets on custom pages when you enable this option.

Example: "nav": { "label": “Custom Page”, "icon": "stored-info", "iconType": "momentum", "navigateTo": "dynamic-tabs", "align": "top", "isDefaultLandingPage": true "page": { "id": “my - custom - page“, "useFlexLayout": true, "widgets": { comp1”: { "comp": "md-tabs", "children": [{ "comp": "md-tab", "textContent": "Shift Timer", "attributes": { "slot": "tab" "comp": "md-tab-panel", "attributes": { "slot": "panel" "children": [{ "comp": “my - custom - timer”, “source”: http: //my-cdn.com/my-custom-timer.js "wrapper": { "title": "Shift Timer", "maximizeAreaName": "app-maximize-area" "comp": "md-tab", "textContent": "Stock Market", "responsive": "false" "attributes": { "slot": "tab" "comp": "md-tab-panel", "attributes": { "slot": "panel" "children": [{ "comp": "agentx-wc-iframe", "responsive": "false" "attributes": { "src": "https://widget-kad.s3.amazonaws.com/Trading.htm" "wrapper": { "title": "Stock Market", "maximizeAreaName": "app-maximize-area" "comp": "md-tab", "textContent": "Widget3", "attributes": { "slot": "tab" "comp": "md-tab-panel", "textContent": "Three Content", "attributes": { "slot": "panel" “comp2”: { "comp": “my - google - maps - component“, “source”: "https://my-cdn.com/my-google.maps.js "wrapper": { "title": "Google Map", "maximizeAreaName": "app-maximize-area" "layout": { "areas": [ ["left", "right"] "size": { "cols": [1, 1], "rows": [1]

The following table describes nav and page properties along with their child properties:

Table 12. nav Property Details

Property

Description and Code

nav > label

This property indicates the page navigation identifier. The screen reader reads this property and it appears in the tooltip.

These parameters are necessary to display your custom page on the navigation bar.

type Navigation.Item = {
    label: string;
    iconType: "momentum" | "other";
    icon: string;
    align: "top" | "bottom";
    navigateTo: string;
    iconSize ? : number;
    isResponsive ? : boolean;
                                

The label property is the title of the custom page.

nav > iconType

This property represents the type of icon that displays in the navigation bar for the custom page.

The following types of icons are available:

Momentum: You can choose any available icons in the collection: https://momentum.design/icons. The advantage of using Momentum is that it provides a few icons with an “active” version.

Use case of an active version:

For example, if you choose a Momentum icon type announcement, you can see the default icon on the navigation bar. When you navigate to the custom page (linked to the icon), the icon changes to the announcement-active version automatically. Ensure that you verify whether it has an active version of this same icon in the icon library.

Other: You can provide a custom image URL (hosted on a CDN) that appears on the navigation bar. If you use a black or white custom icon, the icon isn't visible when you switch between light and dark modes.

nav > icon

This property represents the name of the icon in the Momentum library or the CDN URL.

type Navigation.Item ={
   icon:“announcement”;
// OR //
type Navigation.Item ={
   icon:“https://my-cdn.com
   /my-navigation-icon.png”;
                                

nav > align

This property helps you align the icon to the top or bottom of the navigation bar.

Currently, the property allows top alignment only.

nav > isDefaultLandingPage

This property specifies the default landing page for the agents in Agent Desktop. Set this property to true to make the navigation bar page the default Landing page that appears for the agents after signing in to the Agent Desktop. If more than one navigation bar page has this property set to true, the system considers the first navigation bar page to become the default Landing page.

If no navigation bar page has this property set to true, the Home page acts as the default Landing page.

 

You can't set Agent Performance Statistics reports as the default landing page.

nav > navigateTo

This property specifies the name of the custom page. This name appears in the address bar when the agent navigates.

The navigateTo must not include the following values: images, fonts, css, build_info, help, app, i18n, icons, images-mfe-wc, and sounds.

type Navigation.Item = {
    navigateTo: “my - custom - page”;
            
Table 13. page Property Details

Property

Description and Code

page > id

In page property, you specify the custom page (dynamic widget) object.

The id property represents a unique page identifier. For example, my-custom-page-1. Agent can’t see this identifier on the Desktop.

type DynamicWidgets.Page = {
    id: string;
    widgets: Record < string,
    DynamicWidget.Options > ;
    layout: Layout;
                                

page > useFlexLayout

Flex layout is a new web component. It doesn't change the existing widgets. The new flex layout uses the same layout configuration format in a simplified way. It's backward compatible and doesn't impact existing widgets. You need to configure the JSON layout. To configure the JSON layout, provide the height and width of the widget. The widget is rendered in the same sequence as it's configured inside the JSON layout. Widgets have a default margin of 8 px.

The JSON layout is based on the dimensions (width x height) and coordinates (X, Y, and Z) of the widgets.

The flexible layout supports capabilities such as individual widget resize, maximize widgets, and so on.

The height of individual widgets is measured in pixels. 1 unit of height = 40 pixels. The width of the widget depends on the number of columns in the container and the number of columns that change based on the container width.

Widgets are displayed from the left to the right. The advanced layout engine uses custom logic to apply both horizontal and vertical space adjustment of widgets. Initially, the layout loads horizontally. After loading horizontally, the widget loads vertically and ensures that space utilization is optimal.

Configure the widgets based on the screen size. You can either increase or decrease the width of the widgets, based on the screen size. This renders the widgets more readable and usable.

Flex layout provides standard breakpoints such as large, medium, small, and extra small.

Large widgets have a resolution of 1360 px or more. For large widgets, specify the column value as 12.

Medium widgets have a resolution of 1070 px to 1360 px. For medium widgets, specify the column value as 10.

Small widgets have a resolution of 850 px to 1070 px. For small widgets, specify the column value as 6.

Extra small widgets have a resolution of 500 px. For extra small widgets, specify the column value as 4.

These pixels might vary based on the operating system and the broswer.

"page": {
          "id": "landing",
          "useFlexLayout": true,
          "widgets": {
            "comp1": {
              "comp": "div",
              "width": 4,
              "height": 4,
              "textContent": "Widget 1",
              "attributes": {
                "style": "width: max-content; margin: 80px 240px; color: white;"
            "comp2": {
              "comp": "div",
              "width": 4,
              "height": 4,
              "textContent": "Widget 2",
              "attributes": {
                "style": "width: max-content; margin: 80px 240px;color: white;"
                                

page > widgets

page > comp

Helps you define your custom widgets. To place multiple widgets, specify widget options in sequence. Ensure that you give each widget a unique area name. Use it in the layout section later.

"widgets": {
    "comp1": {
    "comp2": {
                                

This property represents the name of the custom HTML element (known as a Web Component or any other element - if you want to use it as a wrapper). For more information, see Sample Use Case Examples. Enter your custom element name here without angular brackets (“<” or “>”). For example, “my-custom-element.”

Each entry under the widgets section supports the following format:

type Options = {
    comp: string;
    script ? : string;
    properties ? : Record < string,
    any > ;
    attributes ? : Record < string,
    string > ;
    children ? : Options[];
    textContent ? : string;
    style ? : Partial < CSSStyleDeclaration > ;
    wrapper ? : {
        title: string;
        maximizeAreaName: string;
                                

page > script

(Optional) This property is required only when you load the widget or component from a remote location such as a CDN.

"comp1": {
    "comp": "widget-one",
    "script": "http:/my-cdn.com /
        dynamic - widgets / widget - one.js ",
                                    

Don’t change the script URL for the same component. If you need to change the script URL for the same component, do one of the following:

Notify the agent to clear the browser cache and reload the Agent Desktop.

Retain the existing URL. Dynamically import the new bundle URL using the javascript hosted in the existing URL.

Example:

(function() {
          var script = document.createElement("script");
              script.src = <Your JS Script URL>
              script.type = "text/javascript";
              script.async = true;
              document.getElementsByTagName ("head").item(0).appendchild(script);
            } ) ()

page > properties

You can specify properties that you must pass for the Web component.

"properties": {
    "user": "admin",
                                

page > responsive

Determines whether a web component or an iFrame based widget that is added in the custom layout at the page level or the comp level is responsive. Responsive web components make your web page visually appealing on all devices and are easy to use. You must use responsive iFrame widgets.

Configure this property with one of the following values:

True: Enables responsiveness of the widget. By default, all widgets are responsive based on the progressive screen sizes, orientation, and viewing areas of the device in use.

False: Disables responsiveness of the widget. If the widgets do not support viewing on different devices, mark them as nonresponsive.

"comp": "md-tab", "responsive": true, "attributes": { "slot": "tab", "class": "widget-pane-tab" "children": [{ "comp": "slot", "attributes": { "name": "SCREEN_POP_TAB" "visibility": "SCREEN_POP" "comp": "md-tab-panel", "responsive": false, "attributes": { "slot": "panel", "class": "widget-pane" "children": [{ "comp": "slot", "attributes": { "name": "CALL_GUIDE" "visibility": "CALL_GUIDE"

Nonresponsive widgets cannot ensure the best user experience and are not displayed in the smaller view. The agent must increase the size of the browser window to view any widgets that are configured as nonresponsive.

page > attributes

You can specify the Web component attributes in this section.

"attributes": {
         "disabled": "false",
                                

page > visibility

Specifies whether the Cisco-offered widgets added in the custom layout at the page level or the comp level are visible or not.

Cisco-offered widgets are Contact History, Cisco Webex Experience Management, IVR Transcript, Preview Campaign Call Guide, and Screen Pop.

The visibility property values are built in and defined in the default JSON file of the Desktop Layout. The administrator cannot modify the visibility property values of the Cisco-offered widgets.

The visibility property value NOT_RESPONSIVE is deprecated. You can continue to use it only for backward compatibility. Any value set as NOT_RESPONSIVE previously doesn't require modification, as the functionality remains the same.

To set a newly created widget as responsive or not responsive, you must use the responsive property. For more information, see responsive property.

page > children

This property is the core part of the layout. In the children section, you can nest as many levels as required if the Web Component-based widget allows you to pass children. To make that possible, the developer must programmatically handle the slotted content. For more information, see Cisco Webex Contact Center Desktop Developer Guide.

To know about passing STORE values as properties, see Share Data from Desktop to Widgets.

"children": [{
        "comp": "div",
        "textContent": "Test"
        "comp": "div",
        "textContent": “Test”
        "comp": "div",
        "textContent": "Test"
        "comp": "div",
        "textContent": "Test"
        "comp": "div",
        "children": [{
                "comp": "div",
                "textContent": “Test”
                "comp": "div",
                "textContent": "Test"
                "comp": "div",
                "textContent": "Test"
                                

The advantage of the “children” array section is that you can use existing Web Components in your layout specification, which is already part of the Desktop bundle. A few of the Desktop bundle Web Components include:

agentx-wc-iframe: A widget that allows you to place any web page into an iFrame as a widget.

dynamic-area: A component that allows you to enable the drag-and-drop feature for Agents in a place other than custom pages. The custom pages can also have this capability if you enable drag-and-drop by default.

Any component in the momentum-ui-web-component library. For more information, see GitHub. For example:

md-tabs: Tabs container wrapper

md-tab: Single tab header

md-tab-panel: Single tab content

For more information on the attributes for the persistent tab, see Attributes for Persistent Tabs.

page > textContent

Helps you to add your text content.

"textContent": "My Text Content",

page > style

Helps you to assign a particular CSS style to your component.

"style": {
    "backgroundColor": "#CBD",
    "overflow": "scroll"
                                

page > wrapper

Widget wrapper allows you to add a toolbar on top of your widget. The toolbar can contain a title and the (Maximize) icon on top of the widget. When the widget has occupied a small space on the page, the maximize icon allows the agent to see the widget in full workspace.

Ensure that you use the default value as "app-maximize-area". Currently, only the default value is available.

"wrapper": {
    "title": My Widget Title ",
    "maximizeAreaName": "app-maximize-area"
                                

page > wrapper> id

(Optional) The web component widget wrapper allows you to update the dynamic widget title using a unique identifier. Enter the widget wrapper id property value as unique-id-to-update-title.

"wrapper": {
    "title": My Widget Title ",
    "id": "unique-id-to-update-title",
    "maximizeAreaName": "app-maximize-area"
                                    

Ensure that you use the same unique identifier for the JavaScript CustomEvent. For more information, see the Asynchronous Events section in the Agent Contact Module chapter of the Cisco Webex Contact Center Desktop Developer.

To update the iFrame-based widget title, use the iFrame content from the same domain. The following is a sample example:

script type = "text/javascript" > var title = ""; window.addEventListener("update-title-event", function(e) { title = e.detail.title; document.querySelector('#customEvent').onclick = function() { const e = new CustomEvent("update-title-event", { bubbles: true, detail: { title: "new title" window.parent.dispatchEvent(e); /script> < button id = "customEvent" > New Title < /button> < iframe src = "https://blog.logrocket.com/the-ultimate-guide-to-iframes/" > < /iframe>

page > agentx-wc-iframe

Allows you to embed a web page in an iFrame that appears as a widget on the Desktop. You can use the iFrame widget called “agentx-wc-iframe”.

"comp1": {
    "comp": "agentx-wc-iframe",
    "attributes": {
        "src": "https://blog.logrocket.com /
            the - ultimate - guide - to - iframes / "
    "wrapper": {
        "title": "AgentX iFrame",
        "maximizeAreaName": "app-maximize-area"
                                

page > layout

Allows you to arrange the widgets on a page.

The following format represents a grid layout:

type Layout = {
    areas: string[][];
    size: {
        rows: number[];
        cols: number[];
};

Here you can define the grid with the area names that you defined in the widgets section.

The following example shows how the layout of three rows and three columns is specified:

"layout": {
    "areas": [
            "comp1",
            "comp1",
            "comp3"
            "comp2",
            "comp2",
            "comp3"
            "comp4",
            "comp4",
            "comp4"
    "size": {
        "cols": [1, 1, 1],
        "rows": [1, 1, 1]
}
Equal Distribution of a 3x3 Layout

In the size section, numbers represent the fraction of space that a widget can occupy, relative to the other widgets. All three columns occupy equal 1 fraction of space. With 100% as available width, each widget occupies 33.33% of horizontal space.

With Equal Column Width

Another use case example, if you set as "cols": [1, 2, 2], it means that overall space is divided by 5 (1+2+2) and the first widget occupies 20% of horizontal space. The second and third widgets take 40% each. For more information, see Basic Concepts of Grid Layout.

After Changing the Column Width

page > ROOT

Nesting of layouts is called a sublayout. In case you have nested layouts in your layout configuration, you must have a single "ROOT" object as a parent for sublayouts. Otherwise, your layout configuration can be flat if no nesting is required.

This sublayout provides more control over the layout resize behavior. The page layout property must be of type Record<string, Layout>. The layout property allows you to arrange the widgets on a page.

"id": "some-id", "widgets": { "c1": { "comp": "div", "textContent": "c1" "c2": { "comp": "div", "textContent": "c2" "c3": { "comp": "div", "textContent": "c3" "c4": { "comp": "div", "textContent": "c4" "c5": { "comp": "div", "textContent": "c5" "layout": { "ROOT": { "areas": [ ["c1", "sub1"], ["c2", "sub2"], "size": { "cols": [1, 1], "rows": [1, 1] "sub1": { "areas": [ ["c3", "c4"] "size": { "cols": [1, 1], "rows": [1] "sub2": { "areas": [ ["c1"], ["c5"] "size": { "cols": [1], "rows": [1, 1]

This setup creates a grid in the ROOT layout with two subgrids that you can resize independently.

Sub-layout Appearance

Resizing a component affects the components within that sublayout.

After Resizing both Sub-layouts

Be aware of the following cases:

Infinite loop: If you include ROOT layout as a sublayout of ROOT, it causes a "call stack exceeded" error and runs into an infinite loop.

"layout": { "ROOT": { "areas": [ ["c1", "c2"], ["c3", "ROOT"], "size": { "cols": [1, 1], "rows": [1, 1]
Sub-layout With Infinite Loop

Same Sub-Layout (N) times: If you include the sublayout into your grid more than once with the same name, and if you resize one of them, all the sublayouts get resized automatically.

If this is not the desired behavior, rename each of the sublayouts with a unique name.

"layout": { "ROOT": { "areas": [ ["c1", "sub1"], ["c2", "sub1"], "size": { "cols": [1, 1], "rows": [1, 1] "sub1": { "areas": [ ["c3", "c4"] "size": { "cols": [1, 1], "rows": [1]
Sub-layout with N times
Attributes for Persistent Tabs

To set the tabs in the custom pages and custom widgets as persistent, enter the attributes for md-tabs in the custom layout.

Example: Set Tabs as Persistent

"comp": "md-tabs", "attributes": { "persist-selection": true, "tabs-id": "unique-id for all the tabs together in the container"

Property

Description

persist-selection

To set md-tabs to be persistent. The default value is true.

tabs-id

Unique identification for all the tabs together in the container.

When you set md-tabs to be persistent (persist-selection: true), Agent Desktop retains the tab selection even if an agent switches between pages or widgets in the Desktop.

The persist-selection property is not applicable for the tabs in the Auxiliary Information pane and Agent Performance Statistics reports page, because the persistent tab behavior is already set in the Desktop.

The tab selection is reset to the default tab when you sign out of the Desktop, reload/refresh the browser, or clear the browser cache.

Persistent Widgets Configuration

You can configure any custom widget to be persistent. Persistent widgets display on all pages of the Desktop. Persistent widgets display as a new tab in the Auxiliary Information pane only when you have an active contact request or conversation. For example, Sample Persistent widget.

Persistent widgets do not display on the Home page in the way they display on the other pages. However, if you have an active interaction, the persistent widgets display in the Home page as part of the Auxiliary Information pane. For example, when you have answered a call, the Interaction Control pane displays, and the Sample Persistent widget displays as part of the Auxiliary Information pane.

Example:

"area": {
    "persistent": [{
            "comp": "md-tab",
            "attributes": {
                "slot": "tab"
            "children": [{
                    "comp": "md-icon",
                    "attributes": {
                        "name": "emoticons_16"
                    "comp": "span",
                    "textContent": "Custom Page Widget"
            "comp": "md-tab-panel",
            "attributes": {
                "slot": "panel"
            "children": [{
                "comp": "dynamic-area",
                "properties": {
                    "area": {
                        "id": "dw-panel-two",
                        "widgets": {
                            "comp1": {
                                "comp": "agentx-wc-iframe",
                                "attributes": {
                                    "src": "https://blog.logrocket.com/the-ultimate-guide-to-iframes/"
                                "wrapper": {
                                    "title": "AgentX iFrame",
                                    "maximizeAreaName": "app-maximize-area"
                            "comp2": {
                                "comp": "uuip-widget-two",
                                "script": "./dynamic-widgets/widget-two.js",
                                "attributes": {
                                    "title": "WIDGET 2 content"
                                "wrapper": {
                                    "title": "Widget 2 title",
                                    "maximizeAreaName": "app-maximize-area"
                        "layout": {
                            "areas": [
                                ["comp1", "comp2"]
                            "size": {
                                "cols": [1, 1],
                                "rows": [1]
            

When you customize a widget, you can choose either one of the options:

Host an application on a web page that can be embedded within an iframe.

Build a custom widget.

The technical widget requirements are described in the Desktop Widget Development Documentation. As a layout editor, ensure that you have these details:

What is the name of the custom HTML element (known as Web Component)?

What is the URL to the content delivery network (CDN) source that hosts the JavaScript bundle?

Auxiliary Information Pane

The Auxiliary Information pane of the Desktop displays the tabs which include the Cisco-offered (default) widgets and custom widgets. The following Cisco-offered widgets appear in the predefined tabs:

Contact History

IVR Transcript

Customer Experience Journey

Screen Pop

You can use the Auxiliary Information pane to:

Add tabs

Change the tab order

Remove predefined tabs

Mark the custom tabs as draggable

Add tooltips to the custom tabs

Add the Reset Tab Order option

Example:
"panel": {
    "comp": "md-tabs",
    "attributes": {
        "class": "widget-tabs"
    "children": [{
            "comp": "md-tab",
            "attributes": {
                "slot": "tab",
                "class": "widget-pane-tab"
            "children": [{
                "comp": "slot",
                "attributes": {
                    "name": "CONTACT_HISTORY_TAB"
            "comp": "md-tab-panel",
            "attributes": {
                "slot": "panel",
                "class": "widget-pane"
            "children": [{
                "comp": "slot",
                "attributes": {
                    "name": "CONTACT_HISTORY"
            "comp": "md-tab",
            "attributes": {
                "slot": "tab",
                "class": "widget-pane-tab"
            "children": [{
                    "comp": "md-icon",
                    "attributes": {
                        "name": "pop-out_16"
                    "comp": "span",
                    "textContent": "Screen Pop"
            "visibility": "SCREEN_POP"
            "comp": "md-tab-panel",
            "attributes": {
                "slot": "panel",
                "class": "widget-pane"
            "children": [{
                "comp": "#SCREEN_POP"
            "comp": "md-tab",
            "attributes": {
                "slot": "tab"
            "children": [{
                    "comp": "md-icon",
                    "attributes": {
                        "name": "emoticons_16"
                    "comp": "span",
                    "textContent": "Custom Widget"
            "comp": "md-tab-panel",
            "attributes": {
                "slot": "panel"
            "children": [{
                "comp": "dynamic-area",
                "properties": {
                    "area": {
                        "id": "dw-panel-two",
                        "widgets": {
                            "comp1": {
                                "comp": "agentx-wc-iframe",
                                "attributes": {
                                    "src": "https://blog.logrocket.com/the-ultimate-guide-to-iframes/"
                                "wrapper": {
                                    "title": "AgentX iFrame",
                                    "maximizeAreaName": "app-maximize-area"
                            "comp2": {
                                "comp": "widget-one",
                                "script": "https://my-cdn.com/dynamic-widgets/widget-one.js",
                                "wrapper": {
                                    "title": "Widget title",
                                    "maximizeAreaName": "app-maximize-area"
                        "layout": {
                            "areas": [
                                ["comp1"],
                                ["comp2"]
                            "size": {
                                "cols": [1],
                                "rows": [1, 1]
            

You can configure the Customer Experience Journey widget after you enable the Customer Experience Management Metrics on the Management Portal.

In the Auxiliary Information pane, add new tabs to place your custom widgets. No special rules apply here and the component nesting is as expected and described in the children section. For more information, see the Children property of the page.

The following are the specific examples to customize your tab headers:

Example to Place Icons and Labels in the Children Property "comp": "md-tab", "attributes": { "slot": "tab", "class": "widget-pane-tab" "children": [{ "comp": "md-icon", "attributes": { "name": "transcript_16" "comp": "span", "textContent": “My Widget Tab” Example to Place Image (with CSS) and Labels in the Children Property "comp": "md-tab", "attributes": { "slot": "tab" "children": [{ "comp": "span", "attributes": { "style": "align-items: center; display: flex;" "children": [{ "comp": "img", "attributes": { "src": “http: //my-cdn.com/icon.svg”, "width": 16, "height": 16, "style": "margin-right: 0.5rem;" "comp": "span", "textContent": “My Widget Tab”

The More Tabs drop-down list appears automatically when the Auxiliary Information pane contains multiple tabs.

You must add a custom tab tooltip for readability and accessibility. To add a tooltip for a custom tab, wrap the component with md-tooltip. Enter the tooltip information in the message property and apply the style property values as shown in the following example.

"comp": "md-tooltip",
"attributes": {
    "class": "widget-tabs",
    "message": "Sample Tab 1",
    "style": "max-width: 252px; min-width: 110px; overflow: hidden; text-overflow: ellipsis; white-space: nowrap; display: inline-block; margin-bottom: -10px;"
                

For a custom tab, we recommend a maximum width of 252 pixels and a minimum width of 110 pixels.

To enable the drag-and-drop feature within the custom tab, add the following property within the attributes:

"comp": "md-tabs",
"attributes": {
    "class": "widget-tabs",
    "draggable": true,
    "comp-unique-id": "sample-dynamic-custom-tabs"
                    

draggable: Set the draggable property value to true.

comp-unique-id: Enter a unique value to identify the component.

Example:

"comp-unique-id": "sample-dynamic-custom-tabs"
              

If you enable drag-and-drop for a custom tab, the agent can drag and drop the tab to the required position within the Auxiliary Information pane. To reset the tabs to the default tab order, add the following property:

"comp": "agentx-wc-more-actions-widget",
"attributes": {
    "slot": "settings",
    "class": "widget-pane",
    "tabs-unique-id": "sample-dynamic-custom-tabs"
                    

agentx-wc-more-actions-widget: Enter the component that is displayed as the More Actions () icon in the Auxiliary Information pane.

slot="settings": Enter an attribute within the component that is displayed as the Reset Tab Order option in the More Actions drop-down list. Agents can reset the tabs in the Auxiliary Information pane to the default order by clicking the > Reset Tab Order.

tabs-unique-id: Enter the same unique value defined for the comp-unique-id property to map and reset the md-tabs components.

The following sample code uses the More Actions and Reset Tab Order functions.

"comp": "agentx-wc-more-actions-widget",
"attributes": {
    "slot": "settings",
    "class": "widget-pane",
    "tabs-unique-id": "sample-dynamic-custom-tabs"
"children": [{
    "comp": "div",
    "attributes": {
        "textContent": "custom action",
        "slot": "custom-action"
    "children": [{
            "comp": "agentx-wc-notes-header-widget"
            "comp": "agentx-wc-menu-notification"
                

By default, the tooltip, ellipsis icon, and tab order reset for predefined tabs are defined.

The More Actions drop-down list can be extended to add additional custom components or widgets after the Reset Tab Order option. The following is a sample set of style property values that can be applied to additional components.

"comp": "md-tooltip",
"attributes": {
    "class": "widget-tabs",
    "message": "Sample Element",
    "style": "max-width: 252px; min-width: 110px; overflow: hidden; text-overflow: ellipsis; white-space: nowrap; display: inline-block; margin-bottom: -10px;"
                

The drag-and-drop feature is not supported for the additional custom components or widgets that are added to the More Actions drop-down list.

Headless Widgets

In the headless section, you can add widgets that are hidden and do not appear on the Agent Desktop. These widgets are used to execute logic in the background. This section is useful to trigger events that occur on the Desktop and execute widget-specific logic. For example, opening a custom CRM Screen Pop for an SMS on its arrival.

Example:
"headless":{
   "id":"headless",
   "widgets":{
      "comp1":{
         "comp":"headless-widget-one",
         "script":"https://my-cdn.com/dynamic-widgets/headless-widget-one.js",
      "comp2":{
         "comp":"headless-widget-two",
         "script":"https://my-cdn.com/dynamic-widgets/headless-widget-two.js",
   "layout":{
      "areas":[[ "comp1", comp2" ]], 
      "size": { "cols": [1, 1], "rows": [1] } 
          
Share Data from Desktop to Widgets

To receive real-time data through properties or attributes inside a custom widget, assign appropriate STORE values in the layout JSON configuration.

In addition, to access the data through JavaScript SDK subscribers, you can also pass the data through properties or attributes. If your component is built to react to property or attribute changes, you get real-time data updates from Agent Desktop, which is called a data provider.

Currently, we have a single data provider under a key STORE. For more information, see the Data Provider—Widget Properties and Attributes section in the Cisco Webex Contact Center Desktop Developer Guide.

Preview Campaign Call

The administrator creates campaigns, configures the dialing mode (preview), and assigns the campaigns to teams. If an agent is part of a team to which campaigns are assigned, then the agent can make an outbound preview campaign call. For more information, see the Cisco Webex Contact Center Campaign Manager User Guide.

The administrator configures the following in the custom layout to enable preview campaign contact for an agent.

Campaign Contact

Call Guide

Campaign Contact

The administrator adds the Campaign Contact widget in the header container of the custom layout. The campaign contact displays the customer's contact information based on the defined properties. For more information on the layout alignment, see the layout property section.

Example:
"header":{
   "id":"dw-header",
   "widgets":{
      "acqueon-component":{
         "comp": "agentx-preview-campaign",
         "properties":{
            "isCampaignManagementEnabled": "$STORE.agent.isCampaignManagementEnabled",
            "agentDbId": "$STORE.agent.acqueonAgentId",
            "lcmUrl": "$STORE.agent.lcmUrl",
            "isCallInProgress": "$STORE.agentContact.isActiveCall",
            "outdialEntryPointId": "$STORE.agent.outDialEp",
            "teamId": "$STORE.agent.getAcqueonTeamId",
            "campaignManagerAdditionalInfo": "$STORE.agent.campaignManagerAdditionalInfo",
            "orgId": "$STORE.agent.orgId",
            "dialerProxyHost": "$STORE.envVaribles.serviceUrls.dialerProxyHost",
            "isProgressiveCampaignEnabled": "$STORE.app.featureFlags.isProgressiveCampaignEnabled"
   "layout":{
      "areas":[
            "acqueon-component"
      "size":{
          "cols":[1], "rows":[1]
              Call Guide 
            

The Call Guide widget displays in the Auxiliary Information pane on the Desktop. The call guide displays the questions and answers at the campaign level. The agent is prompted to read through the set of questions in the call guide and submit the responses.

Example:
"panel":{
   "comp":"md-tabs",
   "attributes":{
      "class":"widget-tabs"
   "children":[
         "comp":"md-tab",
         "attributes":{
            "slot":"tab",
            "class":"widget-pane-tab"
         "children":[
               "comp":"md-icon",
               "attributes":{ "name":"icon-note_16"
               "comp":"span", "textContent":"Call Guide"
         "visibility":"CALL_GUIDE"
         "comp":"md-tab-panel",
         "attributes":{
            "slot":"panel", "class":"widget-pane"
         "children":[
               "comp": "acqueon-call-guide",
               "script": "http://localhost:5555//index.js", // include CDN link here
               "wrapper":{
                  "title":"Call Guide", "maximizeAreaName":"app-maximize-area"
               "properties":{
                  "lcmKey":"$STORE.agentContact.getCallGuideProps.LCMKey",
                  "agentDbId":"$STORE.agent.acqueonAgentId",
                  "lcmUrl":"$STORE.agent.lcmUrl",
                  "campaignManagerAdditionalInfo":"$STORE.agent.campaignManagerAdditionalInfo"
                  "orgId": "$STORE.agent.orgId",
                  "dialerProxyHost": "$STORE.envVaribles.serviceUrls.dialerProxyHost",
                  "isProgressiveCampaignEnabled": "$STORE.app.featureFlags.isProgressiveCampaignEnabled"
         "visibility":"CALL_GUIDE"
               

The following comp property references have changed. agentx in the property value is replaced with acqueon:

agentx-preview-campaign is renamed to acqueon-preview-campaign

agentx-call-guide is renamed to acqueon-call-guide

You must host List and Campaign Manager (LCM) on a CDN and then specify the URL in the script property.

Screen Pop

In the Desktop Layout, you can configure Screen Pop in one of the following ways:

As a custom page

As one of the widgets in the custom page

As a tab in the Auxiliary Information pane

The Screen Pop is displayed on the Desktop based on the following factors:

For the Voice channel:

The configuration defined in the Desktop Layout

The Screen Pop activity defined in the Flow Designer

For the New Digital Channels:

The configuration defined in the Desktop Layout

The Screen Pop node defined in the Connect Flow Builder

For more information on configuring Screen Pop, see Screen Pop.

Configuring Screen Pop in the Navigation Bar

You can configure Screen Pop as a custom page, or as one of the widgets in a custom page. To access the Screen Pop custom page, click the Screen Pop icon on the Navigation bar. To access the Screen Pop widget in the custom page, click the custom icon on the Navigation bar. For more information on nav properties, see Navigation (Custom Pages).

Example: Screen Pop as a Custom Page

"nav": { "label": "Screen Pop", "icon": "pop-out", "iconType": "momentum", "navigateTo": "/screenpop", "align": "top" "page": { "id": "agentx-wc-screen-pop", "widgets": { "comp1": { "comp": "agentx-wc-screen-pop", "properties": { "screenPopUrl": "$STORE.session.screenpop.screenPopSelector" "layout": { "areas": [ ["comp1"] "size": { "cols": [1], "rows": [1] "visibility": "SCREEN_POP"

Example: Screen Pop as a Widget in the Custom Page

"comp1": {
    "comp": "agentx-wc-screen-pop",
    "properties": {
        "screenPopUrl": "$STORE.session.screenpop.screenPopSelector"
                

If the Screen Pop is not configured in the Flow Designer, the custom page appears blank. For more information on configuring Screen Pop in the Flow Designer, see Screen Pop.

Configuring Screen Pop in the Auxiliary Information Pane

You can configure Screen Pop to appear as a tab in the Auxiliary Information pane.

By default, Screen Pop appears as a new sub tab in the Screen Pop tab of the Auxiliary Information pane if Screen Pop is configured to be displayed as Inside Desktop in the Flow Designer.

Add the following attribute in the panel section to include Screen Pop as a tab in the Auxiliary Information pane. For more information on panel details, see Auxiliary Information Pane.

Example: Screen Pop as a tab in the Auxiliary Information Pane

"comp":"md-tab", "attributes":{ "slot":"tab", "class":"widget-pane-tab" "children":[ { "comp": "md-icon", "attributes": { "name": "pop-out_16" }}, { "comp": "span", "textContent": "Screen Pop" }], "visibility": "SCREEN_POP" "comp": "md-tab-panel", "attributes": { "slot": "panel", "class": "widget-pane" }, "children": [{ "comp": "#SCREEN_POP"

The Screen Pop display option defined in the Flow Designer takes precedence over the configuration defined in the Desktop Layout.

For example, consider you have configured the following Screen Pop settings:

Flow Designer—Display settings as In the new browser tab

Desktop Layout—As a tab in the Auxiliary Information pane

When the event for which screen pop is configured occurs, the Screen Pop is displayed outside the Desktop - that is, in a new browser tab.

Sample Use Case Examples
The following sections provide a few examples for your reference:
  • Configure and Access Customer Experience Management Metrics Widget From the Navigation Bar

    Using Tabs on the Custom Page

    Default Auxiliary Information Pane with Contact History, and Screen Pop

    Auxiliary Information Pane with Customer Experience Journey Widget

    Configure and Access Customer Experience Management Metrics Widget From the Navigation Bar

    Example:

    "nav": { "label": "Customer Experience Management Metrics", "icon": "/app/images/wxm.bcd45cc3.svg", "iconType": "other", "navigateTo": "wxm-metrics", "align": "top" "page": { "id": "wxm-metrics", "widgets": { "comp1": { "comp": "agentx-wc-cloudcherry-widget", "attributes": { "metrics": true "properties": { "userModel": "$STORE.app.userModel", "spaceId": "", "metricsId": "", "teamId": "$STORE.agent.teamName", "ani": "$STORE.agentContact.taskSelected.ani", "isDarkMode": "$STORE.app.darkMode" "wrapper": { "title": "Customer Experience Journey", "maximizeAreaName": "app-maximize-area" "layout": { "areas": [ ["comp1"] "size": { "cols": [1], "rows": [1]

    To get the spaceId and metricsId, see the Webex Experience Management documentation.

    Using Tabs on the Custom Page

    Example:

    "nav": { "label": "Dynamic Tabs", "icon": "stored-info", "iconType": "momentum", "navigateTo": "dynamic-tabs", "align": "top" "page": { "id": "page-id-tabs", "widgets": { "comp1": { "comp": "md-tabs", "children": [{ "comp": "md-tab", "textContent": "One", "attributes": { "slot": "tab" "comp": "md-tab-panel", "attributes": { "slot": "panel" "children": [{ "comp": "widget-two", "script": "http:/my-cdn.com/dynamic-widgets/widget-two.js" "comp": "md-tab", "textContent": "Two", "attributes": { "slot": "tab" "comp": "md-tab-panel", "textContent": "Two Content", "attributes": { "slot": "panel" "comp2": { "comp": "widget-two", "script": " http:/my-cdn.com/dynamic-widgets/widget-two.js" "layout": { "areas": [ ["comp1", "comp2"] "size": { "cols": [1, 1], "rows": [1]

    Default Auxiliary Information Pane with Contact History and Screen Pop

    Example:

    "panel": {
        "comp": "md-tabs",
        "attributes": {
            "class": "widget-tabs"
        "children": [{
                "comp": "md-tab",
                "attributes": {
                    "slot": "tab",
                    "class": "widget-pane-tab"
                "children": [{
                    "comp": "slot",
                    "attributes": {
                        "name": "CONTACT_HISTORY_TAB"
                "comp": "md-tab-panel",
                "attributes": {
                    "slot": "panel",
                    "class": "widget-pane"
                "children": [{
                    "comp": "slot",
                    "attributes": {
                        "name": "CONTACT_HISTORY"
        "comp": "md-tab",
        "attributes": {
            "slot": "tab",
            "class": "widget-pane-tab"
            "comp": "md-tab",
            "attributes": {
                "slot": "tab",
                "class": "widget-pane-tab"
            "children": [{
                "comp": "slot",
                "attributes": {
                    "name": "SCREEN_POP_TAB"
            "visibility": "SCREEN_POP"
            "comp": "md-tab-panel",
            "attributes": {
                "slot": "panel",
                "class": "widget-pane"
            "children": [{
                "comp": "slot",
                "attributes": {
                    "name": "SCREEN_POP"
            "visibility": "SCREEN_POP"
                    

    Auxiliary Information Pane with Customer Experience Journey Widget

    Example:

    "panel": {
        "comp": "md-tabs",
        "attributes": {
            "class": "widget-tabs"
        "children": [{
                    "comp": "md-tab",
                    "attributes": {
                        "slot": "tab"
                    "children": [{
                        "comp": "slot",
                        "attributes": {
                            "name": "WXM_JOURNEY_TAB"
                    "visibility": "WXM_JOURNEY"
                    "comp": "md-tab-panel",
                    "attributes": {
                        "slot": "panel",
                        "class": "widget-pane"
                    "children": [{
                        "comp": "agentx-wc-cloudcherry-widget",
                        "properties": {
                            "userModel": "$STORE.app.userModel",
                            "spaceId": "",
                            "metricsId": "",
                            "teamId": "$STORE.agent.teamName",
                            "ani": "$STORE.agentContact.taskSelected.ani",
                            "isDarkMode": "$STORE.app.darkMode"
                        "wrapper": {
                            "title": "Customer Experience Journey",
                            "maximizeAreaName": "app-maximize-area"
                        "comp": "md-tab",
                        "attributes": {
                            "slot": "tab",
                            "class": "widget-pane-tab"
                        "children": {
                            "comp": "md-tab",
                            "attributes": {
                                "slot": "tab",
                                "class": "widget-pane-tab"
                            "children": [{
                                "comp": "slot",
                                "attributes": {
                                    "name": "CONTACT_HISTORY_TAB"
                            "comp": "md-tab-panel",
                            "attributes": {
                                "slot": "panel",
                                "class": "widget-pane"
                            "children": [{
                                "comp": "slot",
                                "attributes": {
                                    "name": "CONTACT_HISTORY"
                            "comp": "md-tab",
                            "attributes": {
                                "slot": "tab",
                                "class": "widget-pane-tab"
                            "children": [{
                                "comp": "slot",
                                "attributes": {
                                    "name": "SCREEN_POP_TAB"
                            "visibility": "SCREEN_POP"
                            "comp": "md-tab-panel",
                            "attributes": {
                                "slot": "panel",
                                "class": "widget-pane"
                            "children": [{
                                "comp": "slot",
                                "attributes": {
                                    "name": "SCREEN_POP"
                            "visibility": "SCREEN_POP"
                        "visibility": "SCREEN_POP"
              
Keyboard Shortcuts

Keyboard shortcuts define an alternative way to perform a specific action on the desktop. For more information on the system-defined keyboard shortcuts, see the Access Keyboard Shortcuts section in the Introduction chapter of the Cisco Webex Contact Center Agent Desktop User Guide.

The order of the shortcut key number in the Agent Desktop navigation bar is based on the order in which the related widget or custom page is configured in the Desktop Layout. For example, if the Cisco Webex Experience Management icon is the third item in your navigation bar, the Ctrl + Alt + 3 opens the Cisco Webex Experience Management page.

The developer can register the keyboard shortcuts for custom widgets using the Shortcut Key module. For more information, see Cisco Webex Contact Center Desktop Developer Guide.

Keyboard Shortcut Conflicts

Keyboard shortcut conflicts occur if multiple widgets use the same keyboard shortcut. This causes the keyboard shortcut to be disabled until the conflict is resolved.

Keyboard shortcut conflicts can occur in the following scenarios:

Scenario

Resolution

Conflicts can occur when two widgets (custom widget or Cisco-provided desktop widget) have the same keyboard shortcut, and both are on the same page.

Move one of the widgets (custom widget) to another page. The resolution is applicable for all non-page-level widgets.

Conflicts can occur when the keyboard shortcut is the same for a custom widget and a page-level widget.

This conflict cannot be resolved by the Agent Desktop administrator.

When there are multiple instances of the same widget with the same keyboard shortcut, the system ignores the duplicate key registration for the widget. When the keyboard shortcut is used, all instances of the widget are triggered.

The administrator cannot create new keyboard shortcuts or modify the existing (out-of-the-box) keyboard shortcuts.

Any conflict of the Agent Desktop keyboard shortcuts with the browser or operating system keyboard shortcuts cannot be resolved. The behavior depends on the browser or the operating system. When the conflicting keyboard shortcut is used, both the Agent Desktop functionality and the browser or operating system functionality might be executed.

Localization
The Desktop UI supports localization in 29 languages.

The following are the supported languages:

Bulgarian, Catalan, Chinese (China), Chinese (Taiwan), Croatian, Czech, Danish, Dutch, English (UK), English (US), Finnish, French, German, Hungarian, Italian, Japanese, Korean, Norwegian, Polish, Portuguese (Brazil), Portuguese (Portugal), Romanian, Russian, Serbian, Slovak, Slovenian, Spanish, Swedish, and Turkish.

The Desktop UI language is based on the language preference settings on your browser. For example, let us consider that you have selected the preferred language as French on the Firefox browser. When you launch the Desktop in the Firefox browser, the Desktop UI appears in Français (French). However, the horizontal header, navigation bar, and other components added in the Desktop Layout are not localized based on the language preference settings on your browser.

Localize Desktop Components

To localize desktop components,

Use the existing localization keys set in the app.json file. If the localization keys are not set, the default language English (US) is used. You can submit a service request to Cisco Support to add a localization key to the app.json file.

Example: Localization Key

"common": { "buttonTitle": "Stop Timer"

Enter the following case-sensitive property in the Desktop Layout JSON file to localize a component:

"textContent": "$I18N.<key>",
                    

where <key> refers to the corresponding localization key in the app.json file.

Example: Localize Header Component

"header": {
    "id": "header",
    "widgets": {
        "head1": {
            "comp": "md-button",
            "attributes": {
                "slot": "menu-trigger",
                "style": "height: 64px"
            "children": [{
                    "comp": "span",
                    "textContent": "$I18N.common.buttonTitle",
            

Example: Localize Tab Component in the Auxiliary Information Pane

"panel": {
    "comp": "md-tab",
    "attributes": {
        "slot": "tab"
    "children": [{
        "comp": "span",
        "textContent": "$I18N.panelTwo.screenPopTitle"
          

View a Desktop Layout

To view a desktop layout:
From the Management Portal navigation bar, choose Provisioning > Desktop Layout.

Select the ellipsis icon next to the Desktop Layout name that you need to view, and click View.

View the following details:

Setting

Description

Shows the name of the layout.

Description

Shows the description for the layout.

Shows the team name that is assigned to this layout.

JSON FileShows the JSON file that is used for this layout.

Edit a Desktop Layout

You can edit the Global Layout or a custom desktop layout. To edit a desktop layout:
From the Management Portal navigation bar, choose Provisioning > Desktop Layout.

Select the ellipsis icon next to the Desktop Layout that you need to edit, and click Edit.

Edit the following details:

Setting

Description

Enter a name that identifies the purpose of the layout.

Description

Enter a description.

Choose a team name from the drop-down list.

If a custom layout is already assigned to a team, then that team name doesn’t appear in this drop-down list. For more information on the Team settings, see Create a team.

If you assign a custom layout on this page, you overwrite the global layout, which is the default layout for all teams.

JSON FileClick to download the Default Desktop Layout.json file and customize the layout as described in Define a Custom Desktop Layout.

 

If you use the unmodified layout, the new layout-based features appear automatically on the Desktop. The Desktop users can view the new layout-based features when they sign in or reload the browser.

Once you've customized the file, click Upload to upload the customized JSON file.

The system validates the JSON file for errors and an appropriate message appears.

The system enables the Save button when the validation is complete.

To integrate Webex Experience Management widgets, see the Webex Experience Management documentation.

Select the ellipsis icon next to the Desktop Layout that you need to copy, and click Copy.

When you copy a desktop layout, the Team field is not copied. Ensure that you configure the Team field.

Edit the following details:

Setting

Description

Enter a name that identifies the purpose of the layout.

Description

Enter a description.

Choose a team name from the drop-down list.

If a custom layout is already assigned to a team, then that team name doesn’t appear in this drop-down list. For more information on the Team settings, see Create a team.

If you assign a custom layout on this page, you overwrite the global layout, which is the default layout for all teams.

JSON FileClick to download the Default Desktop Layout.json file and customize the layout as described in Define a Custom Desktop Layout.

 

If you use the unmodified layout, the new layout-based features appear automatically on the Desktop. The Desktop users can view the new layout-based features when they sign in or reload the browser.

Once you've customized the JSON file locally, click Upload to upload the file. The Webex Contact Center system starts to validate the JSON file.

The system validates the JSON file for errors and an appropriate message appears.

The system enables the Save button when the validation is complete.

To integrate Webex Experience Management widgets, see the Webex Experience Management documentation.

Deactivate a Desktop Layout

You cannot deactivate a desktop layout if the layout is assigned to a team. When you try to deactivate such a layout, a message informs you that you cannot deactivate the desktop layout. You can click the information icon in the message to view the list of entities that you have associated with this desktop layout.

After you deactivate a desktop layout, you can still see it in the desktop layout page as Not Active.

To deactivate a Desktop Layout:

From the Management Portal navigation bar, choose Provisioning > Desktop Layout.

Click the ellipsis icon beside the desktop layout you want to deactivate, and click Mark Inactive.

Click Yes to confirm.

The status of the desktop layout changes to Not Active.

 

Once the object is marked inactive, it can be permanently deleted. For more information, see Delete inactive objects permanently.

Activate a Desktop Layout

From the Management Portal navigation bar, choose Provisioning > Desktop Layout.

Click the ellipsis icon beside the desktop layout that you want to activate and click Restore.

Click Yes to confirm.

The status of the desktop layout changes to Active.

Skill Definitions

Skills-based routing is an optional Webex Contact Center feature that enables you to assign skill requirements, such as language fluency or product expertise, to incoming calls so they can be distributed to agents with a matching set of skills.

The Skill Definitions page provides an interface for viewing, creating, and editing the skills that can be assigned to calls and to skill profiles, which can then be assigned to teams or individual agents. For more information, see see About Skills-based Routing and Skill Profiles.

The maximum number of active skills that you can create is determined by the Maximum Skills and Maximum Text Skills values provisioned for your enterprise. For more information, see Tenant Settings.

Create a Skill Definition

On the Portal navigation bar, choose Provisioning > Skills > Skill Definition.

On the Skill Definitions page, click + New Skill Definition.

Specify the skill settings as described in this table.

Setting

Description

Enter a name for the skill.

Description

Optionally, enter a description of the skill.

Service Level Threshold

Specify how many seconds a customer call can be in queue for this skill before being flagged as outside the service level. If a call is completed within this time interval, it is considered to have been handled within service level for this skill.

If you are creating a new skill, specify the skill type:

Text: A free-form text skill that must be matched exactly. For example, you might define a skill named Extension that will let you route a call to a specific agent’s extension number based on digits entered by the caller in response to a prompt. The text value can include up to 40 characters, including spaces.

Proficiency: Can have a value ranging from 0 to 10 that represents the agent’s level of expertise in the skill. For example, you might define a skill for each language that your agents speak.

Boolean: Can have the value of True or False to indicate whether or not the agent has the skill. For example, you might define a skill named PremierService to ensure that your most valuable customers get the best service. Your most experienced agents can be assigned a value of True, and your least experienced agents can be assigned a value of False

Enum: A named set of predefined values. For example, a skill named Line of Business might have a set of three values: Sales, Service, and Billing. Each value can include up to 20 characters, including spaces.

You can't change the skill type later.

Status

Select Active or Not Active. You can't inactivate a skill, if it is used in a skill profile or a routing strategy.

Click Save.

To reset the settings in all fields, click Reset.

Edit a Skill Definition

To view and edit a skill definition:

To view and edit a skill definition:

On the Management Portal navigation bar, choose Provisioning > Skills > Skill Definition.

Click the ellipsis icon beside the skill that you want to edit and click Edit.

Edit the skill settings as described in this table.

Setting

Description

Displays the name of the skill. You can't edit the name of the skill.

Description

Optionally, enter a description of the skill.

Service Level Threshold

Specify how many seconds a customer call can be in the queue for this skill before being flagged as outside the service level. If a call is completed within this time interval, it is considered to have been handled within the service level for this skill.

Displays the skill type. You can't edit the skill type.

List Values

This field is displayed only if the skill type is enum. Specify the values that can be associated with this skill. For example, for an enum skill named Operating System, you might define three values: Windows, Linux, and Unix. Each value is limited to a maximum length of 20 characters, including spaces.

To add a value, type the value name in the List Value field and then press Enter. Repeat for each value you want to add.

To delete a value, click x on the value entry.

Status

Select Active or Not Active. You can't inactivate a skill, if it is used in a skill profile or a routing strategy.

Click Save.

Deactivate a Skill Definition

On the Management Portal navigation bar, choose Provisioning > Skills > Skill Definition.

Click the ellipsis icon besides the skill that you want to delete and click Mark Inactive.

Click Yes to confirm.

Once the object is marked inactive, it can be permanently deleted. For more information, see Delete inactive objects permanently.

On the Management Portal navigation bar, choose Provisioning > Skills > Skill Definition.

Click the ellipsis icon beside a skill with the status Not Active and click Restore.

Click Yes to confirm.

The status of the skill changes to Active.

Skill Profiles

A skill profile is a set of skills, each with an assigned value, that you assign to an agent-based team or to an individual agent. For example, you can assign a skill of English a high level of proficiency in one skill profile and a lower level in another profile.

If you assign a skill profile to a team, all agents that are logged in to that team are associated with that skill profile unless an agent is assigned a specific skill profile.

As an administrator, you can update the skill profile of agents. These changes are applied to all relevant agents without the need for these agents to sign out and sign back in to the Agent Desktop.

The number of agents who share the same skill profile is limited to 500 to ensure effective performance of the system. You can assign the skill profile to the agent directly or to a team (Choose Provisioning > Skills > Skill Profiles). When you add an agent to a team, the agent is assigned the team’s skill profile.

Create a Skill Profile

On the Management Portal navigation bar, choose Provisioning > Skills > Skill Profiles.

On the Skill Profiles page, click + New Skill Profile.

Enter the name of the skill profile and description.

Select the active skills you want to assign from the Active skills list.

Provide the appropriate skill value. For more information, see Skill definitions.

Click Save to save the skill profile.

(Optional) Click Reset to reset the values in all fields.

Edit a Skill Profile

On the Management Portal navigation bar, choose Provisioning > Skills > Skill Profiles.

Click the ellipsis icon beside the skill profile and click Edit.

Edit the name, description, and active skills.

Click Save to save the skill profile.

Copy a Skill Profile

On the Management Portal navigation bar, choose Provisioning > Skills > Skill Profiles.

Click the ellipsis icon beside a skill profile and click Copy.

Edit the necessary details.

Click Save to save the skill profile.

Delete a Skill Profile

On the Management Portal navigation bar, choose Provisioning > Skills > Skill Profiles.

Click the ellipsis icon beside the skill profile that you want to delete and choose Delete.

Click Yes to confirm.

Threshold Rules

If your enterprise uses the Threshold Alerts feature, authorized users can create threshold rules to monitor agent and call data.

Call Metrics

You can configure threshold rules for call metrics. For each rule, specify a value that triggers the alert. Configure call metrics as described in this table.

Table 14. Call Metrics

Metric

Entity Type

Trigger Value Type

Abandoned Calls

Queue

Count

Agent Metrics

You can configure threshold rules for agent metrics. For each rule, specify a value that triggers the alert. Configure agent metrics as described in this table.

Table 15. Agent Metrics

Metric

Entity Type

Trigger Value Type

Available Agents

Site or Team

Count

By default, the maximum number of threshold rules that are allowed for a tenant is 50. To increase this to a higher limit, contact Cisco Support.

Create a Threshold Rule

A threshold alert is displayed in the Agent Peformance Statistics report on the Agent Desktop if you set Agent Viewable to Yes for the threshold rule and select the threshold alert in the desktop profile. For more information, see Desktop Profiles.

From the Management Portal navigation bar, choose Provisioning > Threshold Rules.

On the Threshold Rules page:

Click + New Threshold Rule.

To delete a threshold rule, click the ellipsis button beside a listed rule and click Delete. In the confirmation dialog box, click OK.

Specify or change the settings for the rule. You can specify or change the following settings in the General Settings area:

Setting

Description

Enter a name for the rule.

Description

Enter a short description for the rule.

Entity Type

You can specify or change the following settings in the Entity Information area:

Setting

Description

Metric Type

Specify whether this is an Agent Threshold or a Call Threshold.

Entity

Choose the entry point, queue, site, or team to which the rule is applicable. This setting is not applicable if the entity type is Agent.

You can specify or change the following settings in the Threshold Information area:

Setting

Description

Threshold Metric

Choose a value from the drop-down list. The list displays only those metrics that are applicable to the selected entity type.

Operand

Choose a value from the drop-down list:

> (greater than)

>= (greater than or equal to)

< (less than)

<= (less than or equal to)

= (equal to)

Trigger Value

Specify the value that triggers a threshold alert. The value type (duration, count, or percentage) is based on the metric selected.

The trigger value must be greater than 0.

Trigger Interval

Specify the interval, in seconds, during which the system generates only one alert for the threshold rule check.

You can specify or change the following settings in the Email Information area:

Setting

Description

Notification Receivers

If you want an individual to receive an email alert in the HTML format when the threshold is triggered, enter the email address in the Notification Receivers field and press Enter. Repeat for each address that you want to add.

To remove an address, click x on the left side of the listed address.

Text Notification Receivers

If you want an individual to receive an email alert in the text format when the threshold is triggered, enter the email address in the Text Notification Receivers field and press Enter. Repeat for each address that you want to add.

To remove an address, click x on the left side of the listed address.

Click Save.

Copy a Threshold Rule

From the Management Portal navigation bar, choose Provisioning > Threshold Rules.

On the Threshold Rules page, click the ellipsis button beside a listed rule and click Copy.

Specify or change the settings for the rule. You can specify or change the following settings in the General Settings area:

Setting

Description

Enter a name for the rule.

Description

Enter a short description for the rule.

Entity Type

Choose the entity type to which the threshold rule is applicable: Entry Point, Queue, Site, Team, or Agent (if your enterprise uses the Agent Threshold Alerts feature).

You can specify or change the following settings in the Entity Information area:

Setting

Description

Metric Type

Specify whether this is an Agent Threshold or a Call Threshold.

Entity

Choose the entry point, queue, site, or team to which the rule is applicable. This setting is not applicable if the entity type is Agent.

You can specify or change the following settings in the Threshold Information area:

Setting

Description

Threshold Metric

Choose a value from the drop-down list. The list displays only those metrics that are applicable to the selected entity type.

Operand

Choose a value from the drop-down list:

> (greater than)

>= (greater than or equal to)

< (less than)

<= (less than or equal to)

= (equal to)

Trigger Value

Specify the value that triggers a threshold alert. The value type (duration, count, or percentage) is based on the metric selected.

The trigger value must be greater than 0 for all metrics.

Trigger Interval

Specify the interval, in seconds, during which the system generates only one alert for the threshold rule check.

You can specify or change the following settings in the Email Information area:

Setting

Description

Notification Receivers

If you want an individual to receive an email alert in the HTML format when the threshold is triggered, enter the email address in the Notification Receivers field and press Enter. Repeat for each address that you want to add.

To remove an address, click x on the left side of the listed address.

Text Notification Receivers

If you want an individual to receive an email alert in the text format when the threshold is triggered, enter the email address in the Text Notification Receivers field and press Enter. Repeat for each address that you want to add.

To remove an address, click x on the left side of the listed address.

Click Save.

Edit a Threshold Rule

From the Management Portal navigation bar, choose Provisioning > Threshold Rules.

On the Threshold Rules page:

To edit the settings for a threshold rule, click the ellipsis icon beside a listed rule and click Edit.


 
After you create the Entity Information while creating a Threshold Rule, you cannot edit Metric Type and Entity options in this field.

Specify or change the settings for the rule. You can specify or change the following settings in the General Settings area:

Setting

Description

Enter a name for the rule.

Description

Enter a short description for the rule.

Entity Type

Choose the entity type to which the threshold rule is applicable: Entry Point, Queue, Site, Team, or Agent (if your enterprise uses the Agent Threshold Alerts feature).

You can specify or change the following settings in the Threshold Information area:

Setting

Description

Threshold Metric

Choose a value from the drop-down list. The list displays only those metrics that are applicable to the selected entity type.

Operand

Choose a value from the drop-down list:

> (greater than)

>= (greater than or equal to)

< (less than)

<= (less than or equal to)

= (equal to)

Trigger Value

Specify the value that triggers a threshold alert. The value type (duration, count, or percentage) is based on the metric selected.

The trigger value must be greater than 0 for all metrics.

Trigger Interval

Specify the interval, in seconds, during which the system generates only one alert for the threshold rule check.

You can specify or change the following settings in the Email Information area:

Setting

Description

Notification Receivers

If you want an individual to receive an email alert in the HTML format when the threshold is triggered, enter the email address in the Notification Receivers field and press Enter. Repeat for each address that you want to add.

To remove an address, click x on the left side of the listed address.

Text Notification Receivers

If you want an individual to receive an email alert in the text format when the threshold is triggered, enter the email address in the Text Notification Receivers field and press Enter. Repeat for each address that you want to add.

To remove an address, click x on the left side of the listed address.

Click Save.

Deactivate a Threshold Rule

Before you begin

From the Management Portal navigation bar, choose Provisioning > Threshold Rules.

Click the ellipsis icon beside the threshold rule that you want to deactivate and click Mark Inactive.

Click Yes to confirm.

The status of the threshold rule changes to Not Active.

 

Once the object is marked inactive, it can be permanently deleted. For more information, see Delete inactive objects permanently.

Activate a Threshold Rule

On the Management Portal navigation bar, choose Provisioning > Threshold Rules.

Click the ellipsis icon beside a threshold rule with the status Not Active and click Restore.

Click Yes to confirm.

The status of the threshold rule changes to Active.

Entry Point Mappings

The Entry Point Mappings page is an interface for managing the mappings between entry points and the following:

Dial Numbers (DN)

Webex Contact Center PSTN

Voice POP bridge

Webex Calling

Social Messaging

By default, all the DN to entry point mappings are listed. If required, you can filter the list by selecting an entry from the Select Entry Point drop-down list. The list displays DN, Entry Point, Number Type, and ID.

If an incoming Entry Point DN is not in the correct format, the call fails to connect. For example, if the Entry Point DN is in the format (xxx xxx xxx) and the incoming Entry Point DN format is (+1 xxx xxx xxx), the call fails to connect.

The following points apply if you've a Cisco PSTN add-on:

The Number Type column displays if the number is a toll number or toll-free number.

If your tenant contains any DN that is recognized as toll-free and you do not have Cisco Bundle 2: Inbound toll-free number access add-on, then a banner appears saying "Some mappings need to be deleted". Remove the toll-free numbers as the entitlement does not exist.

If you forward or redirect the DN from a service provider to Cisco PSTN, the delay in media path between agents and callers increases, thereby impacting the agent and caller experience.

To use an entry point, you must map a dial number to the entry point.

Map an Entry Point

To map an entry point:

On the Management Portal navigation bar, click Provisioning > Entry Point Mappings.

Click Entry Point Mappings and choose the appropriate mapping list:DN to Entry Point Mappings.

  • Dialed Numbers: Map dialed numbers to entry points.
  • Social Messaging: Map social channel connectors to entry points.

Click + New DN to EP Mapping.

Enter the following fields:

  • For DN mapping:

    Setting

    Description

    Location (Only for Webex Calling)

    Choose a location from the drop-down list. The list of locations appears as configured on Webex Calling.

    Ensure that you've created a location in Webex Calling and added the required numbers. For more details on adding numbers in Webex Calling, see the article Manage Numbers in Locations.

    Available Numbers / DN

    For Webex Calling:

    Select the number that you want to map to this entry point.

    The Webex Calling location main number doesn’t appear in this list. If you need to use that main number for mapping, change the main number. For details on managing numbers, see the article Manage Numbers in Locations.

    A toll-free number cannot be used for Entry Point mapping without the appropriate entitlement. If the Telephony type is Cisco PSTN and you do not have Cisco Bundle 2: Inbound toll-free number access add-on, use a toll number to map an entry point.

    Choose the entry point to which you want to map the DN.

    PSTN Region

    Choose a region in which you want to enable regional voice media services. The dial number (DN) must be configured in the selected region to accept incoming calls. The entry point is mapped to the dial number that belongs to the selected region. Mapping the dialed number to a region keeps the voice media local to that region.

    If you don’t choose a region, the Default region is selected. The default region is the data center corresponding to the country of operation that is configured on Control Hub when you provision the contact center tenant.

    Example 1: For home region you can select a local location and, for PSTN region you can select default.

    For an organization in Japan you can select the location as Tokyo or Osaka and select a number within that location as an entry point and PSTN region must be default.


     

    To use the Outdial Transfer to Queue feature, map the Outdial Transfer to Queue entry point to a DN.

    (Only for SMS) After you choose the Entry Point, a Webhook URL gets populated on the page. Copy the Webhook URL and configure MessageBird. This configuration helps exchange SMS messages with MessageBird.

    Click Save.

Edit Dial Number to Entry Point Mappings

To edit the mapping of a dial number or social messaging channel to an entry point:

From the Management Portal navigation bar, click Provisioning > Entry Point Mappings.

Choose the appropriate list:

Dialed Numbers

Social Messaging

For dial numbers, you can do the following:
  • In the Select Entry Point drop-down list, search for the dial number that you have mapped to an entry point.
  • From the Select Entry Point drop-down list, choose Not Mapped. All of dial numbers that are not mapped to entry points display. You can then map a dial number to an entry point as required.
  • (Optional) To export the dial numbers and the related entry points as a CSV file, click Export as CSV.

To edit a mapping, click the ellipsis icon beside a dial number or social messaging channel, and click Edit.

Make the edits and click Save.

You cannot edit a Dial Number to Entry Point mapping if the dial number is the default outdial ANI of the tenant. For more information on default outdial ANI, see Settings.

Delete Dial Number to Entry Point Mappings

To delete the mapping of a dial number or social messaging channel to an entry point:

From the Management Portal navigation bar, click Provisioning > Entry Point Mappings.

Choose the appropriate list:

Dialed Numbers

Social Messaging

Click DN to Entry Point Mappings.

Click the ellipsis icon beside the entry that you want to delete and click Delete.

Click Yes to confirm.

You can't delete a Dial Number to Entry Point mapping if the dial number is the default outdial ANI of the tenant and if its not the only remaining Dial Number to Entry Point mapping. For more information on default outdial ANI, see Settings.

You can't delete a mapping if the dial number is referenced by any other entities (for example, Outdial ANI List Entry).

Click the (Information) icon in the error message to view the list of entities associated with the selected dial number. You can delete the Dial Number to Entry Point mapping only if the associated entities are deleted.

Reports for the Provisioned Items

Use the Management Portal to generate reports about the active resources that the Webex Contact Center administrator provisions for your enterprise.You can view the following reports:

Report

Description

Site Report

The details of the sites for your enterprise.

For more information, see About Sites, Teams, Entry Points, and Queues

The details of the skills that are available for your enterprise.

This report is available if your enterprise uses the Skill-Based Routing.

For more information on how to define the skills for your enterprise, see Skill Definitions.

Currently we do not support Skill-Based Routing.

The details of the mapping of the skills and the corresponding profiles.

This report is available if your enterprise uses the Skill-Based Routing.

For more information on how to define the profiles for the skills, see Skill Profiles.

The details about the mapping of the routing strategies with the entry points, queues, and teams.

For more information on how to define routing strategies, see About Contact Routing.

The details about the agents and their corresponding skills.

This report is available if your enterprise uses the Skill-Based Routing.

For more information on how to define the skills for your enterprise and Desktop Profiles, see Skill Definitions and Desktop Profiles.

Note: Currently we do not support Skill-Based Routing.

Manage Reports for the Provisioned Items

To email the report or download the report for any provisioned item:

From the Management Portal navigation bar, choose Provisioning > Reports.

Select the required type of report.

For more information on the types of the reports, see Reports for the Provisioned Items.

Download the report as either an Excel sheet or PDF.

For the Routing Report, you have to select the type of the routing strategy for which you want to generate the report. The options are:

Current

Active

Delete inactive objects permanently

Webex Contact Center allows administrators to permanently delete configuration objects that have been marked inactive. This helps customers remove unwanted configurations, keep a lightweight configuration footprint, and improve application performance. Before deleting a configuration object permanently, you will need to mark it inactive. You can also periodically delete inactive objects using an automatic purge tenant level setting.

You can permanently delete the following configuration object types:

Users

User Profiles

Desktop Profiles

Work Types

Auxiliary Codes

Threshold Rules

Skill Profile

Teams

Sites

Entry Points

Outdial Entry Points

Queues

Outdial Queues

Desktop Layouts

Global Variables

Multimedia Profiles

Skill Definitions

The maximum number of inactive users is 5000. The maximum inactive objects for all other object types is 100. If this limit is reached, you must delete inactive objects to be able to deactivate more objects. If the configuration object has associated objects, you must inactivate all the referenced objects.

From the Management Portal navigation bar, choose Provisioning.

Select an entity.

To permanently delete a configuration object manually, on the entity page, click the ellipsis icon beside the object. Select Delete.

On the dialog box that informs you that the object will be permanently deleted and can't be recovered, click Yes. A message appears that the object is permanently deleted.

To configure an automatic purge of inactive objects for permanent deletion, see the article Configure auto-purge of inactive entities.

About Business Rules Engine

The Business Rules Engine (BRE) provides a means for tenants to incorporate their data into the Webex Contact Center environment for custom routing as well as for general implementation. Administrators can use the BRE solution with Webex Contact Center to leverage business data for their organization in flows.

Configure BRE

Before you begin

Contact Cisco Professional Services Group to set up the BRE and BRE DataSync accounts.

From the Management Portal navigation bar, choose Business Rules to launch the Business Rules Engine utility.

You must create rules in the BRE utility. For more information on how to configure the rules in the BRE utility, see the Creating a Set of Rules section in the Cisco Webex Contact Center Business Rules Engine User Guide.

Configure the BRE DataSync utility for every dataset that the Rules Engine uses to make decisions.

For more information, see the Configuring a BRE DataSync Instance section in the Cisco Webex Contact Center Business Rules Engine User Guide.

Create and configure a flow with the BRE Request activity.

About Contact Routing

The Routing Strategy module provides a flexible environment for routing contacts to the best resource, regardless of location. Each incoming contact arrives at an entry point, from where it’s sent to queue for distribution among teams at contact center sites according to scheduled routing strategies, scheduled team capacity strategies, and queue precedence settings specified in the Routing Strategy module.

In addition, if your enterprise uses the outdial feature, each outdial call passes through an outdial entry point and outdial queue according to routing strategies in the Routing Strategy module.

Although the examples in the following sections refer to phone contacts, the same contact routing options are available to other media types.

Each contact arrives at an entry point, where a routing strategy applies business logic. Based on the evaluated criteria in the routing strategy, the system selects an appropriate queue to distribute the contact to one of the available teams.

About Skills-based Routing

Skills-based Routing (SBR) is an optional feature that matches the needs of contacts with agents who have the skills to best meet those needs. SBR is available for voice contacts as well as digital channel contacts. When calls arrive at an entry point, SBR classifies the calls into subsets. You can route the calls in each subset to agents who possess a required set of skills, such as language fluency or product expertise.

SBR assigns skill requirements to calls in a flow. Based on the assigned skill requirements, the calls enter a queue for distribution to agents who have matching skills. You can configure SBR in a way that removes or reduces the skill requirements of agents if an agent is not available within a time interval that is specified in the queue. For more information, see Skill Definitions. To remove or reduce the skill requirements, specify the skill relaxations in the Queue Contact activity.

SBR matches all skill requirements of contacts with the skills of agents. If one of the skill requirements of a contact is invalid because skill values are not properly defined in the flow, SBR cannot find a matching agent. In such cases, the call is routed to the longest available agent.

SBR provides the following capabilities:

Match skill requirements of contacts with agents who have those specific skills.

Add skill requirements to contacts and route contacts with the same skill requirements to a single queue. For more information, see Queue Contact activity.

Configure different agent teams with a set of agents to serve a queue. For more information, see Create a Queue and an Outdial Queue.

Map various skills to the profiles of these agents. For more information, see Agent Profiles.

In the preceding example, contact C1 requires skill A and contact C2 requires both skill A and skill B. When C2 enters the queue, it requires agents with both skill A and skill B. For best customer service, map C2 to the team that has both skill A and skill B. Do not map C2 to a team that has only skill A or skill B. If you map C2 to a team that has only skill A or skill B, C2 becomes the longest contact in the parked state.

Skills-based Routing Types

SBR routes contacts to agents based on the contact’s skill requirements that are configured in the flow. For more information, see About Skills-based Routing.

You can enable SBR in the Queue Routing Type settings when creating a queue. For more information, see Create a Queue and an Outdial Queue. SBR routes contacts to agents in one of the following ways when more than one agent with the required skill set is available:

Longest Available Agent

Best Available Agent

Longest Available Agent: SBR routes contacts to the agent who has been available for the longest duration.

Best Available Agent: SBR routes contacts to the agent who has the highest level of proficiency in the skill. To route contacts to the best available agent:

Configure the contact’s skill requirements with the necessary condition so that the contact is always routed to an agent with the highest level of proficiency:

If you choose <= condition for the contact’s skill requirements, a lower value indicates a better match with the contact's requirement.

If you choose >= condition for the contact’s skill requirements, a higher value indicates a better match with the contact's requirement.

If you choose IS condition for the contact’s skill requirements, a higher value indicates a better match with the contact's requirement.

For more information, see Skill Requirements in Queue Contact activity.

Assign the proficiency level to an agent when creating Skill Definitions and Agent Profiles.

For example, you can route contacts to agents with English speaking skill as a language proficiency. Consider two agents: Agent 1 with an English language proficiency level of 3 and Agent 2 with an English language proficiency level of 6. Both agents are available in the queue.

If you configure the contact’s skill requirement with <= condition in the flow, Agent 1 with an English language proficiency level of 3 is the best available agent in the queue to connect to the contact.

If you configure the contact’s skill requirement with >= condition in the flow, Agent 2 with an English language proficiency level of 6 is the best available agent in the queue to connect to the contact.

Longest Available Agent (LAA)

Contacts are routed to the agents who have been available for the longest time since handling their last contact in all teams that are assigned to the queue in the Call Distribution section. In Webex Contact Center, the Longest Available algorithm ensures a fair way to distribute contacts to the longest available agent across all media channels such as voice and digital (WhatsApp, Facebook Messenger, Livechat, Email, and SMS).

Agents lose their LAA positions across all channels when they are offered a contact of any media-type, that means after an agent handles a contact, the next contact of any media type queued will be assigned to the next longest available agent.

In the above diagram, Agent 1 logged in first at T0 and by virtue of it Agent 1 is the longest available agent. Similarly, Agent 2 and Agent 3 log in at T1 and T2, so their LAA positions are 2 and 3 respectively.

Let's consider a scenario where Contact 1 (a voice contact) is put in Queue 1 at T0, Contact 2 (a Chat contact) is put in Queue 2 at T1, and Contact 3 (again a voice contact) is put in Queue 3 at T2. Here, Agent 1 handles Contact 1, Agent 2 handles Contact 2, and Agent 3 handles Contact3.

By virtue of Agent 1 being offered Contact 1, Agent 1 loses the LAA position. This ensures a fair distribution of contacts in LAA queues across all media types such as voice and non-voice contacts.


 
There is a possibility that a single longest available agent can get multiple contacts when contacts matching this agent are queued at the same time.

Advanced Queue Information

The Advanced Queue Information feature allows you to assess if the skills of the logged in and available agents in a queue match the contact's skill requirement without queueing the contacts for a long duration. The GetQueueInfo activity provides the number of agents that are logged on and available. However, this activity doesn't provide information about any logged in agents who have specific skills that match the requirement of a specific contact. For more information about the GetQueueInfo activity, see Get Queue Info.

At some time of the day, there may be no agents who are adequately skilled to match the skill requirement of a specific contact. The administrator needs information about such agents before and after queuing a contact to initiate alternative action such as playing a message, providing a callback option, or escalating to a different queue.

The administrator can do the following:

If this activity is invoked before queuing the contact, the flow uses the skill requirements that are configured in the and the teams from the last call distribution group. This determines the number of logged in and available agents and populates the LoggedOnAgentsAll and AvailableAgentsAll output variables. The system sets the output variable CurrentGroup to –1.

A value of -1 for the CurrentGroup indicates that the contact isn't yet queued when the activity is invoked. Flow designers can use the output variable CurrentGroup and determine if the contact isn't queued.

If this activity is invoked after queuing the contact, the system considers the current skills of the contact. The skills in the current skill relaxation cycle and the teams from the current call distribution group will be used to calculate the available and logged in agents. These values are populated in the LoggedOnAgentsCurrent and AvailableAgentsCurrent output variables. The system uses skills from the current skill relaxation cycle and the last call distribution group to calculate logged in and available agents and stores these values in the LoggedOnAgentsAll and AvailableAgentsAll output variables. The system also stores values in the PIQ, CurrentGroup, and TotalGroups output variables.

You can invoke this activity for LAA-based queues. However, skill requirements that are configured for this activity aren't applicable for LAA-based queues. You can use this activity in a loop. The Flow Designer invokes the Advanced Queue Information activity when executing the flow.

In the Flow Designer, you can create flows using the Advanced Queue Information activity only if the feature flag is enabled for this feature. You can't work with flows that have the Advanced Queue Information activity in the Flow Designer, if the feature flag is disabled. Ensure that the feature flag is enabled for the Advanced Queue Information activity.

As part of the Advanced Queue Information when a contact is parked in a queue and you use the Advanced Queue Information to query another queue stack, this will not be supported and will result in an error. For more information on the error response code, see Advanced Queue Information.

Escalate Call Distribution Group

The application uses the in the post queuing loop to quickly move to the next call distribution group or the last. Typically, administrators use this activity to identify the contacts that are parked against escalation groups. These escalation groups have at least one logged in agent who has matching skills or no logged in agents.

The application uses the QueueContact activity and calls the advanced GetQueueInfo activity to determine if there are any agents logged in to a specific call distribution group. If no agents are logged in to a specific call distribution group, the flow designer uses the EscalateCallDistribution activity to move ahead to either the next or the last call distribution group in the series. If an agent is available in the escalated group, Webex Contact Center routes the contact to that agent. If not, Webex Contact Center parks the contact immediately in that call distribution group.

For more information about the QueueContact activity, see Queue Contact.

A customer use case is a queue that has many call distribution groups. If an agent is not available in the first call distribution group to answer a call, the flow designer redirects the call to another call distribution group within the queue. At each level, the number of agents in the call distribution group increases so that there is a greater chance of the call getting answered. At certain times of the day, agents from this group or other groups might not be available.

For SBR and LAA-based queues, if you invoke the EscalateCallDistribution activity on a contact that is not yet queued, it results in an error and exits the error path in the flow activity.

Escalate Call Distribution Group is an independent activity. You can use this activity along with the AdvancedQueueInformation and the GetQueueInformation activities to escalate the call distribution group on a queue. The CheckAgentAvailability parameter in the QueueContact activity results in escalation of call distribution groups. Don't use the EscalateCallDistributionGroup activity along with the CheckAgentAvailability parameter in the QueueContact activity.

In the Flow Designer, you can create flows using the EscalateCallDistributionGroup activity only if the feature flag is enabled for this feature. You can't work with flows that have the EscalateCallDistributionGroup activity in the Flow Designer, if the feature flag is disabled. Ensure that the feature flag is enabled for the EscalateCallDistributionGroup activity.

Routing of Parked Contacts

SBR parks contacts in a queue until an agent connects with the contacts.

When agents become available, SBR routes contacts by using one of the following selection methods:

Skills-based Contact Selection

First In, First Out (FIFO) based Contact Selection

By default, Skills-based contact selection is enabled for your organization.

Skills-based Contact Selection

In skills-based contact selection, contacts are selected based on the exact match between the skill requirements of the contact and the skills of the agent. Skills-based contact selection does not assign contacts to agents on FIFO basis. If the contact's skill requirements match exactly with the agent's skill, the contact connects to the agent irrespective of its position in the queue. If there are many such contacts with the same skill requirements, skills-based contact selection filters contacts in the queue and assigns them to the agent in the following order:

Priority

Timestamp (oldest to newest)

For example, consider that contact C1 which requires an agent with skill A and contact C2 which requires an agent with skill B are waiting in the queue to connect to an agent. Contact C3 which requires an agent with skill C also enters the queue. If an agent with skill C becomes available, C3 does not wait for C1 and C2 to connect to agents, as the skill requirements of C3 match exactly with the agent who has skill C.

First In, First Out (FIFO) based Contact Selection

The first contact that enters the queue has the highest priority to connect to an agent. The first contact connects to an agent when an agent with matching skills becomes available. If the agent’s skill does not match the skill requirement of the first contact that is parked in the queue, the agent does not connect to the first contact. Even though the agent’s skill matches the skill requirements of other contacts in the queue, the contacts remain parked until the first contact finds an agent.

For example, consider two contacts: C1 is the first contact to enter the queue which requires an agent with skill A and C2 is the second contact to enter the queue which requires an agent with skill B. When an agent with skill B becomes available, C2 does not connect to skill B. Since C1 is the first contact to enter the queue, SBR waits for an agent with skill A to be available to connect to C1 first. C2 connects to skill B only after C1 finds an agent.

To enable FIFO-based contact selection for your organization, contact Cisco Support.

Set Up Skills-Based Routing

Define the skills. For more information, see Skill Definitions.

Define the skill profiles. For more information, see Skill Profiles.

Assign the skill profiles to teams or agents. You can assign a skill profile to each agent-based team. All agents logged in to the team are associated with that skill profile. However, you can also assign a skill profile to an individual agent, which overrides the skill profile of the team.

For more information, see Create a team and. View the Details of a User

Assign the skill profiles to agents. You can assign a skill profile to an individual agent or a team. For more information, see View the Details of a User.

Create Entry Points and Queues.

Create a queue with a channel type as Telephony and Queue Routing Type as Skills-Based.

Create or upload a call control script that defines how to treat the call. For more information, see Working with Call Control Scripts.

Create a flow that defines how to treat the call. For more information, see Create and Manage Flows.

Add a Queue Contact activity and select the queue for which Skills-Based Routing is configured. For more information, see Queue Contact.

Create an entry point and queue routing strategy. In the entry point routing strategy, you assign skill requirements to calls during call treatment defined in the call control script. For more information, see Assigning Skill Requirements to Incoming Calls. The calls are then distributed to the specified queue where they wait for an agent with the required skills.

In the queue routing strategy, you specify options for identifying agents to service the incoming calls. If an agent with the required skills doesn't become available within a specified time interval, you can remove or reduce the skill requirement.

For more information, see Create a Desktop Profile.

Create an entry point routing strategy and select the flow that you created. For more information, see Create a routing strategy.

Agent-based Routing

Agent-based Routing is an optional feature that routes or queues a contact to the preferred agent directly. An agent lookup with agent's email address or agent's ID routes a contact to the preferred agent. The Queue To Agent activity in the flow helps to achieve Agent-based Routing. For more information, see the section Queue To Agent activity.

A contact can have one or more preferred agents. The mapping between the contacts and their preferred agents is managed in an external application outside Webex Contact Center. The preferred agent lookup for any contact is performed using the HTTP Request activity in the flow. The HTTP Request activity retrieves the mapping from the external application. To route or park the contact against that preferred agent, you can configure the Queue To Agent activity in the flow. The Queue To Agent activity allows you to specify the agent by their Webex Contact Center agent ID or email address. You can also park the contact against a preferred agent if that preferred agent isn't immediately available.

You can consider chaining an activity within the flow to route or queue contacts.

For example, you can chain one Queue To Agent activity to another Queue To Agent activity to queue a contact to multiple preferred agents. You can chain a Queue Contact activity to the Queue To Agent activity to route a contact if none of the preferred agents are available for that contact.

Agent-based Routing is useful in the following scenarios:

Preferred agent routing: The customer can assign contacts to dedicated agents or relationship executives. In such scenarios, the Agent-based Routing routes the contacts directly to that preferred agent.

Last agent routing: When a contact calls back the contact center multiple times to interact with an agent, Agent-based Routing can route the contact to the last agent who handled that contact.

In both use cases, the details of the contact and the agent mapping are stored outside the Webex Contact Center. The HTTP activity retrieves the data. The Queue To Agent activity routes the contact to the preferred agent or the last agent.

In case of Blended Real-time or Exclusive Multimedia Profiles, if Preferred Agent is already handling one real-time channel, the agent will be considered busy, and the call won't be routed to the preferred agent immediately.

To set up Agent-based Routing:

Before you begin:

You must export the Webex Contact Center agent ID and agent email address from Webex Contact Center to an external application. Webex Contact Center doesn't store the mapping between the agent and its contacts.

Retrieve the mapping between the agent and the contact from the external application using the HTTP Request activity in the Flow Designer (From the Management Portal navigation bar, choose Routing Strategy > Flow and click New to create a new flow). For more information, see the section HTTP Request.

Configure the Queue To Agent Activity in the Flow Designer. You can provide the general settings and the contact handling details to route the contact. For more information, see the section Queue To Agent activity.

About global routing overrides

A global routing override is a routing strategy that applies to one or more Telephony entry points. When a call arrives at an entry point, the routing engine checks whether a Global Routing Override exists for that entry point. If a Global Routing Override exists, it becomes the current routing strategy for the entry point, overriding any standard routing strategies associated with that entry point.

Creating a global routing override enables you to change the routing strategies quickly and easily for many entry points simultaneously in urgent situations, rather than changing each routing strategy individually.

Global routing overrides operate in the Tenant time zone.

Configure Multimedia Profiles

If your enterprise uses social channels, chat, and email routing in addition to voice, then Multimedia profiles are enabled. You can associate sites and agents with multimedia profiles.

Define the multimedia profiles. If your enterprise subscribes to the Multimedia feature, each agent is associated with a multimedia profile, which specifies how many contacts of each media type the agent can handle concurrently. For more information, see Multimedia Profiles.

Assign multimedia profiles to sites, teams, or agents. When Multimedia is enabled, every site is associated with a multimedia profile. Each agent-based team at a given site is associated with the profile assigned to that site unless the team is assigned a different multimedia profile. Similarly, each agent logged in to a team is associated with the team's profile unless the agent is assigned a different multimedia profile. For more information, see Sites, Create a team, and Users.

Create separate entry points and queues for each media type. For more information, see Create an Entry Point.

Work with Webex Contact Center Operations to create routing strategies configured to use a specialized call control script.

Work with your specific CRM vendor to configure the multimedia interaction at the agent level.

Alternately you can configure the queue routing strategy to assign multimedia contacts (Chat, Email, Social Channels) to your agents.

Working with Resource Files

To view the resources, choose Routing Strategy from the Management Portal navigation bar.

You can choose to see the audio files, predefined emails, or predefined chat responses.

Upload an Audio Resource File

Webex Contact Center supports uploading .wav audio files with the following specifications:

Channels: 1

Sample Rate: 8000

Sample Encoding: 8-bit u-law

Mono Recording (for combined, caller, or agent recording)

Channels: 1

Sample Rate: 8000

Precision: 16-bit

Sample Encoding: GSM

Maximum Recording Duration: 2 Hours

Stereo Recording (for combined recording)

Channels: 2

Sample Rate: 8000

Precision: 13-bit

Sample Encoding: 4-bit IMA ADPCM

Maximum Recording Duration: 2 Hours

By default, only mono recording is enabled for all tenants.

From the Management Portal navigation bar, choose Routing Strategy.

From the Routing Strategy page, choose Resources > Audio Files.

Click New.

On the Upload Resource page, click Browse.

Navigate to the file in your system, and click Open.

The File field displays the path and file name of the uploaded file, and the Resource Name field displays the file name.

Click Save.

Edit an Audio Resource File

Do not update resources that are currently used by the system.

From the Management Portal navigation bar, choose Routing Strategy.

From the Routing Strategy page, choose Resources > Audio Files.

Click the Ellipsis button beside the resource name and click Edit.

On the Overwrite Resource page, click Browse.

Navigate to the file in your system, and click Open.

The File field displays the path and file name of the uploaded file, and the Resource Name field displays the file name.

For audio file specifications, see Upload an Audio Resource File.

Click Save.

Click Yes to confirm overwriting the audio file.

Play or Download a .wav File

From the Management Portal navigation bar, choose Routing Strategy.

From the Routing Strategy page, choose Resources > Audio Files.

Click the ellipsis button beside the file name and click Play.

In the dialog box that opens, specify whether you want to open or save the file. When you click Open, the media player installed on your computer opens and plays the file. If a compatible media player is not installed, a dialog box opens and prompts you to download a player.

Update a Resource File

From the Management Portal navigation bar, choose Routing Strategy.

From the Routing Strategy page, choose Resources > Audio Files.

Click the ellipsis button beside the file name and click Edit.

Make the necessary changes to the resource.

Click Save.

Copy a Resource File

The copy function enables you to create backup copies of prompts and other resource files. Only files with the .wav extension can be copied.

From the Management Portal navigation bar, choose Routing Strategy.

From the Routing Strategy page, choose Resources > Audio Files.

Click the ellipsis button beside the file name and click Copy.

On the page that appears, enter a name for the copied file or leave the default name (Copy_ is prepended to the original name).

Click Save.

Export References to a Media File

You can view or export a list showing the name of each routing strategy that references a specified media file along with the name of the associated entry point or queue. In the case of a global routing strategy, the list shows 0 instead of the name of an entry point or queue.

To view or export the references to a media file:

From the Management Portal navigation bar, choose Routing Strategy.

From the Routing Strategy page, choose Resources > Audio Files.

Click the ellipsis button beside the file name and click Excel or CSV.

In the dialog box that opens, specify whether to open or save the file.

Create a Predefined Email Template

You can predefine the email template that agents use to communicate with customers. An organization can have a single predefined template for email.

To edit or delete the template, click the ellipsis button beside the template in the Predefined Emails page.

You cannot use the predefined email templates for quick-reply emails.

To create an email template:

From the Management Portal navigation bar, choose Routing Strategy.

From the Routing Strategy page, choose Resources > Predefined Emails.

Click New.

The New button is disabled if your organization already has a predefined email template.

In the New Predefined Email dialog box, do the following:

Enter a name for the email template.

Set the status for the template.

Set the status as Active to use it as a default template for all email communications between agents and customers.

Set the status to Not Active to save it as draft. You can later change the status to Active to use it.

Enter the email body. You can use the formatting tools to draft the email body.

(Optional) Add macros to the email body.

You can use the macro to add variables for Customer Name or Agent Name to the email. You can set a default value for the variable type you choose. You can use the macros multiple times in the template as per your requirement.

To add the macro variables, place the cursor where you want the variable. Choose the type of macro you want to add and click the Insert to Text Editor button.

To set a default value for a macro, enter the default value in the field Default Value before you insert the macro to the text editor.

Click Save to save the email template.

Configure a Predefined Chat Template

Before you begin

Ensure that you create an entry point before you configure a chat template.

Entry points are the initial landing place for all channel types in Webex Contact Center. The system sends the contact to an agent based on the routing strategy that is set for an entry point.

You can configure one chat template for each entry point. For more information, see Entry Points and Queues.


 

Only customers whose organization is provisioned on an existing Webex Calling Integrated Platform can configure a chat template for their contact center.

Log in to the customer organization at https://admin.webex.com.

From the navigation pane on the left, in the Services section, click Contact Center > Features.

Choose one of the following options:

  • To create a new chat template, click New > Chat Template.
  • To edit an existing chat template, double-click the card.

The system displays the Chat Template wizard.

In the Define Template page:

Enter a unique name that identifies the purpose of your template.

Choose a preconfigured entry point from the drop-down list.

Choose the following customization options and click Next. You can choose multiple options depending on what you want your customers to see when they chat with your organization.

Proactive Prompt: The message that appears in the chat box when the customer opens the website of your organization. You can customize this message. You can configure the time to prompt the message to the customer. You can also change the title and the default welcome message.

Off-Hours: The non-business hours of your organization. You can set the availability of the chat support by configuring the business hours and time zone of your organization. You can also add an away message for customers.

Virtual Agent: The preconfigured chatbot that starts the conversation with the customer. You can choose from the available virtual agents and add a welcome message.

Configure the customer information form, the visual display of the agents, and the status messages for the chat window. For more information, see Configure a Virtual Agent for Webex Contact Center.

Feedback: The feedback form that appears after the chat ends. You can add a message inviting customers to give their feedback about their chat experience.

Based on the selected options, the subsequent steps appear in the wizard.

In the Proactive Prompt section, enter the wait time, title, and message for the prompt.

In the Off-Hours section, enter the message for the prompt, and choose the business hours and time zone from the drop-down list.

Click Next.

The Proactive Prompt doesn’t pop up during the off-hours or when agents aren’t available to assist.

In the Customer Information page, click each of the fields in the Preview card and modify the attributes. The customer uses these attributes to fill the form.

It's mandatory to enter at least one category in the Type Attributes section for customers to choose the category from the drop-down list.

In the Virtual Agent page:

Choose a preconfigured Virtual Agent (that can provide initial automated support in your customer chat experience) from the drop-down list and enter a message.

Enter a welcome message and click Next.

In the Branding and Identity, Status Messages page:

In the Branding and Identity section, choose one of the following Profile Type:

Organization: Use a single profile to represent all agents in your organization. For example, the name of the organization.

Virtual Agent or Agents: Use unique profiles to represent different agents in your organization.

Choose one of the following options:

Show agent's display name: Displays the agent's full name.

Show agent's alias: Displays the agent's alias name.

In the Status Messages section, enter the messages (that appear to the customer) and then click Next.

In the Feedback page, enter Label and Hint Text in the Attributes card to receive customer feedback.

In the Done page, click Finish.

After you successfully configure the chat template, a code snippet appears. To use the newly configured chat template in your organization's website, you can copy and paste the code snippet within the <head> or <body> HTML tag of your webpage's source file.

You can close the code snippet and download it later from the Contact Center > Features page.

Create a Predefined Chat Response

You can define a set of chat responses that your agents can use to communicate with the customers. You can configure the chat responses for a specific queue or for all the queues. We support the following languages:
  • US English

    Japanese

    Italian

    French

    German

    Spanish

You can configure 50 responses per language, per queue, for a total of 300 responses per queue. Agents can see the responses in their queue based on the language settings in their local browser. Thus, agents can see only 50 responses at a time.

From the Management Portal navigation bar, choose Routing Strategy.

From the Routing Strategy page, choose Resources > Predefined Chat Responses.

Click New.

Enter the following details:

Setting

Description

Response Name

Contains the name of the predefined chat response. You can enter a name of maximum 40 characters.

Status

Contains the status of the predefined chat response. Deactivate the status to hide it from the agents in Agent Desktop.

Language

Choose the language of the predefined chat response from the drop-down list.

You cannot edit the language of the chat reponse.

Queue

Choose the queue for which you want to define the chat response. If you select All from the drop-down list, all agents in all the queues in your organization can use the chat response.

However, if any queue has reached the capacity of 50 messages, the system displays an error message with the names of the queues that have reached the limit. The system disables the queues that have reached the limit and you cannot choose them.

Content

Contains the text for the chat response. You can enter a maximum of 150 characters.

Click Save.

Configure Routing Resources

You can choose either a routing resource or a flow. If you choose a routing resource, you can't customize flow control configurations such as Customize ANI, Screen pop, Global variable and so on, as part of the outdial experience. We recommend that you use flows instead of routing resources to avail any advanced configurations such as Screen pop, Customize ANI and so on. For more information, see Create a Flow.

Routing strategies will be obsolete in the future. It is recommended to use flows configured with business hours and outdial entry points.

If you want to proceed with routing strategies, consider the following aspects. For each entry point and queue, you should create a set of default routing strategies that cover all time intervals. In addition, you can schedule an alternate strategy beyond the default strategy for any time interval. For example, Queue 1 could have a BusyHourStrategy for the normal day shift and an OffHoursStrategy for non-business hours.

Flag the normal daily schedule as the default strategy. You can create a non-default strategy, such as a holiday schedule for a time interval that overlaps the default strategy. A strategy that is not flagged as default overrides a default strategy and is used as an exception to the default schedule. This means that the system first checks for a strategy that is not flagged as default, and if none exists, the system uses the default strategy.

When the default strategy is the current strategy (that is, the strategy that is currently running), the system checks every three minutes for a non-default strategy and if one is found, it becomes the current strategy.

If no strategy is specified for a time interval, and there is no default strategy for the time interval, the last strategy used by the system may continue as the current strategy even though it has expired. In this case, the system checks every minute for a valid strategy and as soon as it finds one, that strategy becomes the current strategy.

About Team Types

When you create or modify a queue routing strategy, the following options appear:

Agent-Based teams have a known number of agents assigned to teams. Authorized users assign a desktop profile to one or more teams. These agents use the Agent Desktop to interface with the Webex Contact Center system.

Capacity-Based teams don’t have specific agents assigned to them, and the agents don’t use the Agent Desktop. For example, an outsourcer could have teams that use a PBX or an ACD to handle calls. You can use a capacity-based team to represent a voicemail box or an agent group, which Webex Contact Center doesn’t manage.

The capacity of these teams is based on the provisioned team capacity setting, which can override the team capacity strategies. For more information, see Scheduling Team Capacity. If the team's actual capacity is higher or lower than the value currently used by the system, the result is either not enough or too many calls for agents to handle. This makes strategy design more challenging.

When you use the getNumAgentsLoggedIn API, the response includes the number of agents logged in along with the number of capacity-based teams that are considered as active.

When you create a routing strategy, you can mix team types. Remember that the accuracy of call routing to capacity-based teams depends on the capacity number specified.

Limitations of Capacity Based Teams when using Classic platform

Webex Contact Center assigns calls to the capacity-based team by transferring the call to a Dial Number (DN). After the call transfers to a DN, Webex Contact Center disconnects from the call. Webex Contact Center is not aware of the call status; that is, whether the capacity-based team answers, handles, or rejects the call.

This limitation causes the following behaviors:

Tracking the contact after the call transfer is not possible.

Detecting RONA or call failures is not possible

Recording the call is not possible.

Getting the Connect Time and Handled Time values is not possible. Call report shows the value as zero (0).

Setting the capacity is not applicable, hence more calls could go to the capacity-based team.

When using Next Generation media platform, Webex Contact Center assigns calls to the capacity-based teams, wherein the Webex Contact Center:

Handles the call status and determines whether the call routed to capacity-based team is answered, handled, or rejected.

Monitors the overall status of calls, including call termination, and decides when to update the consumption value of the capacity-based team. For example, if the call is terminated, capacity must be increased and vice versa.

Obtain the Connect Time and Handled Time values.

When a static load-balancing strategy includes both agent-based and capacity-based teams, the system distributes the calls to either agent-based teams or capacity-based teams, in the order that they are configured. Once the capacity of the capacity-based teams reaches the maximum limit, calls are routed to agent-based teams, if agents are available. If the call is in queue, it can be routed to either agent-based or capacity-based teams, depending on which team has resources available. If no team has capacity, calls are queued until capacity becomes available. This load-balancing strategy ensures that calls are handled efficiently and that no team is overloaded.

View routing strategies for an entry point or queue

To view all routing strategies for an entry point or queue:

From the Management Portal navigation bar, choose Routing Strategy.

Choose an entry point or queue from the Select Entry Point drop-down list to display the routing strategies for that entry point or queue.

For more information on the parameters that display on the Routing Strategy page, see Routing strategy parameters.

The upper section of the list view displays a table that lists all routing strategies available for the selected entry point or queue.

(Optional) Use the sort button at the end of the table to chronologically sort the strategies.

To see details for a strategy, click the ellipsis beside the routing strategy and click Edit.

The lower section of the Routing Strategy page displays the Routing Strategy Mapping Details table, which:

lists destination queues and entry points, which are based on the active routing strategies that you define for the selected entry point.

lists the teams to which the system routes calls, chats, or emails, which are based on the active routing strategies that you define for the selected queue. Mapping details aren't provided for a queue routing strategy that simply redirects the call to another entry point or queue.

Your access privileges determine what you see in the Mapping Details table. For example, if the system routes calls for the Sales queue to Teams A and B, and you have access rights only to Team A, the mapping table shows only Team A as the destination for incoming calls.

Routing strategy parameters

The following table describes the parameters that appear on the Routing Strategy page.

Column

Description

Displays the name you assign to the strategy. You can't change the strategy name after you create it.

Displays the system-assigned number of the strategy.

Status

Indicates the status of the strategy.

Current (appears in Red) means this is a snapshot of the currently running strategy. You can't copy the current strategy, but you can modify any setting that does not affect execution time or date. Changes to the strategy don't affect the recurring scheduled version of the strategy.

You can delete the current strategy, but don't delete it before you create a different strategy for the same time interval. If you delete a strategy without having another one in place, the last strategy used by the system becomes the default strategy although the start and end times and dates have expired. If this occurs, either create a new strategy for the current time period, or copy the default strategy and correct the time settings.

Active means that the strategy is in effect at the specified start time on the specified start date. This is the default status.

Not Active means the strategy isn't in effect regardless of the specified start time and date. This status lets you save a strategy for future use or as a draft to continue with later.

Default

Indicates whether the strategy is the default. A strategy not flagged as the default overrides a default strategy and potentially replaces the default schedule.

Chat Template

Identifies the chat template used for the routing strategy.

Repetition

Specifies whether the strategy repeats daily or only on specific days of the week.

Start Date

Displays the date on which the strategy starts.

End Date

Displays the date on which the strategy ends.

Start Time

Displays the time at which the strategy starts (in 24-hour format) for any given day in the specified date range.

End Time

Displays the time at which the strategy ends (in 24-hour format) for any given day in the specified date range.

Time Zone

Displays the time zone if you enable the Multiple Time Zone feature when you create the entry point or queue.

Lists the associated call flows when a routing strategy is executing.

View the current routing strategies

You can view a list of currently deployed routing strategies for multiple entry points or queues.

From the Management Portal navigation bar, choose Routing Strategy.

From the Routing Strategy page, choose Current Routing Strategies.

Choose All from the drop-down list to view current strategies for all entry points or queues.

Click Apply.

table provides details about the current routing strategies for the selected entry points or queues. The Control Script column displays the names of the call control scripts that are associated with the listed entry points or queues.

table provides details about the current routing strategies for the selected entry points or queues. The Flow column displays the names of the call flows associated with the listed entry points or queues.

View routing strategies by time zone

If you enable the Multiple Time Zone feature for your enterprise, you can configure entry points and queues with time zones. Time values that are used in the routing strategies are based on the time zone you configure for the entry point or queue. If you don't configure time zones with entry points and queues, the system uses the time zone that you configure for your enterprise (typically headquarters).

When you click your name button on the upper-right side of the Routing Strategy page, any time zones you configure for entry points or queues appear in a drop-down list.

If you do not enable the Multiple Time Zone feature for your enterprise, time values in routing strategies are based on the time zone you configure for your enterprise.

If the time zone observes daylight-saving time, the time adjusts automatically when the daylight-saving time changes.

On the Management Portal, click the gears icon in the upper-right corner to view the three or four Tab keyed settings panel.

Click the gears icon. Select a time zone from the Time Zone drop-down list.

Click Apply.

From the Management Portal navigation bar, choose Routing Strategy to view the routing strategies based on the selected time zone.

Create a routing strategy

Use this procedure to create new routing strategies. You can also create a new strategy by editing an existing strategy and changing the parameters in accordance with the requirements.

Before you create new strategies:

Always create an active strategy for every time interval. If you don't specify an active strategy for a time interval, the system uses the default. If there’s no default strategy, the last strategy that the system used may continue as the current strategy although it has expired.

You can easily create a new strategy from an existing strategy, change some settings, and save it as a new strategy.

You can have only one routing strategy for each chat or email entry point.

You can't have a global routing strategy for Chat and Email entry points.

You can't save changes to an active strategy when the scheduled dates or times conflict with an existing active strategy.

Before you begin

You must Create a Chat Template before you create a Chat Routing Strategy.

From the Management Portal navigation bar, choose Routing Strategy.

At the Routing Strategy page, choose Routing > Routing Strategies.

Choose an entry point from the Select Entry Point drop-down list.

Do one of the following in the list view:

Click New Strategy.

Global Routing Overrides only apply to Telephony channel type.

- OR -

Click the ellipsis button beside an existing routing strategy with Active status and click Copy.

Enter or modify the settings as described in the following tables.

You can create more than one strategy for a Telephony or Social channel.

Enter a name for the strategy, such as US Holiday or Weekends. You can’t edit this field after you save the strategy.

Enterprise Name

Shows the tenant name.

Status

Click Active if you want the strategy to become effective on the start date that you specify in the Start Date field.

Click Not Active if you want to save the strategy for future use or as a draft to work on later.

The status is always Active for chat and email routing strategies as you can configure only one routing strategy for each entry point or queue.

Call Distribution (only applicable to queues)

Add Group

If this is an inbound queue routing strategy, specify the teams that you must associate with this strategy and organize them into groups. See Specifying Call Distribution Settings for details. In addition, do the following (as described in Assigning Teams and Skill-Relaxation Settings to Groups):

If the routing type is Load Balance, assign percentage spreads or capacities to each team in Group 1. You can add more groups, but you can’t assign percentage spreads or capacities to the teams in those additional groups.

If the routing type is Priority, assign priorities. Assign a specific priority to only one team within the strategy (for example, only one team can have a priority of 1 assigned to it).

If the routing type is Skills Based, specify skill relaxation settings if appropriate.

If this is a routing strategy for an outdial queue, you must specify a team in the Call Distribution section. The specified team is only a placeholder and not used. In addition, be sure to create only one group for an outdial queue routing strategy.

Table 2. Settings applicable in routing strategy for Telephony and Social Channel Entry Point

Setting

Description

Entry Point

This field shows the entry point for which you’re creating the strategy. Select the entry points or queues that are associated with this routing strategy.

Queue

This field shows the queue for which you’re creating the strategy. Select the entry points or queues that are associated with this routing strategy.

Time Settings

Start Date


End Date

Click in each of these fields and use the calendar controls to specify the start date (the date strategy becomes effective) and the end date (the date strategy expires).

Start Time


End Time

Enter in 24-hour format (0000–2400) the time of day you want the strategy to start and end.

Day of Week

From the drop-down list:

Choose All Days if you want to schedule the strategy to run every day.

Choose Weekdays if you want to schedule the strategy to run from Monday through Friday only.

Choose Specific Days, and click on the icons representing weekdays if you want to schedule the strategy to run on specific days of the week.

Advanced Settings

Music on Hold

Select the name of the audio (.wav) file to play for calls when they arrive or are waiting in a queue. This isn’t applicable for email and chat routing strategies.

Maximum Time in Queue

For a standard Webex Contact Center queue routing strategy, specify the duration in seconds before a queued call routes to the overflow destination number provisioned for the queue. Cisco recommends setting this to 1800 (30 minutes) or to three times the average queue length during busy hours.

If this is an email routing strategy, set this to a high value to avoid overflow.

By default, this field adopts the value that is configured for the queue.

The cumulative specified queue time for all groups in the Call Distribution section of the routing strategy mustn’t be greater than the value specified here. See Specifying Call Distribution Settings for more information.

Retries within the Cisco Webex Teams

For a standard Webex Contact Center queue routing strategy, specify the maximum number of times to attempt sending a call to a team before the call gets routed to the next available team. The system makes no further attempts to send the call to that team again.

Exceptions:

This setting doesn’t apply to Skills Based routing strategies. For Skills Based routing, if the call is in the last group, the call overflows if the system finds no matching agent.

In a load balance strategy using percentage allocation, the system doesn't route a call to a second team when the first team is unavailable. Instead, the system retries the first team's DN according to the specified number of times for the strategy and then overflows the call.

Flag as Default Routing Strategy

Update as Default Routing Strategy

This setting is available only if you’re creating a new strategy or copying an existing one.

Set to Yes if you want this to be the default routing strategy for the specified time interval for this entry point or queue.

Set to No if you’re creating an exception to the default schedule, such as a holiday. A strategy that has no default flag overrides the default strategy. That is, the system checks first for a strategy that has no default flag, and if none exists, the system uses the default strategy.

Call Control

Virtual Agent

If a Virtual Agent is not active, you can use the Control Script.

If a Virtual Agent is active, all interactions begin with an automated conversational IVR in place of Control Scripts.

Before enabling the Virtual Agent feature, ensure that you have configured at least one Virtual Agent or chat template on the Cisco Webex Control Hub. To configure a Virtual Agent or chat template on the Control Hub, see the articles:

Configure Cisco Webex Contact Center Virtual Agent Cisco Webex Contact Center Chat Template.

Perform the following steps:

Select a Virtual Agent from the drop-down list.

Default Queue: Choose a default queue to escalate when self-service fails.

Exit Intent Mapping: Map the intents from Dialogflow virtual agents to queues. If the last intent causes the customer to exit the conversational IVR, then escalate the interaction (Telephony or Social Channel) to the specified queue. There’s a limit of 100 exit intents rules.

IF intent is: Select the intents that are defined in the Dialog flow.

THEN queue to: Select the queue to escalate.

The Add Condition option provides an OR logic when you add new intents.

This is applicable also for Social Channel (Facebook Messenger and SMS) routing rules.

Control Script

Select a call control script in the drop-down list. Every strategy must have an associated control script, which defines how the system handles calls. If appropriate, change the script's default parameters in the fields displayed. For more information, see Assigning Call Control Scripts and Parameters.

When you create an Inbound Queue and select a Control Script, then the Music in Queue setting gets reset.

If you’re editing an existing strategy, selecting a different call control script can significantly change how the system handles calls. It’s important that you’re clear on what you want to do before changing scripts or script parameters.

If this is an entry point strategy for Skills-Based routing, assign skills requirements as described in Assigning Skill Requirements to Incoming Calls.

Call Distribution

Business Metrics & Queue Escalation (applicable only to cross-ACD entry points)

If this routing strategy is for a cross-ACD entry point, organize the queues that the entry point serves into one or more groups and specify the call routing algorithm and applicable parameters as described in Specifying Call Distribution Settings.

Table 3. Settings applicable in routing strategy for Telephony Queue

Setting

Description

Queue

Select the queue that you plan to associate with this routing strategy.

Routing Type

This option is not available for proxy queues:

Longest Available Agent: The system routes calls to the agent who has been available for the longest time among all the agents on all the teams assigned to the strategy in the Call Distribution section.

Load Balance: The system routes calls to agents based on load-balancing conditions that you set in the Mode and Type fields and in the settings you specified in the Call Distribution section.

Mode: If you specified Load Balance in the Routing Type field, select one of the following values to specify how to handle the call load:

Percentage: The system routes calls to selected teams based on a percentage allocation that you specify for each team in the Call Distribution section. The percentage spread total must equal 100 across all teams selected for Group 1. For more information, see Specifying Call Distribution Settings.

Number: The system routes calls to selected teams based on the value you specify for each team in the Call Distribution section. This value reflects the call capacity for that team. After the system sends the specified number of calls to a particular team, it sends no additional calls to that team. In other words, this strategy allows you to specify an upper limit on the total number of calls the system sends to a particular team. This allows you to meet any contractual obligations not to exceed certain targets.

Type: If you specified Load Balance in the Routing Type field, select one of the following values in the Type field:

Dynamic: Calls routed dynamically result in a single virtual queue. The system queues callers for the longest available agent across all associated teams instead of routing them immediately at the time of call arrival to a team specified in the load balance strategy (based on active call conditions).

Static: The system routes calls to specific teams on the basis of a predefined percentage or numeric allocation at the time of call arrival. In static routing, the system assigns calls to a team based on the allowable number of calls specified for that team in the Call Distribution section (either a percentage or number of calls). In dynamic routing, the system assigns calls to a team based on the current allocation of calls among the teams based on the day's tally.

Priority Based: The system routes calls to agent teams based on a priority scheme that you set in the Call Distribution section.

Skills Based: The system routes calls to agents based on skill requirements that are specified in the Call Distribution section of the routing strategy for the entry point that sends calls to this queue. The Skills Based routing type is available only if your enterprise has the optional Skills-Based Routing feature provisioned.

When you select Skills Based as the routing type, two more settings appear for you to specify how to route a call when more than one agent has the required skill set:

Longest Available Agent: The system routes the call to the agent who has been available the longest.

Best Available Agent: When you select this setting, a Skill drop-down list appears. The system routes the call to the agent with the highest proficiency in the skill you select from the drop-down list.

Time Settings (These are read-only for proxy queues.)

Start Date


End Date

Click in each of these fields and use the calendar controls to specify the start date (the date the strategy becomes effective) and end date (the date the strategy expires).

Start Time


End Time

Enter in 24-hour format (0000–2400) the time of day you want the strategy to start and end.

Day of Week

From the drop-down list, select All Days if you want to schedule the strategy for every day or Weekdays if you want to schedule the strategy for Monday through Friday only.

Select each icon that represents a day on which you want to schedule the strategy.

Advanced Settings

Music on Hold

Select the name of the audio (.wav) file to play for calls when they arrive or are waiting in a queue. This isn’t applicable for email and chat routing strategies.

Maximum Time in Queue

If this is a standard Webex Contact Center queue routing strategy, enter the length of time to wait, in seconds, before the system routes a queued call to the overflow destination number provisioned for the queue. Cisco recommends setting this to 1800 (30 minutes) or to three times the average queue length during busy hours.

If this is an email routing strategy, set this parameter to a value high enough to avoid overflow.

By default, this field adopts the value provisioned for the queue.

The cumulative total queue time configured for all groups in the Call Distribution section of the routing strategy mustn’t exceed the value specified here. See Specifying Call Distribution Settings for more information.

Retries within the Team

If this is a standard Webex Contact Center queue routing strategy, specify the maximum number of attempts the system makes to send a call to a team before it routes the call to the next available team. The system makes no further attempts to send the call to that team again.

Exceptions:

This setting doesn’t apply to Skills-Based routing strategies. For Skills Based routing, if the call is in the last group, the call overflows if the system finds no matching agent. If the call is in any other group, and if it’s sent to an agent who doesn’t answer, the system continues to try matching other available agents any number of times, without regard to this setting.

In a load balance strategy using percentage allocation, the system does not route a call to a second team when the first team is unavailable. Instead, the system retries the first team's DN for the number of times that are specified for the strategy, and then overflows the call.

Flag as Default Routing Strategy

Update as Default Routing Strategy

This setting is available only if you’re creating a new strategy or copying an existing one.

Set to Yes if you want this to be the default routing strategy for the specified time interval for this entry point or queue.

Set to No if you’re creating an exception to the default schedule, such as a holiday. A strategy that isn’t configured as default overrides the default strategy. That is, the system first checks for a strategy that isn’t flagged as default, and if none exists, the default strategy is used.

Call Control

Control Script

Select a call control script from the drop-down list. Every strategy must have a control script associated with it, which defines how calls are handled. If appropriate, change the script's default parameters in the fields displayed. For more information, see Assigning Call Control Scripts and Parameters.

When you create an Inbound Queue, if a Control Script is selected, then the Music in Queue setting gets reset.

If you’re editing an existing strategy, selecting a different call control script can significantly change how calls are handled. It’s important that you’re clear on what you want to do before changing scripts or script parameters.

If this is an entry point strategy for Skills-Based routing, assign skills requirements as described in Assigning Skill Requirements to Incoming Calls.

Table 4. General settings applicable in routing strategy

Setting

Description

General Settings

Enter a name for the strategy, such as US Holiday or Weekends. You can’t edit this field after you save the strategy.

Enterprise Name

Shows the tenant name.

Status

Click Active if you want the strategy to become effective on the start date that you specify in the Start Date field.

Click Not Active if you want to save the strategy for future use or as a draft to work on later.

The status is always Active for chat and email routing strategies as you can configure only one routing strategy for each entry point or queue.

Table 5. Settings applicable in routing strategy for Telephony

Setting

Description

Time Settings (These are read-only for proxy queues.)

Start Date


End Date

Click in each of these fields and use the calendar controls to specify the start date (the date that the strategy becomes effective) and the end date (the date that the strategy expires).

Start Time


End Time

Enter in 24-hour format (0000–2400) the time of day that you want the strategy to start and end.

Day of Week

From the drop-down list, choose All Days if you want to schedule the strategy for every day or Weekdays if you want to schedule the strategy for Monday through Friday only.

Click each icon that represents a day on which you want to schedule the strategy.

Advanced Settings

Music on Hold

Select the name of the audio (.wav) file to play for calls when an agent puts a call on hold. Music in Queue (MIQ) is handled from Flow. When a contact is queued and if no agent is available, the customer is engaged with MIQ.

Call Control

Flag as Default Routing Strategy

Update as Default Routing Strategy

Choose the Routing Strategy. This setting is available only if you create a new strategy or copy an existing one.

Set to Yes if you want this routing strategy to be the default routing strategy for the specified time interval for this entry point or queue.

Set to No to create an exception to the default schedule, such as a holiday. This strategy overrides the default strategy. That is, the system first checks for a strategy that isn’t flagged as default, and if none exists, the system uses the default strategy.

Various routing strategies may be configured for a given time interval, but only one can be considered the current routing strategy. Webex Contact Center uses the following order of preference to decide the current routing strategy at any given time:

1. Global Routing Overrides

2. Default Global Routing Overrides

3. Routing Strategy

4. Default Routing Strategy

Select the flow from the drop-down list.

Email Account

You can add only one email account for each entry point. You can edit or delete the email account using the icons beside the email account name.

Add Email Account

Click the Add Email Account button to open the Add Email Account dialog box. Enter the following details:

Email Address:
Enter the email address to contact your organization.
Inbound Server Settings:
Enter the following server details for incoming emails:
  • Incoming Protocol

    Incoming Host

    Inbound Encryption

    Inbound Port Number

Outbound Server Settings:
Enter the following server details for outgoing emails:
  • SMTP Server

    Outbound Encryption

    Outbound Port Number

Server Authentication:
Enter the username and password to connect to the email account.

 

Ensure you use only secure access to mail servers, such as:

SMTP, IMAP, or POP over SSL

SMTP, IMAP, or POP over TLS

Mandatory steps to use a Gmail account for an email channel are as follows:

Enable the IMAP option if you provide IMAP server to fetch mails in the server in the Gmail settings.

Enable the Less Secure Apps flag in the Gmail account settings.

Disable the captcha by logging into https://g.co/allowaccess.

Update the credentials in the routing strategy and click Save.

Advanced Email Account Settings:
Enter the following advanced settings for the email account:
  • Maximum Attachment Size

    Number of Attachment Limit

    Mail Delay

    Maximum Messages/Cycle

    Email Routing Rules

    You can add up to 20 email routing rules. Use the icon beside the rule to edit or delete the rule.

    Routing Rule

    Click the Add Routing Rule button to open the Add Routing Rule dialog box. Enter the following details to add a rule:

    Routing Rule Name:
    Enter the name for the rule.
    IF Email Subject Contains:
    Enter the text in the email subject to set the condition for the rule. You can add up to 10 conditions using the AND or OR operators. However, you can mix the AND and OR operators in a rule.
    Then:
    Select the email queue to which the email is queued if it satisfies any condition.

    The email can remain in a queue for a maximum of 240 days. After 240 days, the system removes the email from Webex Contact Center.

    Default Routing Rule

    Select an email queue for the default routing rule in case none of the defined rules satisfy the criteria.

    Table 7. Settings applicable in routing strategy for Chat

    Setting

    Description

    Chat Routing Experience

    Chat Template

    Shows that the name of the Chat Template used. To edit, you must log in to Control Hub.

    Chat Reason Mapping Details

    Associate the preconfigured chat reasons. For more information, see Create a Chat+Callback Template.

Modify a Routing Strategy

Before you modify a routing strategy, be aware of the following:

Although you cannot copy the current strategy, you can modify any of its settings except those that affect execution time or date. These changes have no effect on the recurring scheduled version of the strategy.

When you modify the current strategy, your changes take effect immediately for new calls and remain in effect until the current strategy ends. If there are calls in the queue when the modifications are made, the existing queued calls follow the original strategy unless you check the Apply changes to current calls in queue check box to the right of the Save button.

Changes made to the current Email or Chat entry point routing strategy are also applied to the corresponding active routing strategies.

When you modify a strategy that is not the current strategy, your changes take effect according to the scheduled times specified in the strategy.

From the Management Portal navigation bar, choose Routing Strategy.

On the Routing Strategy page, choose an entry point or queue from the Select Entry Point/Queue drop-down list.

Click the ellipsis button beside the strategy that you want to modify and choose Edit.

If you are modifying a global routing strategy:

Click the Routing button on the menu bar, select Global Routing Strategies, select the Entry Point or Queue button on the upper-left side page.

If you are modifying a strategy for cross-ACD entry points or for proxy queues, set the CC-one ACD field to False.

Click the horizontal ellipsis button to the left of a the strategy you want to modify and select Edit.

Make your changes. For information about each setting, see the setting descriptions table in Create a routing strategy.

If you modify the current strategy and want the changes to apply to calls currently in queue, check the Apply changes to current calls in queue check box on the lower right side of the page. If you don't check this check box, the changes only apply to new calls.

Click Save to save your changes.

Routing Strategies Deletion and Restoration

When you delete a routing strategy, the system moves the strategy to the Deleted Routing Strategies or Deleted Global Routing Overrides page where it can be restored or permanently deleted within 30 days. After 30 days, the system permanently deletes the routing strategy.

When you delete a current strategy, the system activates the next strategy scheduled for that time period. Do not delete a current strategy unless an alternate strategy is available.

Delete a Standard Routing Strategy

From the Management Portal navigation bar, choose Routing Strategy.

On the Routing Strategy page, choose an entry point or queue from the Select Entry Point/Queue drop-down list.

Click the ellipsis button beside the routing strategy that you want to delete and click Delete.

Click Yes to confirm.

The system moves the strategy to the Deleted Routing Strategies page where it can be restored or permanently deleted (see Restore or Permanently Delete a Routing Strategy).

Restore or Permanently Delete a Routing Strategy

From the Management Portal navigation bar, choose Routing Strategy.

On the Routing Strategy page, click Deleted Strategies.

Choose an entry point or queue from the Select Entry Point/Queue drop-down list.

Click the ellipsis button beside the strategy that you want to either restore or permanently delete and do one of the following:

To permanently delete the strategy, click Delete. Click Yes to confirm.

- OR -

To restore the strategy, click Restore.

If you are restoring a strategy, modify the settings as required, and click Restore.

You cannot restore a deleted Chat Entry Point Routing Strategy, if a Routing Strategy is assigned to the Entry Point.

If any settings conflict with an existing routing strategy, a message informs you. In this case, you must modify the settings before you can restore the strategy.

Audio on Hold

When a call is queued on the network, an audio file continues to play until the call is distributed to a team with available capacity. If the call is queued for longer than the length of the audio content, the audio file loops back and restarts from the beginning.

We recommend that the audio file include a brief delay message followed by music. The message should announce the name of the associated queue, instruct the caller to hold for the next available agent, and include a warning that calls may be monitored.

You can record one audio file for each strategy, so the message can vary by time of day, day of week, holiday schedule, and other factors.

Working with Global Routing Overrides

A global routing override is a routing strategy that applies to one or more Telephony entry points. When a call arrives at an entry point, the routing engine checks whether a Global Routing Override exists for that entry point. If a Global Routing Override exists, it becomes the current routing strategy for the entry point, overriding any standard routing strategies associated with that entry point.

Creating a global routing override enables you to change the routing strategies quickly and easily for many entry points simultaneously in urgent situations, rather than changing each routing strategy individually.

Global routing overrides operate in the Tenant time zone.

View global routing overrides

Use this procedure to view a list of global routing overrides.

Before you begin

You require Administrator access privileges to perform this procedure.

From the Management Portal navigation bar, choose Routing Strategy.

The Routing Strategy page opens.

From the menu bar, choose Routing > Global Routing Overrides.

The Global Routing Overrides page opens to display the Global Routing Overrides List. This page displays all existing global routing overrides. You can use the Search function at the top-right of the List area to find your target. See Global routing override parameters for a description of the parameters that are visible on the page.

(Optional) To export the list of global routing overrides for data analysis, click the ellipsis button near the top-right side of the page and click Excel or CSV.

(Optional) To display the details of a routing overrides or to edit it, click the ellipsis button at the left of the listed overrides and then click Edit. See Edit a global routing override for further detail on editing a routing override.

Create global routing overrides

You can change the contact handling flow for multiple telephony entry points at the same time, such as for a holiday or emergency situation. Preconfigure one or more flows that you can apply quickly as an override when needed. When it becomes active, the global routing override only applies to new calls, while active calls follow the current entry point routing strategies.

By default, you create global routing overrides in the Tenant time zone. All the data that are displayed on the Global Routing Overrides page or dashboard are based on the Tenant time zone.

You can choose between two methods to create a global routing override:

Create a global routing override

Create a global routing override from a copy

Create a global routing override

Use this procedure to create a global routing override.

Before you begin

You require Administrator access privileges to perform this procedure.

From the Management Portal navigation bar, choose Routing Strategy.

The Routing Strategy page opens.

From the menu bar, choose Routing > Global Routing Overrides.

The Global Routing Overrides page opens to display the Global Routing Overrides List. This page shows all existing global routing overrides.

From the Global Routing Overrides page, click + New Override.

The Create Global Routing Override page opens.

Configure the new global routing override as described in Global routing override parameters.

Click Save or Cancel.

Create a global routing override from a copy

Use this procedure to create a global routing override from a copy of an existing override.

Before you begin

You require Administrator access privileges to perform this procedure.

From the Management Portal navigation bar, choose Routing Strategy.

The Routing Strategy page opens.

From the menu bar, choose Routing > Global Routing Overrides.

The Global Routing Overrides page opens to display the Global Routing Overrides List. This page shows all existing global routing overrides.

Locate the global routing override you want to copy to create a new override. You can use the Search function at the top-right of the Global Routing Overrides List area to find your target.

Click the ellipsis button to the left of a listed override, and then click Copy.

The Copy Global Routing Override page opens.

Change the settings as required, and in accordance with instructions provided in Global routing override parameters.

Click Save or Cancel.

Edit a global routing override

Use this procedure to edit an existing global routing override.

Before you begin

You require Administrator access privileges to perform this procedure.

From the Management Portal navigation bar, choose Routing Strategy.

The Routing Strategy page opens.

From the menu bar, choose Routing > Global Routing Overrides.

The Global Routing Overrides page opens to display the Global Routing Overrides List. This page shows all existing global routing overrides.

Locate the global routing override you want to edit. You can use the Search function at the top-right of the Global Routing Overrides List area to find your target.

Click the ellipsis button at the left of the entry point you want to modify, and then click Edit.

The Overwrite Global Routing Override page opens.

Edit the routing override parameters in accordance with the information provided in Global routing override parameters.

Click Save or Cancel.

Global routing override parameters

The following sections describe the parameters you see on the various pages that constitute the global routing override user interface.

Parameters for Global Routing Overrides page

The following table lists and describes the parameters you see in the Global Routing Overrides List area on the Global Routing Overrides page.

Column

Description

Displays the name you assign to the override. You can't change the override name after you create it.

Displays the system-assigned number of the override.

Status

Indicates the status of the override.

Current (appears in Red) means this is a snapshot of the currently running override. You can't copy the current override, but you can modify any setting that doesn't affect execution time or date. Changes to the override don't affect the recurring scheduled version of the override.

You can delete the current override, but don't delete it before you create a different override for the same time interval. If you delete an override without having another one in place, the last override used by the system becomes the default override although the start and end times and dates have expired. If this occurs, either create a new override for the current time period, or copy the default override and correct the time settings.

Active means that the override is in effect at the specified start time on the specified start date. This is the default status.

Not Active means the override isn't in effect regardless of the specified start time and date. This status lets you save an override for future use or as a draft to continue with later.

Default

Indicates whether the global routing override is the default routing strategy (Yes) or isn't the default routing strategy (No).

Repetition

Specifies whether the override repeats daily or only on specific days of the week.

Start Date

Displays the date on which the override starts.

End Date

Displays the date on which the override ends.

Start Time

Displays the time at which the override starts (in 24-hour format) for any given day in the specified date range.

End Time

Displays the time at which the override ends (in 24-hour format) for any given day in the specified date range.

Time Zone

Displays the Tenant time zone.

Global routing overrides operate in the Tenant time zone.

Lists the associated call flows when a routing override is executing.

Parameters for Create, Overwrite, Copy, and Restore Gobal Routing Override pages

The following table lists and describes the parameters that you see on the:

Create Global Routing Override page

Overwrite Global Routing Override page

Copy Global Routing Override page

Restore Global Routing Override page

Use this information to configure new or copied overrides and edit existing ones.

Parameter

Description

General Settings

Enter the name for the global routing override. You can't change the name after it's created.

If you copy an override, you can change the name of the copy.

Enterprise Name

Displays the name of the Tenant.

Channel Type

Displays the only valid channel type: Telephony

Entry Points or Queues

This field appears only if you are creating or copying a global routing override.

Choose the entry points or queues to which the global routing override applies.

Routing Type

This option is available only for queues. It is not available for proxy queues.

Longest Available Agent: The system routes calls to the agent who has been available for the longest time among all the agents on all the teams assigned to the strategy in the Call Distribution section.

Load Balance: The system routes calls to agents based on load-balancing conditions that you set in the Mode and Type fields and in the settings you specified in the Call Distribution section.

Mode: If you specified Load Balance in the Routing Type field, select one of the following values to specify how to handle the call load:

Percentage: The system routes calls to selected teams based on a percentage allocation that you specify for each team in the Call Distribution section. The percentage spread total must equal 100 across all teams selected for Group 1. For more information, see Specifying Call Distribution Settings.

Number: The system routes calls to selected teams based on the value you specify for each team in the Call Distribution section. This value reflects the call capacity for that team. After the system sends the specified number of calls to a particular team, it sends no additional calls to that team. In other words, this strategy allows you to specify an upper limit on the total number of calls the system sends to a particular team. This allows you to meet any contractual obligations not to exceed certain targets.

Type: If you specified Load Balance in the Routing Type field, select one of the following values in the Type field:

Dynamic: Calls routed dynamically result in a single virtual queue. The system queues callers for the longest available agent across all associated teams instead of routing them immediately at the time of call arrival to a team specified in the load balance strategy (based on active call conditions).

Static: The system routes calls to specific teams on the basis of a predefined percentage or numeric allocation at the time of call arrival. In static routing, the system assigns calls to a team based on the allowable number of calls specified for that team in the Call Distribution section (either a percentage or number of calls). In dynamic routing, the system assigns calls to a team based on the current allocation of calls among the teams based on the day's tally.

Priority Based: The system routes calls to agent teams based on a priority scheme that you set in the Call Distribution section.

Skills Based: The system routes calls to agents based on skill requirements that are specified in the Call Distribution section of the routing strategy for the entry point that sends calls to this queue. The Skills Based routing type is available only if your enterprise has the optional Skills-Based Routing feature provisioned.

When you select Skills Based as the routing type, two more settings appear for you to specify how to route a call when more than one agent has the required skill set:

Longest Available Agent: The system routes the call to the agent who has been available the longest.

Best Available Agent: When you select this setting, a Skill drop-down list appears. The system routes the call to the agent with the highest proficiency in the skill you select from the drop-down list.

Status

Click the Status toggle button to set the status of the global routing override to either Active or Not Active.

When set to Active, the routing override activates and deactivates on the dates and at the times specified in the related Start and End Date and Start and End Time fields.

Time Settings

Time zone

Displays the Tenant time zone.

Global routing overrides operate in the Tenant time zone.

Start Date

End Date

Click in each of these fields and use the calendar controls to specify the start date (the date the global routing override becomes effective) and end date (the date the global routing override expires).

Start Time

End Time

Enter in 24-hour format (0000–2400) the time of day you want the global routing override to start and end.

Day of Week

From the drop-down list:

Choose All Days if you want to schedule the global routing override to run every day.

Choose Weekdays if you want to schedule the global routing override to run from Monday through Friday only.

Choose Specific Days, and click the icons representing weekdays if you want to schedule the global routing override to run on specific days of the week.

Advanced Settings

Music on Hold

From the drop-down list, choose the name of the audio (.wav) file to play for calls when an agent puts a call on hold. Music in Queue (MIQ) is handled from Flow. When a contact is queued and if no agent is available, the customer is engaged with MIQ.

Maximum Time in Queue

If this is a standard Webex Contact Center queue routing strategy, enter the length of time to wait, in seconds, before the system routes a queued call to the overflow destination number provisioned for the queue. Cisco recommends setting this to 1800 (30 minutes) or to three times the average queue length during busy hours.

If this is an email routing strategy, set this parameter to a value high enough to avoid overflow.

By default, this field adopts the value provisioned for the queue.

The cumulative total queue time configured for all groups in the Call Distribution section of the routing strategy mustn’t exceed the value specified here. See Specifying Call Distribution Settings for more information.

Retries within the Team

If this is a standard Webex Contact Center queue routing strategy, specify the maximum number of attempts the system makes to send a call to a team before it routes the call to the next available team. The system makes no further attempts to send the call to that team again.

Exceptions:

This setting doesn’t apply to Skills-Based routing strategies. For Skills Based routing, if the call is in the last group, the call overflows if the system finds no matching agent. If the call is in any other group, and if it’s sent to an agent who doesn’t answer, the system continues to try matching other available agents any number of times, without regard to this setting.

In a load balance strategy using percentage allocation, the system does not route a call to a second team when the first team is unavailable. Instead, the system retries the first team's DN for the number of times that are specified for the strategy, and then overflows the call.

Flag as Default Routing Strategy

This setting is available only if you create a new override or copy an existing one.

Set to Yes if you want this global routing override to be the default global routing override for the specified time interval for this entry point or queue.

Set to No to create an exception to the default schedule, such as a holiday. This override overrides the default override. That is, the system first checks for a override that isn’t flagged as default, and if none exists, the system uses the default override.

You can configure different routing strategies for a given time interval. However, Webex Contact Center prioritizes only one routing strategy. Webex Contact Center uses the following order of prioritization to decide the current routing strategy at any given time:

1. Global Routing Overrides

2. Default Global Routing Overrides

3. Routing Strategy

4. Default Routing Strategy

Call Control

Control Script

Select a call control script from the drop-down list. Every strategy must have a control script associated with it, which defines how calls are handled. If appropriate, change the script's default parameters in the fields displayed. For more information, see Assigning Call Control Scripts and Parameters.

When you create an Inbound Queue, if a Control Script is selected, then the Music in Queue setting gets reset.

If you’re editing an existing strategy, selecting a different call control script can significantly change how calls are handled. It’s important that you’re clear on what you want to do before changing scripts or script parameters.

If this is an entry point strategy for Skills-Based routing, assign skills requirements as described in Assigning Skill Requirements to Incoming Calls.

Choose a flow to override the contact handling behavior for the selected entry points during the configured time period.

Call Distribution

This parameter applies to queues only. It does not apply to proxy queues.

If this is a standard queue routing strategy, specify which teams you want to associate with this strategy and organize them into groups. See “Specifying Call Distribution Settings” on page 166 for details. In addition, do the following (as described in “Assigning Teams and Skill-Relaxation Settings to Groups” beginning on page 168):

• If the routing type is Load Balance, assign percentage spreads or capacities to each team in Group 1. You can add additional groups, but you cannot assign percentage spreads or capacities to the teams in those additional groups.

• If the routing type is Priority, assign priorities. Note that a specific priority can be assigned to only one team within the strategy (for example, only one team can have a priority of 1 assigned to it).

• If the routing type is Skills Based, specify skill relaxation settings if appropriate.

If this is a routing strategy for an outdial queue, you must specify a team in the Call Distribution section. The specified team is only a placeholder and is not used. In addition, be sure to create only one group for an outdial queue routing strategy.

Delete a global routing override

Use this procedure to delete a global routing strategy.

Before you begin

You require Administrator access privileges to complete this procedure.

From the Management Portal navigation bar, choose Routing Strategy.

The Routing Strategy page opens.

From the menu bar, choose Routing > Global Routing Overrides.

The Global Routing Overrides page opens to display the Global Routing Overrides List. This page shows all existing global routing overrides. See Global routing override parameters for a description of the elements that are visible on the page.

Locate the global routing override you want to edit. You can use the Search function at the top-right of the Global Routing Overrides List area to find your target.

Click the ellipsis button to the left of the routing override you want to delete, then click Delete. In the confirmation dialog box that opens, click OK.

The routing override moves to the Deleted Global Routing Overrides page where it awaits restoration or permanent deletion. For more information, see Restore or Permanently Delete a Routing Strategy.

Restore or permanently delete a global routing override

Use this procedure to restore or permanently delete a global routing override.

Before you begin

You require Administrator access privileges to perform this procedure.

From the Management Portal navigation bar, choose Routing Strategy.

The Routing Strategy page opens.

From the menu bar, choose Routing > Global Routing Override.

The Global Routing Overrides page opens to display the Global Routing Overrides List. This page shows all existing global routing overrides. See Global routing override parameters for a description of the parameters that are visible on the page.

Click the Deleted Global Routing Overrides button at the top-right side of the page.

The Deleted Global Routing Overrides page opens displaying a list of deleted routing overrides, if any exist.

In the Deleted Global Routing Overrides List view, locate the routing override you want to either restore or permanently delete. You can use the Search function at the far-right of the page to locate your target.

Click the ellipsis button to the left of the routing override you want to either restore or permanently delete and do one of the following:

(Optional) To permanently delete the override, click the Delete icon. Click Yes in the confirmation dialog box to commit.

The Deleted Global Routing Overrides page immediately refreshes, excluding the deleted routing override.

(Optional) To restore the override, click the Restore icon. Click Yes in the confirmation dialog box to commit.

The Restore Global Routing Override page appears, displaying the settings for the routing override.

You can change some of the settings in accordance with the information that is provided in Global routing override parameters.

Click Restore to save changes and confirm reactivation of the override.

If any settings conflict with an existing routing override, a message informs you. In this case, you must modify the settings before the override restores.

The Deleted Global Routing Overrides page immediately refreshes, excluding the restored routing override.

Flow Designer Overview

Flow Designer provides an interface to create real-time flows to meet your organizational requirements. Pre-defined activities related to call handling and flow control serve as building blocks for flow creation. The drag-and-drop interface of the Flow Designer provides easy configuration of the flow components. You can set the properties of each activity that influences flow execution. You can also configure variables and expressions to define flow logic.

Getting Started

Before you use Flow Designer, you must provision several entities from the Webex Contact Center Management Portal and the Control Hub. You can use these entities directly, as part of Flow Designer (for example, Queues and Audio Files), or indirectly to enable contact routing (for example, Call Distribution in Queue Routing Strategies).

You must configure the following items before you build flows in Flow Designer:

Entry Points

Queue

Agents

User Profile

Desktop Profile

Teams

Virtual Agent

Audio Files

Key Terminology

The following terms are referenced in this chapter:

Activity​: A single step of a flow, as represented by a node in the Flow Designer interface. For example, play a message or make an HTTP request. This is the element that is dragged and dropped by the user into a flow.

For activity properties which are drop-down based, search filter is enabled by default. If there’s a higher number of options available in a drop-down list that is beyond the default limit, you can enter a keyword to search and choose the desired option from the autopopulated result.

Event​: An internal or external stimulus to the system which may cause a flow or flow path to be executed. These may be Kafka messages, external HTTP requests, user actions, etc.​ Flow Designer is an event-driven application that executes flows in response to events. If and when certain events are triggered, flows are automatically executed as configured.

Flow​: A user-defined sequence of activities that are executed in response to an event.

Link: A link is the arrow that connects one activity to another. It indicates the direction of the flow and dependency between events. To delete a link and break the connection between two activities, click on the link to reveal the delete icon, and proceed to delete the line.

Access the Flow Designer Application

Flow Designer uses Single Sign-on (SSO) using Cisco Common Identity. If you are already logged in to the Cisco Webex Control Hub or the Cisco Webex Contact Center Management Portal and when you attempt to access Flow Designer, you will automatically gain access to the application. If not, the system prompts you to enter your SSO credentials in the standard login screen.

Before you begin

To access the Flow Designer application, you must have a Premium Agent License and a user profile that has rights to edit the Routing Strategies module.

From the Management Portal navigation bar, choose Routing Strategies > Routing Strategies > Flow > Create New Flow.

Flow Designer Browser Requirements

The following table lists the supported browsers.

Browser

Microsoft Windows 10

Microsoft Windows 11

Mac OS X

Chromebook

Google Chrome

76.0.3809

103.0.5060.114

76.0.3809 or higher

76.0.3809 or higher

Flow Designer Layout

Activity Library

The Activity Library comprises the list of activities associated with Flow Designer. The user can drag and drop the activities to the Main Flow or Event Flows canvases to design their flows. The Activity Library has the following sections:

CALL HANDLING: You use Call Handling activities to build flows that handle voice interactions in the contact center. They are specific to the use case of handling calls through Interactive Voice Response (IVR) and virtual or human agents.

FLOW CONTROL: Flow Control activities are agnostic to Flow Type, and you use them to control the logic in the flow regardless of the use case.

You can hide and expand the Activity Library as desired to increase working space on the canvas between configurations.

Canvas, Main Flow, and Event Flows

The Canvas is the gray working space on which you drop the activities. You use the controls in the bottom-left side of the screen to move around the canvas and zoom in and zoom out. There are no constraints on the flow size or canvas usage.

Flow Designer has two tabs that allow extra canvas space:

Main Flow

Event Flows

These tabs logically separate different paths of your flow and create a more organized workspace.

Main Flow

Use the Main Flow tab to script the primary flow based on the Trigger Event defined in the Start Flow activity. In the Main Flow tab, you configure the end-to-end experience for a caller, starting from the Cisco Unified IP Interactive Voice Response (IVR) menu, until opting out or wrapping up the call. The flow contains predictable steps that the system executes in a sequence.

Event Flows

At any point during the execution of the Main Flow, the system triggers events that interrupt the Main Flow. For example, when an agent answers a phone call, the caller’s experience in the queue is interrupted. If you want to define unique behavior for when these events are triggered, you can script optional Event Flows. Event Flows are asynchronous to the Main Flow. You can’t predict if or when an Event Flow will be triggered. For this reason, Event Flows are optional and are intended to extend the Main Flow functionality.

You can configure multiple event handling flows in the Event Flows canvas. Each event flow must have a unique start and end, with no shared activities.

For more information on event handlers, see Events.

Zoom Toolbar

The zoom toolbar in Flow Designer has Global Properties, zoom-in, and zoom-out buttons to display the Global Properties pane, and minimize or maximize the contents in the canvas.

Global Properties: Click the icon to open the Global Properties pane. For more information, see Properties Pane.

Zoom-in: Click the icon on the toolbar. When you reach the maximum limit, the button is disabled.

Zoom-out: Click the icon on the toolbar. When you reach the maximum limit, the button is disabled.

Copy and paste activities: Click the icon on the toolbar to copy and paste selected activities on the canvas. For more information, see Copy and Paste Activities.

Properties Pane

Flow Designer has a Properties pane that appears on the right of the application. You set the parameters for either the flow (Global Properties) or for a selected activity. You can hide and expand the pane to increase working space on the canvas between configurations.

The Global Properties pane displays by default when the Flow loads. Click the icon to open the Global Properties pane. The icon helps you to open and close the Properties Pane when you work on flows. You can also click anywhere on the empty canvas to return to the Global Properties pane view. The Global Properties pane is not visible when you select an activity.

The following configurations are contained in the Global Properties pane:

(Optional) Provide a flow description.

Manage custom and predefined variables. For more information about flow variables, see Set Variable.

View Flow History information, including the owner, last edited date, and Flow Version number.

Click the icon to close the Global Properties pane.

There is currently no version control feature. The Flow Version is the number of times that the flow has been published.

Header Pane

The Header pane displays the name of your flow, which dynamically updates when you edit the flow name from the Global Properties pane. The header panel has a Sign Out button. Flow Designer allows you to save an existing flow draft if you wish to return and continue working later.

To save your drafts of the flows or to close the application, click Save Flow and Sign Out in the top-right corner of the application.

Footer Pane

The Footer Pane has the following:

Autosave Enabled: The left of the Footer pane indicates that Autosave is enabled. Flows are saved to avoid data loss, and an error notification appears if autosave is suspended.

There is a scenario in which data could be lost if you close the browser window while data is autosaving. We recommend you wait a few seconds after you make changes to your flow before you close the browser.

Application Version: The left of the Footer pane displays the version of the Flow Designer application. You can use the version for troubleshooting errors in the Flow Designer.

Flow Validation: Flow Validation checks if there are errors in a flow’s structure that will prevent the flow from working. You can enable the validation toggle on the right of the Footer Pane at any time. By default, validation is not running on the back end, so no errors display in the window. When the toggle is enabled, the backend validation commences and any errors in the flow are surfaced to the UI. For more information about Flow Validation, see Validate a Flow.

Flow Publishing: Before you can publish a flow, you must validate the flow and resolve any errors. The Publish button is disabled if the Validation toggle is off. Once validation is enabled, the Publish button remains disabled if there are any active errors in the flow. For more information about Flow Publishing, see Publish a Flow.

Flow Designer Activities and Events

Activities in Call Handling

Play Music

The Play Music activity plays music when a call arrives or is in a queue. You can choose an audio file to play, when you place a caller on hold.

You can configure an error-handling path (Undefined Error) to handle system errors that may occur during flow execution. For more information, see Error Handling.

The following sections enable you to configure the Play Music activity:

General Settings

Music Settings

General Settings

Parameter

Description

Activity Label

Enter a name for the activity.

Activity Description

(Optional) Enter a description for the activity.

Music Settings

If any of the ordered list inputs is empty, the system throws a Flow Error. Resolve these errors before publishing the flow.

Parameter

Description

Static Audio FileChoose this option if you wish to configure the static audio to be played from the Resources page in the Management Portal.

Choose the name of the audio (.wav) file from the Music File drop-down list.

For more information, see Upload an Audio Resource File.

Dynamic Audio File

Choose this option if you wish to configure the audio to be played dynamically within a single flow. For example, you can configure this variable to play the audio prompt in multiple languages based on the customer's preference during the interaction.

To configure the dynamic audio file, enter the audio variable value in the form of a pebble expression. For more information, see Pebble Template Syntax.

The variable value must match the name of the .wav file that is uploaded to the Management Portal.

Start Offset

Set the duration in seconds for the music file to play.

For example, assume that your music file is 60 seconds long. If the Start Offset is set as 45 seconds and the music duration is 30 seconds, the file plays the last 15 seconds and loops back to the start and plays the first 15 seconds. 0 is the start time.

You can enter the start offset as a static number (example: 20) or an expression (example: {{MusicLength + 20}}).

Ensure that your input has numeric values.

Music Duration

Specify the duration in seconds for the selected music file. (For example, 30 seconds).

You can enter the music duration as a static number (example: 20) or an expression (example: {{MusicLength + 20}}).

Ensure that your input has numeric values. If the Start Offset and the Music Duration are longer than the file length, the music loops back to the start and continues to play.

When you include the Play Music activity before the HTTP Request activity in a call flow, the HTTP request executes only after the audio is played fully.

Feedback

Configure the Feedback activity to initiate post-call surveys (powered by Webex Experience Management) to collect feedback from callers. The following types of surveys are available:

IVR Post Call Surveys: Configure the Feedback activity in the Event Flows canvas in the Flow Designer, after theAgentDisconnected event. Depending on the setup in Webex Experience Management, the contact center plays an IVR survey to the callers.

The caller uses the keypad to answer the survey. If the caller partially answers the survey by not responding within the configured timeout duration or by providing invalid input, the contact center sends partial survey responses to Webex Experience Management.

Ensure that you use the Disconnect Contact activity after the Feedback activity to end the IVR call.

Email or SMS Post Call Surveys: Configure the Feedback activity in the Event Flows tab in the Flow Designer after the PhoneContactEnded event. Depending on the dispatch policy rules set up in Webex Experience Management, the contact center sends a survey to callers over email or SMS.

When you design a flow, a Consult interaction can't include a Post Call Survey Feedback activity.

You can configure an error-handling path (Undefined Error) to handle system errors that may occur during flow execution. For more information, see Event Flows.

The following sections enable you to configure the Feedback activity:

General Settings

Survey

Language Settings

Customer Information

Variable Passing

Advanced Settings

General Settings

Parameter

Description

Activity Label

Enter the name for the activity.

Activity Description

(Optional) Enter a description for the activity.

Survey

To administer a survey to the customer, select from a list of questionnaires for Voice, or dispatches for Email or SMS surveys. The questionnaires and invitations that are configured in Webex Experience Management are available in the list.

Table 1. Survey Methods
Parameter Description

Voice Based

To play an inline survey to the customer, do the following:

Choose the Voice Based radio button.

Choose the voice-based survey from the drop-down list.

Email/SMS Based

To provide an offline Email/SMS survey to the customer, do the following:

Choose the Email/SMS Based radio button.

Choose the Email or SMS-based survey from the drop-down list.

Language Settings

Manage the language in which the customer experiences the survey. If the language is not supported in Webex Experience Management, the fallback language is English (US). For more information, see Webex Experience Management Language Support.

Table 2. Language Settings
Parameter Description

Override Language Settings

Enable the Override Language Settings toggle button to set any custom language for Webex Experience Management.

Set Language: Select the preferred language from the drop-down list. The drop-down list displays the languages that Webex Experience Management supports.

If the Override Language Settings toggle button is not enabled, the Global_Language variable is used to define the default Webex Experience Management settings. For more information, see Global Variables in Flow Designer.

Customer Information

Specify the customer information to be passed along with the prefills that Webex Experience Management sends to capture the survey response. Depending on the dispatch configurations set in Webex Experience Management, the contact center sends the prefill information.

Table 3. Customer Information
Parameter Description

Customer ID

(Optional) Select a unique identifier for the customer from the drop-down list.

Email

(Optional) Select the email of the customer from the drop-down list.

Phone Number

(Optional) Select the phone number of the customer from the drop-down list.
Variable Passing

Specify the additional variables as custom prefills that are passed (in addition to survey responses) from Webex Contact Center to Webex Experience Management.

Table 4. Key-Value Parameters

Parameter

Description

Key-Value

Indicates the optional variable parameters that the contact center passes to Webex Experience Management.

The Key and Value columns allow you to enter a variable name and the associated value. The variable value can be either a string, an integer, or an expression with double curly braces syntax (in case of flow variable). For more information, see Custom Flow Variables.

To add a variable parameter, click Add New. This adds a row where you can enter the respective key-value pair.
  • To pass any custom variable from contact center, the administrator must create a custom prefill question in Webex Experience Management.

    For more information on configuring a survey questionnaire, see Questionnaires in Webex Experience Management Documentation.

    The Key parameter in the variable and the Display Name of the prefill question created in Webex Experience Management must be the same.

    If the Key parameter does not match the Display Name of the prefill question, the contact center doesn't send the Key-Value parameters to Webex Experience Management.

    If the variable includes personal information, make sure to enable the Mark as Personally Identifiable Information (PII) toggle for that Question in Webex Experience Management.

    For more information on PII, see PII Handling in Experience Management in Webex Experience Management Documentation.

    For more information about custom prefills, see Setup Custom Prefills for Post-Call Feedback Surveys in Webex Experience Management Documentation.

    Advanced Settings

    The Feedback activity has the following settings to help validate the expected DTMF responses from the customers.

    Table 5. Advanced Settings

    Parameter

    Description

    Timeout

    Indicates the maximum duration for which the activity waits for response from the customer. The default value is 3 seconds.

    You can configure the maximum number of retry attempts in case of invalid or no DTMF input, as well as audio notification messages (for invalid input, timeout, and maximum retries exceeded) for questionnaires by using Webex Experience Management.

    For more information, see Retry And Timeout Settings In Post Call IVR Survey in Webex Experience Management documentation.

    Play Message

    The Play Message activity plays an uninterruptible message to the caller. You can use the Play Message activity with or without the Text-to-Speech capability enabled. The configuration options change accordingly.

    You can configure an error-handling path (Undefined Error) to handle system errors that may occur during flow execution. For more information, see Error Handling.

  • The Play Message activity is uninterruptible for DTMF inputs.
  • The Play Message activity is interruptible due to agent's availability to answer the call, if included after the Queue Contact activity in a call flow.
  • The following sections enable you to configure the Play Message activity:

    General Settings

    Prompt

    General Settings

    Parameter

    Description

    Activity Label

    Enter a name for the activity.

    Activity Description

    (Optional) Enter a description for the activity.

    Prompt

    If you don't wish to use the Text-to-Speech capability in your prompt, disable the Text‐to‐Speech toggle button. By default, Text-to-Speech is not enabled.

    You can configure up to five audio prompts (audio files and audio prompt variables combined). The full prompt is played to the caller in the configured order, alternating between the audio files and audio prompt variables.

    If any of the ordered list inputs is empty, the system responds with a flow error. Resolve these errors before publishing the flow.

    Table 6. Prompt Configuration without Text-to-Speech Enabled

    Parameter

    Description

    Add Audio Files

    To configure the prompt without Text-to-Speech, add at least one prerecorded audio file. Choose the desired audio file from the drop-down list that is labeled as 1.

    To add more audio files, click Add New. The files play to the caller in the order in which they appear.

    To remove an audio file from the sequence, click the Delete icon that appears next to each drop-down list.

    Add Audio Variable

    Use this option to configure the audio prompt to be played dynamically to the customers. For example, you can configure this variable to play the audio prompt in multiple languages based on the customer's preference during the interaction.

    To configure the audio variable, click Add Audio Variable. Enter the variable value in the form of a pebble expression.

    For more information, see Pebble Template Syntax.

    The variable value must match the name of the .wav file that is uploaded to the Management Portal.

    To use the Text-to-Speech capability in your prompt, enable the Text‐to‐Speech toggle button. You can configure up to a total of five audio prompts (Text-to-Speech messages, audio files, and audio prompt variables combined). The full prompt is played to the caller in the configured order, alternating between the Text-to-Speech messages, audio files, and audio prompt variables.

    Table 7. Prompt configuration with Text-to-Speech enabled

    Parameter

    Description

    Connector

    Indicates the connector to authenticate the Text‐to‐Speech service. The drop-down list displays the name of all Google connectors in the Control Hub. Only the active connectors are displayed. Select the connector from the drop‐down list.

    Override Default Language & Voice Settings

    Use this toggle button to override the voice settings configured in the Global Voicename variable. This parameter is enabled by default.

    Output Voice

    Indicates the output voice name. This field appears only if you enable the Override Default Language & Voice Settings toggle button. Select the output voice name from the drop-down list.

    If the output voice name that is supported by Google isn't available in the Output Voice drop-down list, disable the Override Default Language & Voice Settings toggle button. Include the Set Variable activity before the Play Message activity in the flow.

    Configure the Set Variable activity as follows:

    Set the variable to Global_VoiceName.

    Set the variable value to the required output voice name code (for example, en-US-Standard-D). For more information on the supported voices and languages, see the Google Supported voices and languages page.

    Add Audio File

    To alternate Text-to-Speech messages with prerecorded audio files, click Add Audio File. This adds a new row to the configuration where you can choose the desired audio file from the drop-down list.

    To remove an item from the sequence, click the Delete icon that appears next to the corresponding input or drop-down list.

    Add Text-to-Speech Message

    To build the prompt, use Text-to-Speech or a mix of prerecorded audio files and Text-to-Speech messages.

    Click Add Text-to-Speech Message to add a new text input field to the prompt creation section. In this field, type the message to be played to the caller in the selected Language and Voice. The field accepts two types of input—raw text (plaintext) or Speech Synthesis Markup Language (SSML)‐formatted data. You can also use variables as part of the message to read the dynamic content.

    Add Audio Variable

    Use this option to configure the audio prompt to be played dynamically to the customers. For example, you can configure this variable to play the audio prompt in multiple languages based on the customer's preference during the interaction.

    To configure the audio variable, click Add Audio Variable. Enter the variable value in the form of a pebble expression.

    For more information, see Pebble Template Syntax.

    The variable value must match the name of the .wav file that is uploaded to the Management Portal.

    Text-to-speech settings

    The text-to-speech settings include the following settings that are used to validate the expected DTMF input from the caller.

    Table 8. Text-to-speech settings

    Parameter

    Description

    Speaking Rate

    Indicates the rate of speech. Increase or decrease the numeric input to maintain the ideal rate of speech and control the output speaking rate.

    Valid values for the numeric input are in the range of 0.25 to 4.0 words per minute (wpm). The default value is 1.0 wpm.

    Volume Gain

    Indicates the increase or decrease in volume output. Increase or decrease the numeric input to maintain the ideal volume of output speech.

    Valid entries for the numeric input are in the range of –96.0 decibels to 16.0 decibels (dB). The default value is 0.0 dB.

    When you include the Play Message activity before the HTTP Request activity in a call flow, the HTTP request executes only after the audio is played fully.

    Screen Pop

    A Screen Pop is a window or a dialog box that appears in an agent’s Desktop when the agent answers a customer call. The agent gets more information about the caller to proceed further with a conversation. For more information, see the section about Agent Desktop in the Cisco Webex Contact Center Agent Desktop User Guide.

    The Screen Pop activity becomes relevant only after an agent involves in an interaction. It typically uses the AgentAnswered event and the PhoneContactEnded event.

    When you use this activity in the Main Flow, you expose a set of events in the Event Flows tab. For more information on these events, see Events.

    You can build a single event handling flow for each event. For example, when an agent accepts an inbound call, a Screen Pop displays. The Screen Pop activity contains information that is based on the flow variables. The Screen Pop integrates Webex Contact Center with other business applications such as CRM (Salesforce), ticketing tools, and order entry system.

    Complete this configuration in the Event Flows tab in Flow Designer. To define different Screen Pop behaviors that are based on Main Flow criteria, use a Condition or Case activity. You can define one Screen Pop for each flow.

    You can configure an error-handling path (Undefined Error) to handle system errors that may occur during flow execution. For more information, see Event Flows.

    Screen Pop for new digital channels must be configured in the Connect Flow Builder. For more information, see https://help.imiconnect.io/docs/wxcc-overview.

    The following sections enable you to configure the Screen Pop activity:

    General Settings

    URL Settings

    Display Settings

    General Settings

    Parameter

    Description

    Activity Label

    Enter a name for the activity.

    Activity Description

    (Optional) Enter a description for the activity.

    URL Settings

    Use the URL settings option to define a URL for Screen Pop configurations. To type a variable, use the syntax {{variables}}.

    For example, {{NewPhoneContact.ANI}}.

    Table 9. URL Settings

    Parameter

    Description

    Screen Pop URL

    Enter the URL of the intended website, such as http://www.salesforce.com. After the agent answers a call, the configured URL populates the Screen Pop in the Desktop.

    Query Parameters

    Enter the various variables in the payload.

    To add a new query parameter, click Add New. Enter the attribute–value details in the KEY and VALUE fields respectively.

    Screen Pop Desktop Label

    Enter a short and intuitive custom display text that replaces the Screen Pop URL on the Agent Desktop.

    After the agent answers or ends a call, this label appears as a hyperlink in the Screen Pop notification on the Agent Desktop.

    For example, if the Screen Pop URL is http://www.salesforce.com and the Screen Pop Desktop Label is Salesforce, the system displays the hyperlink as Salesforce in the Screen Pop notification.

    This label also appears in the Screen Pop tab. If the screen pop label is missing, the system displays the default label Screen Pop.

    Display Settings
    Table 10. Display Settings

    Parameter

    Description

    New browser tab

    The Screen Pop displays in a new browser tab every time without affecting the existing Screen Pop.

    Existing Screen Pop tab

    The Screen Pop displays inside the existing browser tab replacing the previous Screen Pop.

    Inside Desktop

    The Screen Pop displays as a tab in the Auxiliary Information pane in the Desktop.

    If the Screen Pop display option is Inside Desktop, the Screen Pop displays in the Auxiliary Information pane for the duration of the call. The Screen Pop is retained even when you select a task from another channel type in the Task List pane.

    If the Screen Pop display option is Inside Desktop or Existing browser tab, data being entered in the Screen Pop for a call is lost if the agent accepts a new call. To prevent the loss of data, configure the display option as New browser tab.

    For example, consider that the Screen Pop display option is Inside Desktop. If the agent accepts a new inbound call while entering data in the Screen Pop for a previous call, the data being entered for the previous call is lost when the Screen Pop for the new call pops up.

    Collect Digits

    The Collect Digits activity prompts the caller to enter a Dual-Tone Multi-Frequency (DTMF) input such as an account number. Similar to the Play Message and Menu activities, the Collect Digits activity can use audio files, text-to-speech messages, or a combination of both.

    This activity accepts DTMF input digits from 0 through 9. The caller can enter # or * as a termination symbol to indicate the end of DTMF input.

    The caller cannot use the termination symbols for any other scenarios as part of Collect Digit activity such as confirming the amount or customer ID.

    By default, Next Generation media platform supports only RFC2833 type DTMF for both inbound and outbound calls.

    Next Generation media platform supports in-band DTMF.

    This feature is available only if the corresponding feature flag is enabled.

    You can also hear in-band DTMF tones during recording and in conference with other parties.

    You can configure these error-handling paths to handle flow execution errors:

    Table 11. Activity execution errors

    Description

    Entry Timeout

    Indicates the error output path that the flow takes after the entry timeout duration has elapsed. Configuring this path ensures that the caller doesn’t go idle for too long. Modify the entry timeout duration in the Advanced Settings section of the Properties pane. Consider playing a message to clarify what is expected from the caller, and then loop back to the start of the activity.

    Indicates the error output path that the flow takes if the caller enters a DTMF input that is not configured in the Custom Menu Links section. Configuring this path ensures that the caller is allowed to restart the activity and try again. Consider playing a message to clarify what is expected from the caller, and then loop back to the start of the activity.

    Prompt settings without text-to-speech enabled

    By default, text-to-speech is not enabled. To configure the prompt without text-to-speech, add at least one prerecorded audio file. Choose the audio file from the drop-down list. You can configure up to a total of five audio prompts (audio files and audio prompt variables combined). The full prompt is played to the caller in the configured order, alternating between the audio files and audio prompt variables.

    If any of the ordered list inputs is empty, the system displays a Flow Error. Resolve these errors before publishing the flow.

    Table 12. Prompt settings without text-to-speech enabled

    Parameter

    Description

    Add Audio File(s)

    To add more audio files, click Add New. The files are played to the caller in the sequence that they are configured.

    To remove an audio file from the sequence, click the Delete icon that appears beside each drop-down list. The Delete icon doesn’t appear when only one drop-down list is available because you need at least one audio file for the prompt.

    To manage audio files, see Upload an Audio Resource File.

    Add Audio Variable

    Use this option to configure the audio prompt to be played dynamically to the customers. For example, you can configure this variable to play the audio prompt in multiple languages based on the customer's preference during the interaction.

    To configure the audio variable, click Add Audio Variable. Enter the variable value in the form of a pebble expression.

    For more information, see Pebble Template Syntax.

    The variable value must match the name of the .wav file that is uploaded to the Management Portal.

    Make Prompt Interruptible

    The Make Prompt Interruptible check box allows you to indicate if the configured prompt can be interrupted by the caller's input or event. By default, prompts can't be interrupted. If the prompt is important for the caller to hear, don’t allow it to be interruptible.

    For the organizations that are provisioned with the new Next Generation platform, the system configures the prompt interruptible by default, irrespective of whether the Make Prompts Interruptible check box is checked or unchecked by the flow developers.

    Prompt settings with text-to-speech enabled

    By default, text-to-speech isn’t enabled. To use text-to-speech in your prompts, enable the Text-to-Speech toggle button. You can configure up to a total of five audio prompts (text-to-speech messages, audio files, and audio prompt variables combined). The full prompt is played to the caller in the configured order, alternating between the text-to-speech messages, audio files, and audio prompt variables configured.

    Table 13. Prompt configuration with text-to-speech enabled

    Parameter

    Description

    Connector

    The Language and Voice options change based on the selected connector. The selection dictates the language, gender, and tone that the system uses to read text-to-speech messages to the caller.

    If you’re using Google TTS, you can preview the various options on the Google Text to Speech page.

    Override Default Language & Voice Settings

    Use this toggle to override the voice settings configured in the Global Voicename variable. This parameter is enabled by default.

    Output Voice

    Indicates the output voice name. This field appears only if you enable the Override Default Language & Voice Settings toggle button. Select the output voice name from the drop-down list.

    If the output voice name that is supported by Google isn’t available in the Output Voice drop-down list, disable the Override Default Language & Voice Settings toggle button. Include the Set Variable activity before the Collect Digits activity in the flow.

    Configure the Set Variable activity as follows:

    Set the variable to Global_VoiceName.

    Set the variable value to the required output voice name code (for example, en-US-Standard-D). For more information on the supported voices and languages, see the Google Supported voices and languages page.

    Add Text to Speech Message

    When you build your prompt, you can use text-to-speech or a mix of prerecorded audio files and text-to-speech messages. Click Add Text-to-Speech Message to add a new text input field to the Prompt section. Here, you can type the message that is read to the caller with the selected language and voice. The field accepts two types of input: raw text (plaintext) or SSML-formatted data. You can use variables also as part of the message to read the dynamic content.

    To specify a variable, use this syntax: {{variable}}. For example, {{NewPhoneContact.ANI}}.

    Add Audio File

    To alternate text-to-speech messages with prerecorded audio files, click Add Audio File. This adds a new row to the configuration where you can select an audio file from a drop-down list.

    To remove an item from the sequence, click the Delete icon next to that item. The Delete icon isn’t visible when only one field is configured, because at least one message or audio file is required.

    Add Audio Variable

    Use this option to configure the audio prompt to be played dynamically to the customers. For example, you can configure this variable to play the audio prompt in multiple languages based on the customer's preference during the interaction.

    To configure the audio variable, click Add Audio Variable. Enter the variable value in the form of a pebble expression.

    For more information, see Pebble Template Syntax.

    The variable value must match the name of the .wav file that is uploaded to the Management Portal.

    Make Prompt Interruptible

    The Make Prompt Interruptible check box allows you to indicate if the configured prompt can be interrupted by the caller's input or event. By default, prompts can't be interrupted. If the prompt is important for the caller to hear, don’t allow it to be interruptible.

    For the organizations that are provisioned with the new Next Generation platform, the system configures the prompt interruptible by default, irrespective of whether the Make Prompts Interruptible check box is checked or unchecked by the flow developers.

    Text-to-speech settings

    The text-to-speech settings include the following settings that are used to validate the expected DTMF input from the caller.

    Table 14. Text-to-speech settings

    Parameter

    Description

    Speaking Rate

    Indicates the rate of speech. Increase or decrease the numeric input to maintain the ideal rate of speech and control the output speaking rate.

    Valid values for the numeric input are in the range of 0.25 to 4.0 words per minute (wpm). The default value is 1.0 wpm.

    Volume Gain

    Indicates the increase or decrease in volume output. Increase or decrease the numeric input to maintain the ideal volume of output speech.

    Valid entries for the numeric input are in the range of –96.0 decibels to 16.0 decibels (dB). The default value is 0.0 dB.

    Advanced Settings

    The Collect Digits activity includes the following advanced settings that are used to validate the expected DTMF input from the caller.

    Table 15. Advanced Settings

    Parameter

    Description

    No-Input Timeout

    Indicates the maximum duration that the Collect Digits activity waits for input, before proceeding to the Entry Timeout path. The default value is 3 seconds.

    Inter-Digit Timeout

    Indicates the maximum duration for which the Collect Digits activity waits between digits, before continuing in the flow. This occurs only after at least one digit is entered. The caller can enter the terminator symbol to indicate that the entry is completed, so that the call proceeds without waiting for the Inter-Digit Timeout.

    Inter-Digit Timeout isn’t applicable for customers using the Voice Services Platform. By default, this parameter isn’t disabled for customers using the Voice Services Platform.

    Minimum Digits

    Indicates the minimum number of digits that the caller must enter. The default value is 1. If the caller enters the input that is less than this value, the flow follows the Unmatched Entry path that is configured in the Error Handling section.

    Maximum Digits

    Indicates the maximum number of digits that the caller can enter. The default value is 10. If the caller enters the input that is more than this value, the flow follows the Unmatched Entry path that is configured in the Error Handling section.

    Terminator Symbol

    Indicates the character that the caller can enter to specify the end of input. The Terminator Symbol can be either # or * depending on the configuration.

    By default, the Terminator Symbol is #.

    Output Variables

    The Collect Digits activity includes the {{CollectDigits.DigitsEntered}} output variable. When the flow is executed, this variable stores the DTMF input that the caller entered during their interaction with the activity. Use this variable in later activities to control the flow sequence. The variable name dynamically changes based on the label that is associated with the Collect Digits activity. The system must capture multiple variable values if the flow uses more than one Collect Digits activity in the flow. For more information, see Event Output Variables.

    The Menu activity allows you to build an Interactive Voice Response (IVR) experience in your flow. The activity plays a prompt that allows the caller to enter a DTMF digit. Based on the digit that the caller enters, the flow can take a different path.

    A Menu can have 1–10 branches that are represented by digits 0–9.

    You can use the Menu activity with or without text-to-speech enabled. The configuration options change accordingly.

    You can configure these error-handling paths to handle flow execution errors:

    Table 16. Activity execution errors

    Description

    Entry Timeout

    Indicates the error output path that the flow takes after the entry timeout duration has elapsed. Configuring this path ensures that the caller doesn’t go idle for too long. Modify the entry timeout duration in the Advanced Settings section of the Properties pane. Consider playing a message to clarify what is expected from the caller, and then loop back to the start of the activity.

    Indicates the error output path that the flow takes if the caller enters a DTMF input that is not configured in the Custom Menu Links section. Configuring this path ensures that the caller is allowed to restart the activity and try again. Consider playing a message to clarify what is expected from the caller, and then loop back to the start of the activity.

    The following sections enable you to configure the Menu activity:

    General Settings

    Prompt

    Custom Menu Links

    Text-to-Speech settings

    Output Variable

    General Settings

    Parameter

    Description

    Activity Label

    Enter a name for the activity.

    Activity Description

    (Optional) Enter a description for the activity.

    Prompt

    Prompt settings without text-to-speech

    By default, text-to-speech is not enabled. To use text-to-speech in your prompt, enable the Text-to-Speech toggle button. Choose the audio file from the drop-down list. You can configure up to a total of five audio prompts (audio files and audio prompt variables combined). The activity plays the full prompt to the caller in the configured order, alternating between the audio files, and audio prompt variables configured.

    If any of the ordered list inputs is empty, the system throws a Flow Error. Resolve these errors before publishing the flow.

    Table 17. Prompt settings without text-to-speech enabled

    Parameter

    Description

    Add Audio Files

    To configure the prompt without text-to-speech, add at least one pre‐recorded audio file. Choose the file from the drop‐down field labeled 1. To add more audio files, click Add New.

    To remove an audio file from the sequence, click the Delete icon that appears beside the drop‐down list. Because at least one audio file is required, the Delete icon is not visible if only one drop‐down field is visible.

    Manage Audio Files from the Webex Contact Center Routing Strategies module. Navigate to the Resources tab and choose Audio Files. The audio files appear in a drop-down list. For more information, see Upload an Audio Resource File.

    Add Audio Variable

    Use this option to configure the audio prompt to be played dynamically to the customers. For example, you can configure this variable to play the audio prompt in multiple languages based on the customer's preference during the interaction.

    To configure the audio variable, click Add Audio Variable. Enter the variable value in the form of a pebble expression.

    For more information, see Pebble Template Syntax.

    The variable value must match the name of the .wav file that is uploaded to the Management Portal.

    Make Prompt Interruptible

    This option allows you to indicate if the configured prompt can be interrupted by the caller's input or event. By default, Make Prompt Interruptible is not checked for the Menu activity. If you want the caller to be able to interrupt the menu when they enter their DTMF input, consider making the message interruptible.

    For organizations that are provisioned with the new Next Generation platform, the system configures the prompt interruptible by default, regardless of whether the flow developers have checked or unchecked the Make Prompt Interruptible check box.

    Prompt settings with text-to-speech

    To use text-to-speech in your prompt, enable the Text-to-Speech toggle button. You can configure up to a total of five audio prompts (Text-to-Speech messages, audio files, and audio prompt variables combined). The activity plays the full prompt to the caller in the configured order, alternating between the Text-to-Speech messages, audio files, and audio prompt variables.

    Table 18. Prompt Settings with Text-to-Speech Enabled

    Parameter

    Description

    Connector

    Choose a connector to authenticate the text-to-speech service. The drop‐down list displays the names of the Google connectors that are configured in the Control Hub.

    Override Default Language & Voice Settings

    Use this toggle button to override the voice settings configured in the Global Voicename variable. This parameter is enabled by default.

    Output Voice

    Select the output voice name from the drop-down list.

    If the output voice name that Google supports is not available in the Output Voice drop-down list, disable the Override Default Language & Voice Settings toggle button. Include the Set Variable activity before the Menu activity in the flow.

    Configure the Set Variable activity as follows:

    Set the variable to Global_VoiceName.

    Set the variable value to the required output voice name code (for example, en-US-Standard-D). For more information on the supported voices and languages, see the Google Supported voices and languages page.

    Add Audio File(s)

    To alternate text-to-speech messages with prerecorded audio files, click Add Audio File. This adds a new row to the configuration where you can choose an audio file from a drop‐down list.

    To remove an item from the sequence, click the Delete icon near that item. Because at least one message or audio file is required, the Delete icon is not visible when only one field is configured.

    Add Text to Speech Message

    When you build your prompt, you can exclusively use text-to-speech or you can use a mix of prerecorded audio files and text-to-speech messages. Click Add Text-to-Speech Message to add a new text input field to the prompt creation section.

    You can type the message that should be read to the caller using the selected Language and Voice. The field accepts two types of input: raw text (plain text) or Speech Synthesis Markup Language (SSML)‐formatted data. You can also use variables as part of the message to read the dynamic content. If typing a variable, use this syntax: {{variable}}. For instance, {{NewPhoneContact.ANI}} uses valid variable syntax.

    Add Audio Variable

    Use this option to configure the audio prompt to be played dynamically to the customers. For example, you can configure this variable to play the audio prompt in multiple languages based on the customer's preference during the interaction.

    To configure the audio variable, click Add Audio Variable. Enter the variable value in the form of a pebble expression.

    For more information, see Pebble Template Syntax.

    The variable value must match the name of the .wav file that is uploaded to the Management Portal.

    Make Prompt Interruptible

    This option allows you to indicate if the configured prompt can be interrupted by the caller's input or event. By default, Make Prompt Interruptible is not checked for the Menu activity. If you want the caller to be able to interrupt the menu when they enter their DTMF input, consider making the message interruptible.

    For organizations that are provisioned with the new Next Generation platform, the system configures the prompt interruptible by default, regardless of whether the flow developers have checked or unchecked the Make Prompt Interruptible check box.

    Custom Menu Links

    The Custom Menu Links option allows you to configure one or more menu links based on the organizational requirements.

    This capability helps one or more users to select different branches in the flow based on the selected digit.

    You can configure up to ten Custom Menu Links.

    Table 19. General settings

    Parameter

    Description

    DIGIT

    Choose a number from the drop‐down list. DIGIT corresponds to the DTMF input that the caller enters to indicate which path of the flow to follow. Digits 0‐9 are available for selection, and you can select each option only once.

    LINK DESCRIPTION

    Add a description to indicate what path of the flow the digit corresponds to.

    For example, if pressing 1 leads the caller to a queue that can help with a sales question, type Sales in the link description. LINK DESCRIPTION has no impact on the call itself, but can help with tracking how the Menu is constructed.

    Add New

    Click Add New to add more menu links. You can add a digit and link description for each row. You can add up to ten links.

    You can configure menu links in both the Properties pane and in the activity itself. This allows for different configuration options that are based on the preference of the user. The system updates the content in real‐time in both locations when an edit is made.

    Text-to-Speech settings

    The text-to-speech settings include the following settings that are used to validate the expected DTMF input from the caller.

    Parameter

    Description

    Speaking Rate

    Indicates the rate of speech. Increase or decrease the numeric input to maintain the ideal rate of speech and control the output speaking rate.

    Valid values for the numeric input are in the range of 0.25 to 4.0 words per minute (wpm). The default value is 1.0 wpm.

    Volume Gain

    Indicates the increase or decrease in volume output. Increase or decrease the numeric input to maintain the ideal volume of output speech.

    Valid entries for the numeric input are in the range of –96.0 decibels to 16.0 decibels (dB). The default value is 0.0 dB.

    Entry Timeout

    Specifies the maximum time that the activity waits for input before proceeding down the Entry Timeout path. The default value is 3 seconds.

    Output Variable

    The Menu activity employs the {{Menu.OptionEntered}} output variable. When the system executes the flow, this variable stores the DTMF input that the caller entered during their interaction with the Menu.

    You can use the {{Menu.OptionEntered}} output variable in later activities to control the flow sequence. The variable name dynamically changes based on the label that is associated with the Menu activity. The system can capture multiple variable values when the flow uses more than one Menu activity. For more information about this variable type, see Activity Output Variables.

    Blind Transfer

    Transferring a voice call to either an external or third-party Dial Number (DN) through Interactive Voice Response (IVR) without agent intervention triggers the Blind Transfer activity.

    The Blind Transfer activity applies when a call should be transferred to an external or third-party DN based on a flow criteria set. The transfer can also be initiated to an external bridge. The configured criteria set triggers the activity.

    In case of blind transfer, the previous skill limitations will be retained when a call is transferred to a skill based queue. This is because skill limitations are calculated when a flow is executed. However, since the flow is not executed in case of blind transfer, the previous skill limitations are retained.

    You can configure an error-handling path (Undefined Error) to handle system errors that may occur during flow execution. For more information, see Event Flows.

    The following sections enable you to configure the Blind Transfer activity.

    General Settings

    Transfer Dial Number

    • When you design a flow, a Consult interaction can't include a Blind Transfer activity.
    • You can't add a Blind Transfer activity within the event flows in Flow Control.
    General Settings

    Parameter

    Description

    Activity Label

    Enter a name for the activity.

    Activity Description

    (Optional) Enter a description for the activity.

    Transfer Dial Number

    The Transfer Dial Number section indicates the DN that a call is transferred to. You can enter the number manually or select a dynamic number through a variable.

    The background noise removal feature is enabled by default for your organization. In situations where the agent wants to hear background noise from the customer, contact Customer Support to disable the feature flag.

    Table 20. Transfer Dial Number Settings

    Parameter

    Description

    Transfer Dial Number

    Enter the DN to which a call should be transferred. This can be a specific number that is manually entered, or a dynamic number that is indicated through a flow variable.

    Specific Dial Number

    Enter the number to which the call must be transferred.

    Variable Dial Number

    Choose the flow variable from the drop-down list. The variable stores the number to which the call should be transferred.

    Bridged Transfer

    The Bridged Transfer activity allows a call to be temporarily transferred with a flow to an external destination while retaining control of the call. The external destination can be an external bridge or an Interactive Voice Response service (IVR).

    When the third-party ends the call, the call flow continues for further re-engagement as required, like queuing it to an agent.

    The following sections guide you on how to configure the Bridged Transfer activity.

    General Settings

    Transfer Dial Number

    Transfer Timeout Settings Output Variables
    General Settings

    Parameter

    Description

    Activity Label

    Enter a name for the activity.

    Activity Description

    (Optional) Enter a description for the activity.

    Transfer Dial Number

    The Transfer Dial Number section indicates the DN to which a call is transferred. Enter the number manually or select a dynamic number through a variable.

    Table 21. Transfer Dial Number Settings

    Parameter

    Description

    Transfer Dial Number

    Enter the DN to which a call should be transferred. This can be a specific number that is manually entered, or a dynamic number that is indicated through a flow variable.

    Specific Dial Number

    Enter the number to which the call must be transferred.

    Variable Dial Number

    Choose the flow variable from the drop-down list. The variable stores the number to which the call should be transferred.

    Transfer Timeout Settings

    The Transfer Timeout Settings section allows you to configure the behavior of a Bridged Transfer activity when the transferred call is not answered within a specified time.

    Table 22. Transfer Timeout Settings

    Parameter

    Description

    Timeout

    This is how long the system waits for the transferred party to pick up the call. If the recipient does not pick up within this time, the system terminates the call.

    The duration should be in the range of 1 to 120 seconds. The default value is 10 seconds.

    Output Variables

    This is where you capture information on the outcome of the transfer.

    Table 23. Output Variables

    Parameter

    Description

    BridgedTransfer_dxm.FailureCode

    This parameter records error or status codes corresponding to failed attempts at performing a Bridged transfer using the Digital Extension Module (DXM).

    BridgedTransfer_dxm.FailureDescriptionThis parameter stores the description of the failure encountered during an attempted Bridged transfer using the (DXM).

    The following table summarizes the Bridged transfer activity output failure codes.

    Failure Code

    Failure Description

    Explanation
    1

    Invalid_Number

    The dialed external directory number (DN) is invalid.
    2BusyThe external DN is either engaged or has rejected the incoming call.
    3No answerThe external DN failed to answer the call within the preset timeout duration.
    48Unsupported flow activityThe flow can't execute the Bridged Transfer activity post-queueing or once an once an agent has been assigned to the call.
    5Unsupported_DNYou cannot use the external DN, if it is designated as an EP-DN within the system portal, or if it matches the logged in agent's DN on the Agent Desktop.
    6System_ErrorThis code represents miscellaneous errors that do not fall into the above defined categories.

     
    Bridged Transfer is available on Next Generation platforms (VPOP and Webex Calling) only.
    Unsupported Flow Configurations

    • You can't add the Bridged Transfer activity to the Queue Contact activity.
    • For contacts that are parked, queued, or assigned to an agent, do not introduce a Bridged Transfer activity later in the flow. This may lead to an unsupported flow error.
    • You can't use the Bridged Transfer activity in outbound call flows.
    • You can't add a Bridged Transfer activity within the event flows in Flow Control.

    Virtual Agent

    The Virtual Agent activity provides a real-time conversational experience for your contact center customers. You can add a Virtual Agent to the call flow to handle customer queries in the conversational format. The Virtual Agent is powered by Google’s Dialogflow capabilities. When a customer speaks, the Dialogflow matches the customer conversation to the best intent in the Virtual Agent. Further, it assists the customer as part of the Interactive Voice Response (IVR) experience.

    Before you use a Virtual Agent:

    1. Set up a Dialogflow agent. For more information on building a Dialogflow agent in the Google Cloud, see Build an agent.

      Include Hello as a training phrase in the preferred language for the Dialogflow agent to start a conversation with the caller. You can add this training phrase in the default welcome intent or in any other intent of the Dialogflow agent. For more information, see Intents.

      Depending on the way you set up the Dialogflow agent, you can use the Virtual Agent activity to handle different kinds of use cases.

      Configure a Virtual Agent in Control Hub. For more information, see Configure a Virtual Agent for Webex Contact Center.

      You can configure an error-handling path (Undefined Error) to handle system errors that may occur during flow execution. For more information, see Event Flows.

      The following sections enable you to configure the Virtual Agent activity:

      General Settings

      Conversational Experience

      Variable Passing

      Advanced Settings

      Output Variables

      General Settings

      Parameter

      Description

      Activity Label

      Enter a name for the activity.

      Activity Description

      (Optional) Enter a description for the activity.

      Conversational Experience

      Parameter

      Description

    Virtual AgentChoose a Virtual Agent in Control Hub.

    The Virtual Agent powers the natural language conversation as part of the IVR experience with the caller.

    Make Prompts Interruptible

    Enables the customers to interrupt the Virtual Agent to make new requests or end the call.

    Override Default Language & Voice Settings

    Use this toggle button to override the language and voice settings that are configured in Global_Language and Global_VoiceName variables. This parameter is enabled by default.


     
    For a flow to work, you need to set the global variables in the flow to configure the default input language and output voice for virtual agent. For more information about how to add global variables in the flow, see Global Variables.

    Input Language

    Indicates the language that the customer uses while speaking to the Virtual Agent. This field appears only if you enable the Override Default Language & Voice Settings toggle button.

    If the input language that Google supports is not available in the Input Language drop-down list, disable the Override Default Language & Voice Settings toggle button. Include the Set Variable activity before the Virtual Agent activity in the flow.

    Configure the Set Variable activity as follows:

    Set the variable to Global_language.

    Set the variable value to the required language code (for example, fr-CA). For more information on the languages, see the Google Language reference page.

    Virtual Agent voice deployments in Webex Contact Center support only languages with the recognition model as an enhanced phone call(see Supported voices and languages that are available with Dialogflow Essentials (ES) (see Language reference).

    Output Voice

    The default value is Automatic. When the value is Automatic, the Dialogflow chooses the voice name for a given language. Ensure that the voice name configured is as per the chosen language.

    If the output voice name that Google supports is not available in the Output Voice drop-down list, disable the Override Default Language & Voice Settings toggle button. Include the Set Variable activity before the Virtual Agent activity in the flow.

    Configure the Set Variable activity as follows:

    Set the variable to Global_VoiceName.

    Set the variable value to the required output voice name code (for example, en-US-Standard-D). For more information on the supported voices and languages, see the Google Supported voices and languages page.

    For more information on Text to Speech voices, see Supported voices and languages.

    Variable Passing

    The optional parameters in the Virtual Agent activity can contain personally identifiable information (PII). Webex Contact Center sends these parameters to the Google Dialogflow as variables to implement advanced conversational logic with the bot.

    Table 24. Optional Parameters

    Parameter

    Description

    Key-Value

    The Key-Value parameter allows you to enter a variable name and the associated value. You can enter variable values by using the double curly braces syntax.

    For example, if you want to return the account balance of a customer based on the ANI, the key and value can be:

    Key: ANI

    Value: {{NewPhoneContact.ANI}}

    To add a variable parameter, click Add New. This adds a row where you can enter the respective key-value pair.

    The contact center sends these parameter values to the Google Dialogflow as a JSON value in the request.query_param.payload object. The system parses and handles this JSON in the fulfillment application. The system reaches this application through the webhook that is configured in the Dialogflow. For more information, see Fulfillment.

    Advanced Settings
    Table 25. Advanced Settings
    Parameter

    Description

    No-Input Timeout

    Indicates the amount of time that the Virtual Agent waits for customer input (voice or DTMF).

    The default value is 5 seconds. The value can range from 1 to 30 seconds.

    Max No-Input Attempts

    Indicates the number of times the Virtual Agent waits for customer input (voice or DTMF).

    The default value is 3. The value can range from 0 to 9.

    When the maximum number of attempts elapse, the Virtual Agent exits, with the output variable ErrorCode set to the value max_no_input.

    Inter-digit Timeout

    The amount of time that the Virtual Agent waits for the next DTMF input from the customer before the Virtual Agent moves on in the conversation flow.

    The default value is 3 seconds. The value can range from 0 to 30 seconds.

    Terminator Symbol

    The character that the customer can enter to indicate the end of input. The Terminator Symbol can be either # or * depending on the configuration.

    Termination Delay

    Enables the Virtual Agent to complete the last message before the activity stops and moves on to the next step in flow.

    For example, if you want the Virtual Agent to indicate something to the caller before the system escalates the call to an agent, consider the time it takes to complete the final message before escalation. The value can range from 1 to 30 seconds.


     
    If you configure the Termination Delay value as 0, the system does not play the last audio message to the caller.

    Speaking Rate

    Indicates the rate of speech. Increase or decrease the numeric input to maintain the ideal rate of speech and control the output speaking rate.

    Valid values for the numeric input are in the range of 0.25 to 4.0 words per minute (wpm). The default value is 1.0 wpm.

    Volume Gain

    Indicates the increase or decrease in volume output. Increase or decrease the numeric input to maintain the ideal volume of output speech.

    Valid entries for the numeric input are in the range of –96.0 decibels to 16.0 decibels (dB). The default value is 0.0 dB.

    Enable Conversation Transcript

    Enables the Desktop to display the transcript of the conversation between the Virtual Agent and the customer. The raw transcript is also available through a dynamic URL. You can use this URL to extract specific sections from the transcript using an HTTP request.

    Output Variables

    These variables store the output status of the event that occurs during the conversation between the Virtual Agent and the customer.

    Table 26. Output Variables

    Output Variable

    Description

    VVA.LastIntent

    Stores the last intent that is triggered by the Virtual Agent before moving to the Escalation or Handled intent.

    VVA.TranscriptURL

    Stores the URL that points to the transcript of the conversation between the Virtual Agent and the customer.

    Use the Parse activity to extract the parameters from the Virtual Agent transcript.

    VVA.ErrorCode

    Stores the status code whose value depends on the outcome of the conversation between the Virtual Agent and the customer. This variable holds one of the following values:

    no_error: Indicates that the Handled and Escalated outputs had no errors.

    max_no_input: Indicates that the customer didn't have any input errors within the specified Max No-Input Attempts.

    term_char_without_input: Indicates that the customer pressed the termination key without any input (spoken or by key press). The terminator symbol can be either # or * depending on the configuration.

    system_error: Indicates any other error in the system. For example, Dialogflow error, network issue, and so on.

    To play a custom audio message to notify customers of an error, flow developers must include a Play Message activity (before disconnecting the call) in the flow. For more information on the Play Message activity, see Play Message.

    Outcomes

    Indicates the output paths for the Virtual Agent that occurs based on the outcome of the conversation between the Virtual Agent and the customer.

    Handled: The Dialogflow takes this path if the system triggers the Handled intent.

    Escalated: The Dialogflow takes this path if the system triggers the Escalation intent.

    For more information on the intents in the Dialogflow, see Intents.

    Error Handling

    Indicates the output path of the Virtual Agent that is based on the error that occurs during the conversation between the Virtual Agent and the customer.

    Error: The flow takes this path in any error scenarios.

    If there is an error, the contact center does not play any audio message to notify the customer of the error, by default. The flow developer can configure a Play Message activity either generically or based on the error code as described in the Output Variables section.

    The functionality of the output paths depends on the configuration and the flow that is defined by the administrator.

    Callback

    The Callback activity is available only if the preferred queue and the Callback feature are enabled for the enterprise. By default, the Callback activity creates a Courtesy Callback task in the same queue that the call was originally placed. If preferred, you can configure a different queue. If you use the same queue, the task retains its position in the queue until the next agent is available.


     
    When you design a flow, a Consult interaction can't include a Courtesy Callback activity.

    If a new queue is preferred, place the task at the bottom of the preferred queue. As an agent accepts the task, the Callback is initiated. If the caller doesn’t answer, the Callback isn’t retried.

    You can configure an error-handling path (Undefined Error) to handle system errors that may occur during flow execution. For more information, see Event Flows.

    The following sections enable you to configure the Callback activity:

    General settings Callback settings Output variables Error codes
    Table 27. General Settings

    Parameter

    Description

    Activity Label

    Enter a name for the activity.

    Callback Settings

    The Callback Settings section defines the Callback Dial Number and the queue in which the caller must be placed for the Callback request. The system reserves the caller's place in the queue until the next agent is available.

    Table 28. Callback Settings

    Parameter

    Description

    Callback Dial Number

    Enter the dial number at which the caller is to receive the Callback. Choose the variable from the drop-down list that contains the Callback number, such as the ANI that is associated with the call. The variable can be a number that is collected in a Collect Digits activity in the call flow. If no selection is made, the caller's ANI is used. The Callback number is stored in the NewPhoneContact.ANI event output variable.

    By default, the toggle button for Register callback to different destination? is set to off. The callback is registered on the same queued destination. If the preferred agent is busy and isn't available, set the toggle button on to select a new callback destination. The destination changes from agent to queue. You can't change the destination directly to another agent, but only to a queue which contains agents.

    Choose one of the available Callback Queue options from the drop-down list:

    Variable Queue: Allows the administrator to indicate a Callback Queue based on the conditions in the flow. The default is set to the queue in which the caller is placed, as captured in the contact parked. QueueName output variable is associated with the Queue Contact activity. If needed, choose a different variable from the drop‐down list. Ensure that the variable yields a valid queue selection.

    When you configure a flow for callback to preferred agent, place the Queue to Agent activity before the Callback activity in the flow.

    Static Queue: Choose a static queue in which all Callback requests are placed. Tasks are placed at the bottom of this queue. Manage queues from the Management Portal.

    Enables callback ANI configuration for customers when they receive a callback. Courtesy callback ANI configuration is not mandatory. Choose one of the available options:

    Static ANI: Choose a callback number from the drop-down list. These dial numbers map to entry points that are configured in the Management Portal. If you don't choose a callback number, Webex Contact Center uses the number that is mapped to the entry point for which you have requested the callback.

    Variable ANI (optional) : Choose a variable from the drop-down list. Ensure the variable provides a valid 10 digit number prefixed with country code. This code must be mapped to an entry point which initiates the callback. For using valid ANI formats, refer to the customized ANI validation table available in this section. If you don't choose a variable, Webex Contact Center considers the number that is mapped to the entry point for which you have requested the callback.

    You must use a Disconnect Contact activity to terminate a flow branch that uses a Callback activity. Otherwise, the call doesn’t end when a Callback request is placed.

    Flow administrators should test the feature in a non-production environment to make sure that the ANI configured as part of Variable ANI is correct or not. If the ANI provided is incorrect, then the callback switches to the default system ANI.

    These are the scenarios where the customized ANI is configured and validated for Tenant Management and Flow Control. Based on the stack that you use, you can see validations that are applicable to that stack only.

    Table 29. Customized ANI validation

    Description

    Tenant Management–ANI input

    PreDial/Courtesy callback–ANI input (Flow Control)

    Validation

    ANI without country code

    Without country code. For example, 2567312213

    Without country code. For example: 2567312213

    Valid ANI. Same ANI is used.

    Tenant Management ANI input is with country code and Flow Control ANI input is without country code configured.

    With country code. For example, +1-2567312213

    Without country code. For example, 2567312213

    Invalid ANI. DNIS is used

    Tenant Management ANI input is without country code and Flow Control ANI input is with country code configured

    Without country code. For example, 2567312213

    With country code. For example, +1-2567312213

    Invalid ANI. DNIS is used.

    Tenant Management ANI input does not have space in between and Flow Control ANI input has space in between.

    No space in between the number. For example, +1-2567312213

    Space in between the number. For example, +1-256 7312213

    Valid ANI. Same ANI is used.

    Tenant Management ANI input does not have hyphens in between and Flow Control ANI input has hyphens in between.

    No hyphens in between the number. For example, +1-2567312213

    Hyphens in between the number. For example, +1-256-731-2213

    Valid ANI. Same ANI is used.

    Output Variables

    When Callback triggers, the following variables update:

    Table 30. Output Variables

    Output Variable

    Description

    FailureCode

    Stores the failure code. The system sets this value only when the activity fails.

    FailureDescription

    Stores the failure details. The system sets this value only when the activity fails.

    Error Codes

    The following are the error codes and descriptions for the Callback activity:

    Table 31. Callback Failure Code Description

    Failure Code

    Failure Code Value

    Failure Description

    INVALID_REQUEST

    An invalid request was made in the activity.

    CALLBACK_NOT_SUPPORTED_ON_CHILD_INTERACTION

    Callback isn’t allowed on a child contact.

    INVALID_QUEUE

    An invalid queue was specified in the activity.

    INVALID_DESTINATION

    The destination number for the callback is invalid.

    FEATURE_NOT_ENABLED

    Feature isn’t enabled in the Webex Contact Center application.

    SYSTEM_ERROR

    The system encountered an internal error.

    Get Queue Info

    The Get Queue Info activity provides the caller's current Position in Queue (PIQ) and the Estimated Wait Time (EWT) along with other Activity output variables. You can use these variables to determine agent availability in a queue, and to route calls elsewhere when needed.


     
    If your organisation uses skill-based call selection, the output variable EWT always has the value of -1.

    The following sections of the Flow Designer enable you to configure the Get Queue Info activity:

    General Settings

    Queue Information and Lookback Time

    Output Variables

    Error Codes

    General Settings

    Parameter

    Description

    Activity Label

    Enter a name for the activity.

    Activity Description

    (Optional) Enter a description for the activity.

    Queue Information and Lookback Time

    Parameter

    Description

    Queue Information

    Choose the name of the queue for which you must retrieve a caller's estimated wait time and current position in the queue.

    You can manage the queues using the Management Portal.

    Lookback Time

    Specify the Lookback Time used to calculate the EWT after Get Queue Info triggers.

    Specify the duration in minutes only. Ensure that your input has numeric values only.

    The accepted value range is 5–240 minutes.

    The Get Queue Info activity has three types of output flow branches. These branches trigger based on the return status and values of EWT, PIQ, and the real-time statistics for other output variables.

    Success: This branch triggers when both the EWT and PIQ API return positive variable values. In this flow, you can retrieve and access valid EWT and PIQ variable values.

    Insufficient Information Flow: This branch triggers when the PIQ API returns a valid variable value, and EWT has the value of –1. In this flow, you can retrieve and access the PIQ value, but the EWT API fails because of insufficient data to calculate the EWT value.

    Failure: This branch triggers when PIQ API, EWT API, or one or more of the real-time statistics APIs fail or return invalid values. The EWT API fails because of reasons other than insufficient data to calculate the EWT value.

    Output Variables

    When Get Queue Info triggers, the following variables update:

    Output Variable

    Description

    Position In Queue (PIQ)

    Stores the value for the caller's current position in the queue for the selected queue. If the contact isn't queued when the flow invokes this activity, the PIQ value is set to the number of contacts that are currently waiting in the queue + 1. This identifies the position of the contact in the queue, if the contact is queued after executing the GetQueueInfo activity.

    EstimatedWaitTime (EWT)

    Stores the approximate amount of time a task has to wait in a queue before being answered by an agent. EWT is calculated for each Queue and is based on the average time that previous calls in the same queue waited for an agent. EWT uses the Lookback Time parameter entry and is reported in milliseconds (ms).

    LoggedOnAgentsCurrent

    Stores the number of agents in the current Call Distribution Group, for the selected queue, signed in to the desktop. If the activity is used before queueing, the stats for agents in current Call Distribution Group cycle will be returned based on the first Call Distribution Group cycle.

    LoggedOnAgentsAll

    Stores the total number of agents in all the Call Distribution Groups, for the selected queue, who are signed in to the desktop. This value may change as the Call Distribution Groups change over time in the queue.

    AvailableAgentsCurrent

    Stores the number of agents in the current Call Distribution Group, for the selected queue, who are available to accept the contact. If the activity is used before queueing, the stats for agents in current Call Distribution Group cycle will be returned based on the first Call Distribution Group cycle.

    AvailableAgentsAll

    Stores the total number of agents in all the Call Distribution Groups, for the selected queue, who are available to accept the call. This value may change as the Call Distribution Groups change over time in the queue.

    CallsQueuedNow

    Stores the total number of calls in the selected queue.

    OldestCallTime

    Stores the number of seconds that the oldest call has been in the selected queue.

    FailureCode

    Stores the failure code. The system sets this value only when the activity fails.

    FailureDescription

    Stores the failure details. The system sets this value only when the activity fails.

    Estimated Wait Time Calculation

    The Estimated Wait Time (EWT) is reported in ms.

    To calculate EWT, the application collects all statistically valid samples (a sample is the average of wait times for tasks that successfully connected to an agent in a one-minute interval) for the last XX minutes specified by the user-defined Lookback Time. The average value of the samples collected is used as the EWT.

    Statistically valid samples are those samples collected, for which the maximum value for CoV (Coefficient of Variance of the wait times for those tasks that got connected to an agent in each one minute interval) falls below 40 percent.

    If the percentage of valid samples collected for the user-defined Lookback Time falls below 40 percent, the EWT isn’t computed.

    Error Codes

    The following are the error codes and descriptions for the Get Queue Info activity:

    Table 32. Get Queue Info Failure Code Description

    Failure Code

    Failure Code Value

    Failure Description

    SYSTEM_ERROR

    The system encountered an internal error.

    STALE_DATA

    The data returned is not up-to-date.

    INSUFFICIENT_DATA

    The data returned by the activity is not complete.

    INVALID_QUEUE

    An invalid queue was specified in the activity.

    Advanced Queue Information

    The Advanced Queue Information activity returns the real-time count of agents who are in the Available state in a queue and are logged in for a specific set of skills, along with other queue information. Flow developers use the Advanced Queue Information activity to program the flow. Flow designers make decisions based on the Advanced Queue Information activity.

    You can configure an error-handling path (Undefined Error) to handle system errors that may occur during flow execution. For more information, see Events.

    The following sections of the Flow Designer enable you to configure the Advanced Queue Information activity:

    General Settings

    Output Variables

    Error Codes

    General Settings

    Parameter

    Description

    Activity Label

    Enter a name for the activity.

    Activity Description

    (Optional) Enter a description for the activity.

    Output Variables

    When the Advanced Queue Information activity is triggered, the following variables are updated:

    Output Variable

    Description

    Position In Queue (PIQ)

    Stores the value for the caller's current position in the selected queue. If the contact isn't queued when the flow invokes this activity, the PIQ value is set to the number of contacts that are currently waiting in the queue + 1. This identifies the position of the contact in the queue if the contact is queued after executing the AdvancedQueueInformation activity.

    LoggedOnAgentsCurrent

    Stores the number of agents in the current Call Distribution Group for the selected queue logged in to the desktop. The stats for agents in current Call Distribution Group will return -1 after considering the current Call Distribution Group as N/A before queueing.

    LoggedOnAgentsAll

    Stores the total number of agents in all the Call Distribution Groups for the selected queue, who are logged in to the desktop. This value may change as the Call Distribution Groups change over time in the queue.

    AvailableAgentsCurrent

    Stores the number of agents in the current Call Distribution Group for the selected queue, who are available to accept the contact. The stats for agents in current Call Distribution Group will return -1 after considering the current Call Distribution Group as N/A before queueing.

    AvailableAgentsAll

    Stores the total number of agents in all the Call Distribution Groups for the selected queue, who are available to accept the call. This value may change as the Call Distribution Groups change over time in the queue.

    CurrentGroup

    Stores the value of the current call distribution group where the contact is parked in a particular queue.

    TotalGroups

    Stores the value of the total number of call distribution groups in the queue for the contact.

    FailureCode

    Stores the failure code. The system sets this value only when the activity fails.

    FailureDescription

    Stores the failure details. The system sets this value only when the activity fails.

    Error Codes

    The following are the error codes and descriptions for the Advanced Queue Information activity:

    Table 33. Advance Queue Information Failure Code Description

    Failure Code

    Failure Code Value

    Failure Description

    INVALID_REQUEST

    An invalid request was made in the activity.

    QUEUE_NOT_FOUND

    The queue selected in the activity is not found.

    FEATURE_NOT_ENABLED

    Feature isn’t enabled in the Webex Contact Center application.

    DATABASE_OPERATION_FAILURE

    Database operation is failed during the activity execution.

    INVALID_QUEUE

    An invalid queue was specified in the activity.

    Disconnect Contact

    Use this terminating activity to disconnect an active leg of a call. This activity is required if no agents join the call to manually disconnect.

    For instance, use this activity before a call is queued or after scripting an opt-out of the queue experience. You can use as many Disconnect Contact activities as desired when you construct your flow to ensure that the call is terminated no matter which flow path it takes.

    You have the option of giving each activity a unique label and description, but no other configuration is required.

    You can configure an error-handling path (Undefined Error) to handle system errors that may occur during flow execution. For more information, see Event Flows.

    Table 34. General Settings

    Parameter

    Description

    Activity Label

    Enter a name for the activity.

    This activity has no Output Variables available.

    Queue Contact

    The Queue Contact activity places a contact in a queue. When you use this activity in the Main Flow, you expose a set of events in the Event Flows tab. For more information on these events, see Events.

    You can configure an error-handling path (Undefined Error) to handle system errors that may occur during flow execution. For more information, see Events.

    The following sections enable you to configure the Queue Contact activity:

    General Settings

    Contact Handling

    Skill Requirements

    Skill Relaxation

    Output Variables

    Error Codes

    General Settings

    Parameter

    Description

    Activity Label

    Enter a name for the activity.

    Activity Description

    (Optional) Enter a description for the activity.

    If you don't see the fields such as Static Queue, Variable Queue, Variable Priority, Variable Skill Value, Set Contact Priority, and Variable Agent Availability Check, contact Cisco Support to enable the corresponding feature flag.

    Contact Handling

    Use the Contact Handling section to choose if all contacts should go to a single queue, or if queue selection should change based on the value of a flow variable.

    Table 35. Contact Handling
    Parameter Description

    Static Queue

    Click the Static Queue radio button to route contacts to the single queue chosen in the Queue drop-down list. All contacts coming from the Entry Point associated with the configured workflow route to the chosen queue.

    Queue

    Choose a queue from the Queue drop-down list to route the contacts coming from the Entry Point associated to the workflow.

    You can manage queues in the Management Portal.

    Variable Queue

    Click the Variable Queue radio button to use a Queue Variable to dynamically select a queue to route contacts. You can also choose a Fallback Queue in case the Queue Variable fails during the flow execution.

    Queue Variable

    Choose a flow variable from the Queue Variable drop-down list that yields a valid Queue ID.

    The flow variable indicates which queue should be dynamically selected during the flow execution. The Fallback queue is used only if the Queue Variable fails to return a valid Queue ID.

    This field appears when you click the Variable Queue radio button.

    Fallback Queue

    Choose the Queue ID from the Fallback Queue drop-down list. In case the Queue Variable returns an invalid Queue ID, the contacts are queued to the selected Fallback Queue.

    If you click the Variable Queue radio button, you can’t input the skill requirements for the queue that uses skill-based routing. In such case, the contacts are routed to the Longest Available Agent overriding the selected queue routing algorithm.

    This field appears only when you click the Variable Queue radio button.

    Check Agent Availability

    Enable the Check Agent Availability toggle button to exclude teams with no available agents from routing as time in the queue progresses. The Call Distribution Group of the selected queue may skip to find an agent sooner.

    By default, this toggle button is disabled.

    Always Check Agent Availability

    Click the Always Check Agent Availability radio button to enable agent availability checking. By default, the radio button is enabled.

    This option appears only if you enable the Check Agent Availability toggle button.

    Variable Agent Availability Check

    Click the Variable Check Agent Availability radio button to select a flow variable from the Check Agent Availability Variable drop-down list that returns a Boolean. The Boolean determines whether to check the agent availability in the variable queue.

    This option appears only if you enable the Check Agent Availability toggle button.

    Set Contact Priority

    Enable the Set Contact Priority toggle button if you want to assign a priority to queued contacts. By default, this toggle button is disabled. The highest priority contact across all queues (voice and digital) is assigned to the next available agent who is:

    • logged in to a team that is in the current call distribution group of the contact
    • eligible to pick this contact based on the routing algorithm

    The contacts are handled as follows:

    If no priority is assigned to the contact, then the default priority is 10.

    Contacts with higher priority are handled first.

    If two contacts have the same priority, then the contact waiting in the queue for the longest duration is handled first.

    If the agent transfers the call to an entry point, the contact priority changes to the priority assigned to a Queue Contact activity in the new flow. For more information, see Transfer a Call to an Entry Point.

    Static Priority

    Set the Static Priority if you want to assign a priority before publishing the flow. You can see this field only when the Set Contact Priority toggle button is enabled.

    Choose a priority from the Static Priority Level drop-down list. You can set a priority from P1 to P9, where P1 is the highest and P9 is the lowest.

    Variable Priority

    Choose Variable Priority if the contact priority should change dynamically with each flow execution. This field appears only when the Set Contact Priority toggle button is enabled.

    Choose a flow variable which returns an Integer with priority from 1 through 9 from the Contact Priority Variable drop-down list. If the priority isn’t in the range 1–9, then the default priority is 10.

    Skill Requirements

    If the selected queue uses Skill-based Routing, another sections display to configure skill requirements and skill relaxation.

    You can add one or more skill requirements to assign to a contact in this queue based on the selected queue.

    If you don’t specify any skills, all the available agents in the selected queue are eligible to receive contacts.

    Table 36. Skill Settings

    Parameter

    Description

    Skill

    Choose the desired skill from the drop-down list. You configure the skill definitions in the Management Portal.

    Condition

    Choose the desired condition from the drop-down list. The condition options are based on the chosen skill type.

    Skill types such as, Boolean and Enum don’t need a Condition.

    The available conditions are: IS, IS NOT, >= , <=

    Value

    Click the Static Skill Value radio button to select the static skill values specified in the Skill Value field.

    Click the Variable Skill Value radio button to select the skill value from a flow variable listed in the Variable drop-down list.

    If the skill value is invalid, all skill requirements and relaxations that are associated with the contact that came through the QueueContactActivity are dropped.

    Skill Relaxation

    Use the Skill-relaxation settings to reduce or remove the assigned skill requirements to a flow in response to excessive customer wait times. This setting enables you to expand the pool of agents available to serve contacts.

    Use common time intervals to align Skill Relaxation with queue logic in the flow and with Call Distribution settings configured for teams in the queue.

    To configure skill relaxation:

    Enable the Enable Skill Relaxation toggle button to configure skill relaxation.

    Enable this toggle button to copy and display the initial Skill Requirements by default. This allows you to configure the skill relaxation with an ideal set of skills.

    Set the After waiting in the queue for field to the duration in seconds that must exceed before the skill relaxation applies in the queue. The default wait time is 60 seconds.

    You can add, edit, or delete the skill relaxation requirements.

    Click Add Skill Requirement to add a new skill relaxation requirement.

    Click Delete to delete the skill relaxation requirement.

    Click Edit to edit the skill relaxation requirement.

    Click Add Skill Relaxation Step to add a new skill relaxation group.

    The default skill requirements that appear in step 1 make it easier to set the skill relaxation requirements.

    Output Variables

    When Queue Contact triggers, the following variables update:

    Table 37. Output Variables